Several warranties protect your new vehicle. Read the warranty booklet
thoroughly so you understand the coverages and are aware of your rights
and responsibilities.
As you read this manual, you will
find information that is preceded by
a symbol. This
information is intended to help you
avoid damage to your vehicle, other
property, or the environment.
One of the best ways to enhance the enjoyment of your new vehicle is to
read this manual. In it, you will learn how to operate its driving controls and
convenience items. Afterwards, keep this owner’s manual in your vehicle so
youcanrefertoitatanytime.
Maintaining your vehicle according to the Maintenance Minder shown in
the instrument panel helps to keep your driving trouble-free while it
preserves your investment. When your vehicle needs maintenance, keep in
mind that your dealer’s staff is specially trained in servicing the many
systems unique to your vehicle. Your dealer is dedicated to your satisfaction
and will be pleased to answer any questions and concerns.
Congratulations! Your selection of a 2011 Honda Ridgeline was a wise
investment. It will give you years of driving pleasure.
Introduction
i
TM
10/04/19 15:37:49 31SJC650_002
2011 Ridgeline
−
California Proposition 65 Warning
This product contains or emits chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth
defects or other reproductive harm.
Event Data Recorders
This data belongs to the vehicle owner and may not be accessed by anyone else
except as legally required or with the permission of the vehicle owner.
Service Diagnostic Recorders
This vehicle is equipped with service-related devices that record information about powertrain performance. The data
can be used to verify emissions law requirements and/or help technicians diagnose and solve service problems. It may
also be combined with data from other sources for research purposes, but it remains confidential.
California Perchlorate Contamination Prevention Act
The airbags, seat belt tensioners, and CR type batteries in this vehicle contain perchlorate materials special
handling may apply. See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.
Introduction
WARNING:
This vehicle is equipped with one or more devices commonly referred to as event data recorders. These
devices record front seat belt use, front passenger seat occupancy, airbag deployment data, and the failure
of any airbag system component.
ii
10/04/19 15:37:53 31SJC650_003
2011 Ridgeline
−
−
−
−
−
−
Your safety, and the safety of others,
is very important. And operating this
vehicle safely is an important
responsibility.
To help you make informed
decisions about safety, we have
provided operating procedures and
other information on labels and in
this manual. This information alerts
you to potential hazards that could
hurt you or others.
Of course, it is not practical or
possible to warn you about all the
hazards associated with operating or
maintaining your vehicle. You must
use your own good judgement.
You will find this important safety information in a variety of forms,
including:
This entire book is filled with important safety information please read it
carefully.
how to use this vehicle correctly and safely.
such as Driver and Passenger Safety.
These signal words mean:
on the vehicle.
preceded by a safety alert symbol and one of
three signal words: , , or .
such as Important Safety Reminders or Important
Safety Precautions.
Instructions
Safety Section
Safety Labels
Safety Messages
Safety Headings
AFewWordsAboutSafety
DANGER WARNING CAUTION
iii
You CAN be HURT if you don’t follow
instructions.
You CAN be KILLED or SERIOUSLY
HURT if you don’t follow instructions.
You WILL be KILLED or SERIOUSLY
HURT if you don’t follow instructions.
10/04/19 15:38:02 31SJC650_004
2011 Ridgeline
In addition to these characteristics, your vehicle’s pickup bed area allows you to carry more cargo and has the dual-
action tailgate to handle the items easily.
These advantages come at some cost. Because your vehicle is taller and rides higher off the ground, it has a high
center of gravity. This means your vehicle can tip or roll over if you make abrupt turns. Utility vehicles have a
significantly higher rollover rate than other types of vehicles. In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is significantly
more likely to die than a person wearing a seat belt. As a reminder, make sure you and your passengers always wear
seat belts.
Overloading or improperly loading cargo could affect your handling and the vehicle’s stability, and could result in a
crash. Make sure the cargo is properly loaded and all items are secured in the pickup bed area.
For information on how to reduce the risk of rollover, read ‘‘Driving Guidelines’’ on page of this manual and the
section on page . Failure to operate your vehicle correctly might result in loss of
control, a crash, or rollover.
Your vehicle has higher ground clearance than a passenger vehicle designed for use only on pavement. Higher ground
clearance has many advantages for off-highway driving. It allows you to travel over bumps, obstacles, and rough
terrain. It also provides good visibility so you can anticipate problems earlier. Your vehicle also has a relatively short
wheelbase, allowing it to respond quicker to the steering wheel than other vehicles with a longer wheelbase.
306
268
Off-Highway Driving Guidelines
Important Handling Information
iv
10/04/19 15:38:08 31SJC650_005
2011 Ridgeline
(fluid capacities and tire pressures)
(seat belts, SRS, and child protection)
(main controls)
(indicators, gauges, multi-information display, dashboard, and steering column)
(fuel, vehicle break-in, and cargo loading)
(engine and transmission operation)
(vehicle specifications, tires, and emissions controls)
(warranty and contact information)
(how to order)
(flat tire, jump starting, overheating, and fuses)
( )
(minder, fluid checking, minor services, and vehicle storage)
climate control, audio, steering wheel, security, cruise control, HomeLink , and other convenience items
Contents
................................................................................................................................................Index .I
Service Information Summary
............................................................Driver and Passenger Safety .5
...............................................................................................Your Vehicle at a Glance .3
.......Instruments and Controls .59
.......................................................................Before Driving .247
.........................................................................................Driving .267
..............................................Technical Information .385
..................Warranty and Customer Relations (U.S. and Canada only) . 403
..................................................................................Authorized Manuals (U.S. only) .407
........................................Taking Care of the Unexpected .359
..............Features .145
.................................................Maintenance .311
1
10/04/19 15:38:17 31SJC650_006
Owner's Identification Form
00X31-SJC-6501
© 2010 American Honda Motor Co., Inc. - All Rights Reserved
2011 Ridgeline
2011 Ridgeline Online Reference Owner's Manual
How to operate the heating and air
conditioning system, the audio
system, and other convenience
features.
A convenient reference to the
sections in this manual.
A quick reference to the main
controls in your vehicle.
Explains the purpose of each
instrument panel indicator and gauge,
and how to use the controls on the
dashboard and steering column.
The proper way to start the engine,
shift the transmission, and park; plus
what you need to know if you’re
planning to tow a trailer.
ID numbers, dimensions, capacities,
and technical information.
How to order manuals and other
technical literature.
A summary of the information you
need when you pull up to the fuel
pump.
The Maintenance Minder shows
you when you need to take your
vehicle to the dealer for maintenance
service. There is also a list of things
to check and instructions on how to
check them.
A summary of the warranties
covering your new vehicle, and how
to contact us for any reason. Refer to
your warranty manual for detailed
information.
This section covers several problems
motorists sometimes experience,
and details how to handle them.
Important information about the
proper use and care of your vehicle’s
seat belts, an overview of the
supplemental restraint system, and
valuable information on how to
protect children with child restraints.
What gasoline to use, how to break-
in your new vehicle, and how to load
luggage and other cargo.
Contents
Your Vehicle at a Glance
Driver and Passenger Safety
Instruments and Controls
Features
Before Driving
Driving
Maintenance
Technical Information
Warranty and Customer
Relations
(U.S. and Canada only)
Authorized Manuals
(U.S. only)
Index
Service Information Summary
Taking Care of the Unexpected
Overview of Contents
2
TM
10/04/19 15:38:33 31SJC650_007
2011 Ridgeline
＊
＊
＊
CONTINUED
: If equipped
Your Vehicle at a Glance
Your Vehicle at a Glance
3
POWER WINDOW
SWITCHES
HOOD RELEASE
HANDLE
MIRROR CONTROLS
ACCESSORY POWER SOCKETS
FUEL FILL DOOR
RELEASE HANDLE
POWER DOOR LOCK
MASTER SWITCH
(P.134)
(P.103)
(P.128)
(P.252)
(P.249)
INSTRUMENT PANEL INDICATORS
GAUGES
(P.62)
(P.76)
PARKING BRAKE
RELEASE HANDLE
(P.132)
(P.139)
Vehicle with navigation system is shown.
PARKING BRAKE PEDAL
(P.132) (P.136)
CENTER CONSOLE
AUXILIARY INPUT JACK
AUDIO SYSTEM
(P.159)
PASSENGER’S FRONT
AIRBAG
HEATING/COOLING
CONTROLS
CLIMATE CONTROL
SYSTEM
GLOVE BOX
(P.138)
(P.9, 25)
(P.146)
(P.152)
(P.205)
DRIVER’S FRONT
AIRBAG
(P.9, 25)
REAR VIEW MIRROR WITH
COMPASS
(P.213)
10/04/19 15:38:40 31SJC650_008
2011 Ridgeline
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
▲
▼
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
Only on vehicles equipped with navigation system. Refer to the navigation system manual.
To use the horn, press the center pad of the steering wheel.
If equipped
On models with navigation system.
On models without navigation system.
1:
2:
3:
4:
5:
Your Vehicle at a Glance
4
Vehicle with navigation system is shown.
(P.31)
REMOTE AUDIO CONTROLS
HEADLIGHT CONTROL DIAL
VEHICLE STABILITY ASSIST (VSA)
SYSTEM OFF SWITCH
STEERING WHEEL
ADJUSTMENT
SEAT HEATERS
PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF
INDICATOR
SEL/RESET BUTTON
INFO ( ) BUTTON
SELECT BUTTON
INTERIOR LIGHT CONTROL
SWITCH
CRUISE CONTROLS
HAZARD WARNING BUTTON
MULTI-CONTROL LEVER
(WINDSHIELD WIPERS/
WASHERS/TURN SIGNALS/
HEADLIGHT HIGH BEAMS)
(P.94)
(P.95)
MOONROOF SWITCH
(P.131)
FOG LIGHTS
(P.292)
BED LIGHT SWITCH
(P.99)
(P.126)
(P.99)
(P.76)
(P.76)
(P.76)
(P.76)
TRIP/RESET BUTTON
(P.76)
(P.97)
INFO ( ) BUTTON
(P.203)
(P.210)
INSTRUMENT PANEL
BRIGHTNESS
(P.98)
VTM-4 LOCK
(P.276)
SHIFT LEVER
(P.271)
VOICE CONTROL BUTTONS
HORN
(P.144)
BLUETOOTH
HANDSFREELINK
SYSTEM VOICE
CONTROL BUTTONS
(P.221)
(P.142)
2
2
4
4
5
2
2
5
4
3
1
3
10/04/19 15:38:51 31SJC650_009
2011 Ridgeline
−
This section gives you important
information about how to protect
yourself and your passengers. It
shows you how to use seat belts. It
explains how your airbags work. And
it tells you how to properly restrain
infants and children in your vehicle.
.........Important Safety Precautions . 6
.......Your Vehicle’s Safety Features . 7
.......................................Seat Belts . 8
...........................................Airbags . 9
.........Protecting Adults and Teens . 11
.....1. Close and Lock the Doors . 11
...........2. Adjust the Front Seats . 13
............3. Adjust the Seat-Backs . 14
...4. Adjust the Head Restraints . 15
5. Fasten and Position the
.............................Seat Belts . 16
6. Maintain a Proper Sitting
................................Position . 17
.....Advice for Pregnant Women . 18
...Additional Safety Precautions . 19
Additional Information About Your
.................................Seat Belts . 20
..Seat Belt System Components . 20
......................Lap/Shoulder Belt . 21
Automatic Seat Belt
...............................Tensioners . 21
...............Seat Belt Maintenance . 22
Additional Information About
...........................Your Airbags . 23
......Airbag System Components . 23
How Your Front Airbags
.........................................Work . 25
...How Your Side Airbags Work . 28
How your Side Curtain Airbags
.........................................Work . 30
..How the SRS Indicator Works . 30
How the Side Airbag Off
......................Indicator Works . 31
How the Passenger Airbag Off
......................Indicator Works . 31
.............................Airbag Service . 32
...Additional Safety Precautions . 33
Protecting Children General
................................Guidelines . 34
All Children Must Be
...............................Restrained . 34
All Children Should Sit in a
.................................Back Seat . 35
The Passenger’s Front Airbag
.........Can Pose Serious Risks . 35
If You Must Drive with Several
...................................Children . 37
If a Child Requires Close
..................................Attention . 37
...Additional Safety Precautions . 38
Protecting Infants and Small
...................................Children . 39
.......................Protecting Infants . 39
.........Protecting Small Children . 40
.....................Selecting a Child Seat . 41
....................Installing a Child Seat . 42
...............................With LATCH . 43
.........With a Lap/Shoulder Belt . 46
..............................With a Tether . 48
...........Protecting Larger Children . 51
...............Checking Seat Belt Fit . 51
..................Using a Booster Seat . 52
When Can a Larger Child Sit in
.........................................Front . 53
...Additional Safety Precautions . 54
.............Carbon Monoxide Hazard . 55
...................................Safety Labels . 56
Driver and Passenger Safety
Driver and Passenger Safety
5
10/04/19 15:38:54 31SJC650_010
2011 Ridgeline
−You’ll find many safety
recommendations throughout this
section, and throughout this manual.
Therecommendationsonthispage
are the ones we consider to be the
most important.
A seat belt is your best protection in
all types of collisions. Airbags are
designed to supplement seat belts,
not replace them. So even though
your vehicle is equipped with airbags,
make sure you and your passengers
always wear your seat belts, and
wear them properly (see page ).
Children age 12 and under should
ride properly restrained in a back
seat, not the front seat. Infants and
smallchildrenshouldberestrained
in a child seat. Larger children
should use a booster seat and a lap/
shoulder belt until they can use the
belt properly without a booster seat
(see pages ).
While airbags can save lives, they
can cause serious or fatal injuries to
occupants who sit too close to them,
or are not properly restrained.
Infants, young children, and short
adults are at the greatest risk. Be
sure to follow all instructions and
warnings in this manual.
Alcohol and driving don’t mix. Even
one drink can reduce your ability to
respond to changing conditions, and
your reaction time gets worse with
every additional drink. So don’t drink
and drive, and don’t let your friends
drink and drive, either.
Engaging in mobile phone
conversation or other activities that
keep you from paying close attention
to the road, other vehicles and
pedestrians could lead to a crash.
Remember, situations can change
quickly, and only you can decide
when it is safe to divert attention
away from driving.
Having a tire blowout or a
mechanical failure can be extremely
hazardous. To reduce the possibility
of such problems, check your tire
pressures and condition frequently,
and perform all regularly scheduled
maintenance (see page ).
Excessive speed is a major factor in
crash injuries and deaths. Generally,
the higher the speed, the greater the
risk, but serious injuries can also
occur at lower speeds. Never drive
faster than is safe for current
conditions, regardless of the
maximum speed posted.16
34 54
348
Always Wear Your Seat Belt
Restrain All Children
Be Aware of Airbag Hazards
Don’t Drink and Drive
Pay Appropriate Attention to the
Task of Driving Safely
Keep Your Vehicle in Safe
Condition
Control Your Speed
Important Safety Precautions
6
10/04/19 15:39:04 31SJC650_011
2011 Ridgeline
Your vehicle is equipped with many
features that work together to
protect you and your passengers
during a crash.
Some features do not require any
action on your part. These include a
strong steel framework that forms a
safety cage around the passenger
compartment, front and rear crush
zones, a collapsible steering column,
and tensioners that tighten the front
seat belts in a crash.
However, you and your passengers
can’t take full advantage of these
features unless you remain sitting in
the correct position and
. In fact, some safety
features can contribute to injuries if
they are not used properly.
The following pages explain how you
cantakeanactiveroleinprotecting
yourself and your passengers.
Your Vehicle’s Safety Features
always wear
your seat belts
Driver and Passenger Safety
7
(7)
(9)
(1)
(2)
(6)
(10)
(8)
(5)
(2)
(11)
(4)
(3)(10)
(6) Seat Belts
(7) Front Airbags
(8) Front Seat Belt Tensioners
(9) Door Locks
(10) Side Airbags
(11) Side Curtain Airbags
(1) Safety Cage
(2) Crush Zones
(3) Seats and Seat-Backs
(4) Head Restraints
(5) Collapsible Steering Column
10/04/19 15:39:11 31SJC650_012
2011 Ridgeline
−
−
−
−
Your vehicle is equipped with seat
belts in all seating positions.
Seat belts are the single most
effectivesafetydeviceforadultsand
larger children. (Infants and smaller
children must be properly restrained
in child seats.)
Not wearing a seat belt properly
increases the chance of serious
injury or death in a crash, even
though your vehicle has airbags.
The pickup bed is not equipped with
seats or seat belts. Do not let anyone
ride in the pickup bed as they can
easily be thrown out and be killed or
seriously injured.
In addition, most states and all
Canadian provinces and territories
require you to wear seat belts.
Your seat belt system also includes
an indicator on the instrument panel
and a beeper to remind you and your
passengers to fasten your seat belts.
Keep you connected to the vehicle
so you can take advantage of the
vehicle’s built-in safety features.
When properly worn, seat belts:
Help protect you in almost every
type of crash, including:
frontal impacts
side impacts
rear impacts
rollovers
Your Vehicle’s Safety Features
Seat Belts
Why Wear Seat Belts
8
Not wearing a seat belt properly
increases the chance of serious
injury or death in a crash, even
though your vehicle has airbags.
Be sure you and your
passengers always wear seat
belts and wear them properly.
Allowing passengers to ride in
the pickup bed or on the tailgate
can result in death or serious
injury in a crash.
Make sure all passengers ride
in a seat and wear a seat belt
properly.
10/04/19 15:39:20 31SJC650_013
2011 Ridgeline
Your vehicle has a supplemental
restraint system (SRS) with front
airbags to help protect the heads and
chests of the driver and a front seat
passenger during a moderate to
severe frontal collision (see page
for more information on how
your front airbags work).
Your vehicle also has side airbags to
help protect the upper torso of the
driver or a front seat passenger
during a moderate to severe side
impact (see page for more
information on how your side airbags
work).
Help keep you in a good position
should the airbags ever deploy. A
good position reduces the risk of
injury from an inflating airbag and
allows you to get the best
advantage from the airbag.
Of course, seat belts cannot
completely protect you in every
crash.Butinmostcases,seatbelts
can reduce your risk of serious
injury.
Always wear
your seat belt, and make sure you
wear it properly.
Help keep you from being thrown
against the inside of the vehicle
and against other occupants.
Keep you from being thrown out
of the vehicle.
25
28
CONTINUED
Your Vehicle’s Safety Features
Airbags
What you should do:
Driver and Passenger Safety
9
10/04/19 15:39:28 31SJC650_014
2011 Ridgeline
The rest of this section gives more
detailed information about how you
can maximize your safety.
The most important things you need
to know about your airbags are:
They are designed to supplement
the seat belts.
Remember, however, that no safety
system can prevent all injuries or
deaths that can occur in a severe
crash, even when seat belts are
properly worn and the airbags deploy.
Always wear
your seat belt properly, and sit
upright and as far back from the
steering wheel as possible while
allowing full control of the vehicle. A
front passenger should move their
seat as far back from the dashboard
as possible.
To do their job, airbags must
inflate with tremendous force. So
while airbags help save lives, they
can cause minor injuries or more
serious or even fatal injuries if
occupants are not properly
restrained or sitting properly.
In addition, your vehicle has side
curtain airbags to help protect the
heads of the driver, front passenger,
and passengers in the outer rear
seating positions during a moderate
to severe side impact or rollover (see
page for more information on how
your side curtain airbags work).
30
Your Vehicle’s Safety Features
Airbags do not replace seat belts.
What you should do:
Airbags can pose serious hazards.
Airbags offer no protection in rear
collisions, or minor frontal or side
collisions.
10
10/04/19 15:39:35 31SJC650_015
2011 Ridgeline
−See pages for important
guidelines on how to properly
protect infants, small children, and
larger children who ride in your
vehicle.
The following pages provide
instructions on how to properly
protect the driver, adult passengers,
and teenage children who are large
enough and mature enough to drive
or ride in the front.
After everyone has entered the
vehicle, be sure the doors are closed
and locked. Before driving, be sure
the tailgate is also closed.
Your vehicle has a door and
tailgate open indicator on
the instrument panel to indicate
when any door or the tailgate is not
tightly closed.
Your vehicle also has an
In-Bed Trunk open
indicator to show when the In-Bed
Trunk lid is not tightly closed (see
page ).
Your vehicle also has a tailgate, In-
Bed Trunk, and door open indicator
on the multi-information display to
indicate when the tailgate, the In-
Bed Trunk, or a specific door is not
tightly closed. You will see the
appropriate indicator(s) and
message(s) for each condition.
You will also hear a beep when you
turn the ignition switch to the ON
(II) position, and each time you open
any door, the tailgate, or the In-Bed
Trunk with the key in the ON (II)
position.
Your vehicle also has a
tailgate and door open
indicator on the information display
to indicate when the tailgate or a
specific door is not tightly closed.
You will see the appropriate
indicator(s) for each condition.
34 54
75
CONTINUED
On models with navigation system
On models without navigation system
Protecting Adults and Teens
Introduction
Close and Lock the Doors1.
Driver and Passenger Safety
11
10/04/19 15:39:45 31SJC650_016
2011 Ridgeline
When one or more doors are open,
the ‘‘DOOR OPEN’’ message will
come on.
When the In-Bed Trunk is not tightly
closed, the ‘‘TRUNK OPEN’’
message will come on.
When the tailgate is not tightly
closed, the ‘‘TAILGATE OPEN’’
message will come on.
Protecting Adults and Teens
12
10/04/19 15:39:50 31SJC650_017
2011 Ridgeline
Adjust the driver’s seat as far to the
rear as possible while allowing you to
maintain full control of the vehicle.
Have a front passenger adjust their
seat as far to the rear as possible.
Locking the doors reduces the
chance of someone being thrown out
of the vehicle during a crash, and it
helps prevent passengers from
accidentally opening a door and
falling out.
Locking the doors also helps prevent
an outsider from unexpectedly
opening a door when you come to a
stop.
This vehicle has auto door locking/
unlocking features. See page for
how to set them.
When the In-Bed Trunk, tailgate,
and one or more doors are not
tightly closed, the ‘‘DOOR, TRUNK
& TAILGATE OPEN’’ message will
come on.
104
CONTINUED
Protecting Adults and Teens
Adjust the Front Seats2.
Driver and Passenger Safety
13
10/04/19 15:39:58 31SJC650_018
2011 Ridgeline
If you sit too close to the steering
wheel or dashboard, you can be
seriously injured by an inflating front
airbag, or by striking the steering
wheel or dashboard.
Adjust the driver’s seat-back to a
comfortable, upright position,
leaving ample space between your
chest and the airbag cover in the
center of the steering wheel.
Passengers with adjustable seat-
backs should also adjust their seat-
back to a comfortable, upright
position.
Once your seat is adjusted correctly,
rock it back and forth to make sure it
is locked into position. See page
for how to adjust the front seats.
If you cannot get far enough away
from the steering wheel and still
reach the controls, we recommend
that you investigate whether some
type of adaptive equipment may help.
The National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration and Transport
Canada recommend that drivers
allow at least 10 inches (25 cm)
between the center of the steering
wheel and the chest. In addition to
adjusting the seat, you can adjust the
steering wheel up and down (see
page ).99
119
On RT and Canadian DX and VP models
Protecting Adults and Teens
Adjust the Seat-Backs3.
14
Sitting too close to a front
airbag can result in serious
injury or death if the front
airbags inflate.
Always sit as far back from the
front airbags as possible.
10/04/19 15:40:05 31SJC650_019
2011 Ridgeline
Adjust the driver’s head restraint so
the center of the back of your head
rests against the center of the
restraint.
Reclining a seat-back so that the
shoulder part of the belt no longer
rests against the occupant’s chest
reduces the protective capability of
the belt. It also increases the chance
of sliding under the belt in a crash
and being seriously injured. The
farther a seat-back is reclined, the
greater the risk of injury.
When a passenger is seated in the
rear center seating position, make
sure the center head restraint is
adjusted to its highest position.
Properly adjusted head restraints
will help protect occupants from
whiplash and other crash injuries.Have passengers adjust their head
restraints properly as well. Taller
persons should adjust their restraint
as high as possible.
See page for how to adjust the
manual adjustable seat-back, and
page for the power adjustable
seat-back.
See page for how to adjust the
head restraints and how the driver’s
and front passenger’s active head
restraints work.
120
121
123
Protecting Adults and Teens
Adjust the Head Restraints4.
Driver and Passenger Safety
15
Reclining the seat-back too far
can result in serious injury or
death in a crash.
Adjust the seat-back to an
upright position, and sit well
back in the seat.
Improperly positioning head
restraints reduces their
effectiveness and you can be
seriously injured in a crash.
Make sure head restraints are
in place and positioned properly
before driving.
10/04/19 15:40:13 31SJC650_020
2011 Ridgeline
Position the lap part of the belt as
low as possible across your hips,
then pull up on the shoulder part of
the belt so the lap part fits snugly.
This lets your strong pelvic bones
take the force of a crash and reduces
the chance of internal injuries.
Insert the latch plate into the buckle,
then tug on the belt to make sure the
belt is securely latched. Check that
the belt is not twisted, because a
twisted belt can cause serious
injuries in a crash.
If necessary, pull up on the belt again
to remove any slack, then check that
the belt rests across the center of
your chest and over your shoulder.
This spreads the forces of a crash
over the strongest bones in your
upper body.
If the seat belt touches or crosses
your neck, or if it crosses your arm
instead of your shoulder, you need to
adjust the seat belt anchor height.
Fasten and Position the Seat
Belts
5.
Protecting Adults and Teens
16
Improperly positioning the seat
belts can cause serious injury
or death in a crash.
Make sure all seat belts are
properly positioned before
driving.
10/04/19 15:40:19 31SJC650_021
2011 Ridgeline
CONTINUED
This could cause
very serious injuries in a crash.
See page for additional
information about your seat belts
and how to take care of them.
The front seats have adjustable seat
belt anchors. To adjust the height of
an anchor, squeeze the two release
buttons, and slide the anchor up or
down as needed (it has four
positions).
If a seat belt does not seem to work
as it should, it may not protect the
occupant in a crash.
After all occupants have adjusted
their seats and head restraints, and
put on their seat belts, it is very
important that they continue to sit
upright, well back in their seats, with
their feet on the floor, until the
vehicle is safely parked and the
engine is off.
Using a seat
belt that is not working properly can
result in serious injury or death.
Have your dealer check the belt as
soon as possible.
Sitting improperly can increase the
chance of injury during a crash. For
example, if an occupant slouches,
lies down, turns sideways, sits
forward, leans forward or sideways,
or puts one or both feet up, the
chance of injury during a crash is
greatly increased.
20
Protecting Adults and Teens
Never place the shoulder portion of a
lap/shoulder belt under your arm or
behind your back.
No one should sit in a seat with an
inoperative seat belt.
Maintain a Proper Sitting
Position
6.
Driver and Passenger Safety
17
RELEASE
BUTTONS
10/04/19 15:40:27 31SJC650_022
2011 Ridgeline
In addition, an occupant who is out of
position in the front seat can be
seriously or fatally injured in a crash
by striking interior parts of the
vehicle or being struck by an
inflating front airbag.
If you are pregnant, the best way to
protect yourself and your unborn
child when driving or riding in a
vehicle is to always wear a seat belt,
and keep the lap part of the belt as
low as possible across the hips.
When driving, remember to sit
upright and adjust the seat as far
back as possible while allowing full
control of the vehicle. When riding
as a front passenger, adjust the seat
as far back as possible.
This will reduce the risk of injuries
to both you and your unborn child
that can be caused by a crash or an
inflating front airbag.
Each time you have a checkup, ask
your doctor if it’s okay for you to
drive.
Advice for Pregnant Women
Protecting Adults and Teens
18
Sitting improperly or out of
position can result in serious
injury or death in a crash.
Always sit upright, well back in
the seat, with your feet on the
floor.
10/04/19 15:40:34 31SJC650_023
2011 Ridgeline
If they do, they could be very
seriously injured in a crash.
If they do, they could
be killed or very seriously injured
in a crash.
They could be
killed or injured in a crash, or
become ill or even die from carbon
monoxide poisoning if engine
exhaust enters the cap.
A passenger who is not
wearing a seat belt during a crash
or emergency stop can be thrown
against the inside of the vehicle,
against other occupants, or out of
the vehicle.
If they do, they
could be very seriously injured in a
crash.
Devices intended to improve
occupant comfort or reposition the
shoulder part of a seat belt can
reduce the protective capability of
the seat belt and increase the
chance of serious injury in a crash.
Carrying hard or sharp
objects on your lap, or driving with
a pipe or other sharp object in
your mouth, can result in injuries
if your front airbag inflates.
If your
hands or arms are close to an
airbag cover, they could be injured
if the airbag inflates.
Objects on
the covers marked ‘‘SRS AIRBAG’’
could interfere with the proper
operation of the airbags or be
propelled inside the vehicle and
hurt someone if the airbags inflate.
If a side airbag or a
side curtain airbag inflates, a cup
holder or other hard object
attached on or near the door could
be propelled inside the vehicle and
hurt someone.
Improperly replacing
or covering front seat-back covers
can prevent your side airbags from
inflating during a side impact.
Protecting Adults and Teens
Additional Safety Precautions
Never let passengers ride in the
area in front of a folded-up rear
seat.
Never let passengers ride in the
pickup bed.
Never let passengers ride inside a
truck cap (shell).
Passengers should not stand up or
change seats while the vehicle is
moving.
Two people should never use the
same seat belt.
Do not put any accessories on seat
belts.
Do not place hard or sharp objects
between yourself and a front
airbag.
Keep your hands and arms away
from the airbag covers.
Do not attach or place objects on
the front airbag covers.
Do not attach hard objects on or
near a door.
Do not cover or replace front seat-
back covers without consulting
your dealer.
Driver and Passenger Safety
19
10/04/19 15:40:43 31SJC650_024
2011 Ridgeline
Your seat belt system includes lap/
shoulder belts in all seating positions.
The front seat belts are also
equipped with automatic seat belt
tensioners.
This system uses the same sensors
as the front airbags to monitor
whether the front seat belts are
latched or unlatched, and how much
weight is on the front passenger’s
seat (see pages and ).
If the indicator comes on or the
beeper sounds when the driver’s seat
belt is latched and there is no front
seat passenger and no items on the
front seat, something may be
interfering with the monitoring
system. Look for and remove:
Any items under the front
passenger’s seat.
Any object(s) hanging on the seat
or in the seat-back pocket.
Any object on the floor that is
touching the rear of the seat-back.
If no obstructions are found, have
your vehicle checked by a dealer.
The seat belt system
includes an indicator on the
instrument panel and a beeper to
remind you and your passengers to
fasten your seat belts.
This system monitors the front seat
belts. If you turn the ignition switch
to the ON (II) position before your
seat belt is fastened, the beeper will
sound and the indicator will flash. If
your seat belt is not fastened before
the beeper stops, the indicator will
stop flashing but remain on.
If a front passenger does not fasten
their seat belt, the indicator will
come on about 6 seconds after the
ignition switch is turned to the ON
(II) position.
If either the driver or a front
passenger does not fasten their seat
belt while driving, the beeper will
sound and the indicator will flash
again at regular intervals.
You will also see a ‘‘FASTEN SEAT
BELT’’ or ‘‘FASTEN PASSENGER
SEAT BELT’’ message on the multi-
information display (see page ).
When no one is sitting in the front
passenger’s seat, or a child or small
adult is riding there, the indicator
should not come on and the beeper
should not sound.
27 28
90
On models with navigation system
Additional Information About Your Seat Belts
Seat Belt System Components
20
10/04/19 15:40:53 31SJC650_025
2011 Ridgeline
For added protection, the front seat
belts are equipped with automatic
seat belt tensioners. When activated,
the tensioners immediately tighten
the belts to help hold the driver and
a front passenger in position.
All seat belts have an emergency
locking retractor. In normal driving,
the retractor lets you move freely in
your seat while it keeps some
tension on the belt. During a collision
or sudden stop, the retractor
automatically locks the belt to help
restrain your body.
The seat belts in all positions except
the driver’s have a lockable retractor
that must be activated to secure a
child seat (see page ).
The lap/shoulder belt goes over
your shoulder, across your chest,
and across your hips.
To fasten the belt, insert the latch
plate into the buckle, then tug on the
belt to make sure the buckle is
latched (see page for how to
properly position the belt).
To unlock the belt, press the red
PRESSbuttononthebuckle.Guide
the belt across your body so that it
retracts completely. After exiting the
vehicle, be sure the belt is out of the
way and will not get closed in the
door.
If the shoulder part of the belt is
pulled all the way out, the lockable
retractor will activate. The belt will
retract, but it will not allow the
passenger to move freely.
To deactivate the lockable retractor,
unlatch the buckle and let the seat
belt fully retract. To refasten the
seat belt, pull it out only as far as
needed.
46
16
CONTINUED
Automatic Seat Belt TensionersLap/Shoulder Belt
Additional Information About Your Seat Belts
Driver and Passenger Safety
21
10/04/19 15:41:02 31SJC650_026
2011 Ridgeline
If a seat belt is worn during a crash,
it must be replaced by the dealer. A
belt that has been worn during a
crash may not provide the same level
of protection in a subsequent crash.
The dealer should also inspect the
anchors for damage and replace
them if needed. If the automatic seat
belt tensioners activate during a
crash, they must be replaced.
Pull each belt out fully, and look for
frays, cuts, burns, and wear. Check
that the latches work smoothly and
the belts retract easily. If a belt does
not retract easily, cleaning the belt
may correct the problem (see page
). Any belt that is not in good
condition or working properly will
not provide good protection and
should be replaced as soon as
possible.
For safety, you should check the
condition of your seat belts regularly.
The tensioners are designed to
activate in any collision severe
enough to cause the front airbags to
deploy, or if a sensor detects your
vehicle is about to roll over (see page
).
The tensioners can also be activated
during a collision in which the front
airbags . In this case, the
airbags would not be needed, but the
extra tension in the seat belt could
be helpful.
Honda provides a limited warranty
on seat belts. See your
booklet for
details.
If a side curtain airbag deploys
during a side impact, the tensioner
on that side of the vehicle will also
deploy.
When the tensioners are activated,
the seat belts will remain tight until
they are unbuckled.
30
344
do not deploy
Honda
Warranty Information
Seat Belt Maintenance
Additional Information About Your Seat Belts
22
Not checking or maintaining
seat belts can result in serious
injury or death if the seat belts
do not work properly when
needed.
Check your seat belts regularly
and have any problem
corrected as soon as possible.
10/04/19 15:41:10 31SJC650_027
2011 Ridgeline
Your airbag system includes:
Two SRS (supplemental restraint
system) front airbags. The driver’s
airbag is stored in the center of
the steering wheel; the front
passenger’sairbagisstoredinthe
dashboard. Both are marked ‘‘SRS
AIRBAG’’ (see page ).
Two side airbags, one for the
driver and one for a front
passenger. The airbags are stored
in the outer edges of the seat-
backs. Both are marked ‘‘SIDE
AIRBAG’’ (see page ).
Two side curtain airbags, one for
each side of the vehicle. The
airbags are stored in the ceiling,
above the side windows. The front
and rear pillars are marked ‘‘SIDE
CURTAIN AIRBAG’’ (see page
).
25
28
30
CONTINUED
Additional Information About Your Airbags
Airbag System Components
Driver and Passenger Safety
23
(15)
(16)
(15)
(8)
(12)
(1)
(3)
(5)
(6)
(4)
(14)
(14)
(10)
(7)
(11)
(5)
(4)
(7)
(13)
(2)
(9)
(6) Driver’s Seat Position Sensor
(7) Front Passenger’s Weight Sensors
(8) Front Impact Sensors
(9) Passenger Airbag Off Indicator
(10) Occupant Position Detection System (OPDS) Sensors
(1) Driver’s Front Airbag
(2) Passenger’s Front Airbag
(3) Control Unit
(4) Front Seat Belt Tensioners
(5) Side Airbags
(11) Front Passenger’s Weight Sensors/OPDS Sensors Control Unit
(12) SRS Indicator
(13) Side Curtain Airbags
(14) Side Impact Sensors (First)
(15) Side Impact Sensors (Second)
(16) Roll Rate Sensor
10/04/19 15:41:19 31SJC650_028
2011 Ridgeline
Automatic front seat belt
tensioners (see page ).
Weight sensors that monitor the
weight on the front passenger’s
seat. If the weight is about 65 lbs
(29 kg) or less (the weight of an
infant or small child), the
passenger’s front airbag will be
turned off (see page ).
A rollover sensor that can detect if
your vehicle is about to roll over
and signal the control unit to
deploy both side curtain airbags
and front seat belt tensioners (see
page ).
A sophisticated electronic system
that continually monitors and
records information about the
sensors, the control unit, the
airbag activators, the seat belt
tensioners, and driver and front
passenger seat belt use when the
ignition switch is in the ON (II)
position.
Sensors that can detect a
moderate to severe front impact,
side impact, or if your vehicle is
about to rollover.
A driver’s seat position sensor that
monitors the distance of the seat
from the front airbag. If the seat is
too far forward, the airbag will
inflate with less force (see page
).
Sensors that can detect whether
the driver’s seat belt and the front
passenger’s seat belt are latched
or unlatched (see page ).
Sensors that can detect whether a
child is in the passenger’s side
airbag path and signal the control
unit to turn the airbag off (see
page ).
An indicator on the instrument
panel that alerts you to a possible
problem with your airbag system
components (see page ).
An indicator on the instrument
panel that alerts you that the
passenger’s side airbag has been
turned off (see page ).
An indicator on the dashboard that
alerts you that the passenger’s
front airbag has been turned off
(see page ).
Emergency backup power in case
your vehicle’s electrical system is
disconnected in a crash.
21
29
27
27
30
31
20
30
31
Additional Information About Your Airbags
24
10/04/19 15:41:28 31SJC650_029
2011 Ridgeline
After inflating, the front airbags
immediately deflate, so they won’t
interfere with the driver’s visibility,
or the ability to steer or operate
other controls.
Although both airbags normally
inflate within a split second of each
other, it is possible for only one
airbag to deploy.
If you ever have a moderate to
severe frontal collision, sensors will
detect the vehicle’s rapid
deceleration.
If the rate of deceleration is high
enough, the control unit will inflate
the driver’s and front passenger’s
airbags, at the time and with the
force needed.
During a frontal crash, your seat belt
restrains your lower body and torso,
and the front airbag helps protect
your head and chest.
This can happen if the severity of a
collision is at the margin, or
threshold, that determines whether
or not the airbags will deploy. In
such cases, the seat belt will provide
sufficient protection, and the
supplemental protection offered by
the airbag would be minimal.
Only the driver’s airbag will deploy if
there is no passenger in the front
seat, or if the advanced airbag
system has turned the passenger’s
airbag off (see page ).27
CONTINUED
How Your Front Airbags Work
Additional Information About Your Airbags
Driver and Passenger Safety
25
10/04/19 15:41:37 31SJC650_030
2011 Ridgeline
Your front airbags are also dual-
threshold airbags. Airbags with this
feature have two deployment
thresholds that depend on whether
sensors detect the occupant is
wearing a seat belt or not.
Your front airbags are dual-stage
airbags. This means they have two
inflation stages that can be ignited
sequentially or simultaneously,
depending on crash severity.
In a crash, both stages
will ignite simultaneously to provide
the quickest and greatest protection.
In a crash, one stage will
ignite first, then the second stage
will ignite a split second later. This
provides longer airbag inflation time
with a little less force.
The total time for inflation and
deflation is one-tenth of a second, so
fast that most occupants are not
aware that the airbags deployed until
they see them lying in their laps.
After a crash, you may see what
looks like smoke. This is actually
powder from the airbag’s surface.
Although the powder is not harmful,
people with respiratory problems
mayexperiencesometemporary
discomfort. If this occurs, get out of
the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do
so.
If the occupant’s belt is ,
the airbag will deploy at a slightly
lower threshold, because the
occupant would need extra
protection.
If the occupant’s belt is , the
airbag will deploy at a slightly higher
threshold, when the airbag would be
needed to supplement the protection
provided by the seat belt.
Dual-Threshold AirbagsDual-Stage Airbags
more severe
less severe
not latched
latched
Additional Information About Your Airbags
26
10/04/19 15:41:45 31SJC650_031
2011 Ridgeline
CONTINUED
Your front airbags are also advanced
airbags. The main purpose of this
feature is to help prevent airbag-
caused injuries to short drivers and
children or small-statured adults who
ride in front.
The driver’s advanced front airbag
system includes a seat position
sensor under the seat. If the seat is
too far forward, the airbag will
inflate with less force, regardless of
the severity of the impact.
The passenger’s advanced front
airbag system has weight sensors
under the seat. Although Honda
does not encourage carrying an
infant or small child in front, if the
sensors detect the weight of an
infant or small child (up to about 65
lbs or 29 kg), the system will
automatically turn the passenger’s
front airbag off.
If there is a problem with the sensor,
the SRS indicator will come on, and
the airbag will inflate in the normal
manner regardless of the driver’s
seating position.
Failure to follow these instructions
could damage the sensors or prevent
them from working properly.
For both advanced airbags to work
properly:
Occupants must sit upright and
wear their seat belts properly.
Do not spill any liquids on or
under the seats, cover the sensors,
or put any objects or metal items
under the front seats.
Objects placed or pushed under
the front passenger’s seat may
cause the sensor to malfunction,
increasing the risk of injury in a
crash.
Additional Information About Your Airbags
Advanced Airbags
Driver and Passenger Safety
27
DRIVER’S SEAT POSITION SENSOR PASSENGER’S SEAT WEIGHT SENSOR
10/04/19 15:41:54 31SJC650_032
2011 Ridgeline
Hanging heavy items on the front
passenger seat, or placing heavy
items in the seat-back pocket.
Moving the front seat forcibly
back against cargo on the seat or
floor behind it.
A rear passenger pushing or
pulling on the back of the front
passenger’s seat.
When the passenger airbag gets
turned off by the weight sensors, a
‘‘passenger airbag off’’ indicator in
the center of the dashboard comes
on (see page ).
Be aware that objects placed on the
passenger’s seat can also cause the
airbag to be turned off.
If you ever have a moderate to
severe side impact, sensors will
detect rapid acceleration and signal
the control unit to instantly inflate
either the driver’s or the passenger’s
side airbag.
To ensure that the passenger’s
advanced front airbag system will
work properly,
This includes:
If the weight sensors detect there is
no passenger in the front seat, the
airbag is automatically turned off.
However, the passenger airbag off
indicator in this situation will not
come on.
Also,makesurethefloormatbehind
the front passenger’s seat is hooked
to the floor mat anchor (see page
). If it is not, the mat may
interfere with the proper operation
of the sensors and operation of the
seat.
Back seat passengers should not
wedge objects or intentionally
force their feet under the front
passenger seat.
31
345
Additional Information About Your Airbags
How Your Side Airbags Work
do not do anything
that would increase or decrease the
weight on the front passenger’s seat.
28
10/04/19 15:42:03 31SJC650_033
2011 Ridgeline
Only one airbag will deploy during a
side impact. If the impact is on the
passenger’s side, the passenger’s
side airbag will deploy even if there
is no passenger.
To get the best protection from the
side airbags, front seat occupants
should wear their seat belts and sit
upright and well back in their seats.
Your vehicle has a side airbag cutoff
system designed primarily to protect
a child riding in the front passenger’s
seat.
If the side airbag off indicator comes
on (see page ), have the
passenger sit upright. Once the
passenger is out of the airbag’s
deployment path, the system will
turn the airbag back on, and the
indicator will go out.
There will be some delay between
the moment the passenger moves
into or out of the airbag deployment
pathandwhentheindicatorcomes
on or goes off.
A front seat passenger should not
use a cushion or another object as a
backrest. It may prevent the cutoff
system from working properly.
Although Honda does not encourage
children to ride in front, if the
position sensors detect a child has
leaned into the side airbag’s
deployment path, the airbag will shut
off.
Objects placed on the front
passenger seat can also cause the
side airbag to be shut off.
Thesideairbagmayalsoshutoffifa
short adult leans sideways, or a
larger adult slouches and leans
sideways into the airbag’s
deployment path.
31
Additional Information About Your Airbags
Side Airbag Cutoff System
Driver and Passenger Safety
29
10/04/19 15:42:11 31SJC650_034
2011 Ridgeline
If the impact is on the passenger’s
side, the passenger’s side curtain
airbag will inflate even if there are no
occupants on that side of the vehicle.
A rollover sensor monitors the
degree and rate your vehicle may roll
over and automatically deploy the
side curtain airbags and activate the
front seat belt tensioners (see page
).
In a rollover toward the front
passenger’s side of the vehicle, both
side curtain airbags will inflate and
the front seat belt tensioners will
activate even if there are no
occupants on that side of the vehicle.
To get the best protection from the
side curtain airbags, occupants
should wear their seat belts and sit
upright and well back in their seats.
When you turn the ignition switch to
the ON (II) position, this indicator
comes on for several seconds then
goes off. This tells you the system is
working properly.
If the indicator comes on at any
other time, or does not come on at all,
you should have the system checked
by your dealer. For example:
If the SRS indicator does not come
on after you turn the ignition
switch to the ON (II) position.
If the indicator comes on or
flashesonandoffwhileyoudrive.
If the indicator stays on after the
engine starts.
In a moderate to severe side impact,
sensors will detect rapid acceleration
and signal the control unit to
instantly inflate the side curtain
airbag and activate the seat belt
tensioner on the driver’s or the
passenger’s side of the vehicle.
The SRS indicator alerts you to a
potential problem with your airbags
or seat belt tensioners.
21
Additional Information About Your Airbags
How Your Side Curtain Airbags
Work
How the SRS Indicator
Works
In a Side Impact
In a Rollover
30
SIDE CURTAIN AIRBAG
10/04/19 15:42:22 31SJC650_035
2011 Ridgeline
CONTINUED
This indicator alerts you that the
passenger’s front airbag has been
shut off because weight sensors
detect about 65 lbs (29 kg) or less
(the weight of an infant or small
child) on the front passenger’s seat.
It does there is a problem
with the airbag.
You will also see a ‘‘CHECK
AIRBAG SYSTEM’’ message on the
multi-information display (see page
).
If you see any of these indications,
the airbags and seat belt tensioners
may not work properly when you
need them.
This indicator alerts you that the
passenger’s side airbag has been
automatically shut off. It does
mean there is a problem with your
side airbags.
When you turn the ignition switch to
the ON (II) position, the indicator
should come on for several seconds
andthengooff(seepage ).Ifit
doesn’t come on, stays on, or comes
on while driving without a passenger
in the front seat, have the system
checked.
You will also see a ‘‘PASSENGER
SIDE AIRBAG OFF’’ message on the
multi-information display (see page
).
90
90
64
On models with navigation system
On models with navigation system
Additional Information About Your Airbags
How the Passenger Airbag Off
Indicator Works
How the Side
Airbag Off
Indicator Works
not mean
not
Driver and Passenger Safety
31
Canada
PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF INDICATOR
U.S.
U.S. Canada
Ignoring the SRS indicator can
result in serious injury or death
if the airbag systems or
tensioners do not work properly.
Have your vehicle checked by a
dealer as soon as possible if
the SRS indicator alerts you to
a possible problem.
10/04/19 15:42:33 31SJC650_036
2011 Ridgeline
Your airbag systems are virtually
maintenance free, and there are no
parts you can safely service.
However, you must have your
vehicle serviced if:
Do not try to remove or replace
anyairbagbyyourself.Thismust
be done by an authorized dealer or
a knowledgeable body shop.
Any airbag
that has deployed must be
replaced along with the control
unit and other related parts. Any
seat belt tensioner that activates
must also be replaced.
Be aware that objects placed on the
front seat can cause the indicator to
come on.
If no weight is detected on the front
seat, the airbag will be automatically
shut off. However, the indicator will
not come on.
The passenger airbag off indicator
maycomeonandoffrepeatedlyif
the total weight on the seat is near
the airbag cutoff threshold.
If an adult or teenage passenger is
riding in front, move the seat as far
to the rear as possible, and have the
passenger sit upright and wear the
seat belt properly.
If the indicator comes on with no
front seat passenger and no objects
on the seat, or with an adult riding
there, something may be interfering
with the weight sensors. Look for
and remove:
Any items under the front
passenger’s seat.
Take your vehicle to an
authorized dealer as soon as
possible. If you ignore this
indication, your airbags may not
operate properly.
Any object(s) touching the rear of
the seat-back.
If no obstructions are found, have
your vehicle checked by a dealer as
soon as possible.
Any object(s) hanging on the seat
or in the seat-back pocket.
Additional Information About Your Airbags
Airbag Service
An airbag ever inflates.
The SRS indicator alerts you to a
problem.
32
10/04/19 15:42:42 31SJC650_037
2011 Ridgeline
Together, airbags and
seat belts provide the best
protection.
Tampering could cause
the airbags to deploy, possibly
causing very serious injury.
If water or
another liquid soaks into a seat-
back, it can prevent the side airbag
cutoff system from working
properly.
Even if your
airbags do not inflate, your dealer
should inspect the driver’s seat
position sensor, the front
passenger’s weight sensors, the
front seat belt tensioners, and all
seat belts and their anchors worn
during a crash to make sure they
are operating properly.
This could make the
driver’s seat position sensor or the
front passenger’s weight sensors
ineffective. If it is necessary to
remove or modify a front seat to
accommodate a person with
disabilities, first contact Honda
Automobile Customer Service at
(800) 999-1009.
Additional Information About Your Airbags
Additional Safety Precautions
Donotattempttodeactivateyour
airbags.
Do not tamper with airbag
components or wiring for any
reason.
Do not expose the front passenger’s
seat-back to liquid.
If your vehicle has a moderate to
severe impact.
Do not remove or modify a front
seat without consulting your
dealer.
Driver and Passenger Safety
33
10/04/19 15:42:48 31SJC650_038
2011 Ridgeline
−
−
−
If you have children, or ever need to
drive with a child in your vehicle, be
sure to read this section. It begins
with important general guidelines,
then presents special information for
infants, small children, and larger
children.
To reduce the number of child
deaths and injuries, every state,
Canadian province and territory
requires that infants and children be
properlyrestrainedwhentheyridein
a vehicle.
(see pages ).
(see pages ).
Children depend on adults to protect
them. However, despite their best
intentions, many adults do not know
how to protect child
passengers.
Each year, many children are injured
or killed in vehicle crashes because
they are either unrestrained or not
properly restrained. In fact, traffic
collisions are the number one cause
of death of children age 12 and
under.
39 50
51 54
properly
Protecting Children General Guidelines
All Children Must Be Restrained
Infants and small children must be
restrained in an approved child seat
that is properly secured to the
vehicle
Larger children must be restrained
with a lap/shoulder belt and ride on
a booster seat until the seat belt fits
them properly
34
Children who are unrestrained
or improperly restrained can be
seriously injured or killed in a
crash.
Any child too small for a seat
belt should be properly
restrained in a child seat. A
larger child should be properly
restrained with a seat belt and
use a booster seat if necessary.
10/04/19 15:42:55 31SJC650_039
2011 Ridgeline
−
Front airbags have been designed to
help protect adults in a moderate to
severe frontal collision. To do this,
the passenger’s front airbag is quite
large, and it can inflate with enough
force to cause very serious injuries.
If the vehicle seat is
too far forward, or the child’s head is
thrown forward during a collision, an
inflating front airbag can strike the
child with enough force to kill or
very seriously injure a small child.
Whenever possible,
larger children should sit in the back
seat, on a booster seat if needed, and
be properly restrained with a seat
belt (see page for important
information about protecting larger
children).
Even though your vehicle has an
advanced front airbag system that
automatically turns the passenger’s
front airbag off under certain
circumstances (see page ), please
follow these guidelines:
If
the airbag inflates, it can hit the back
of the child seat with enough force
to kill or very seriously injure an
infant.
According to crash statistics,
children of all ages and sizes are
safer when they are restrained in a
back seat.
The National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration and Transport
Canada recommend that all children
aged 12 and under be properly
restrained in a back seat. Some
states have laws restricting where
children may ride.
Children who ride in the back are
less likely to be injured by striking
interior vehicle parts during a
collision or hard braking. Also,
children cannot be injured by an
inflating front airbag when they ride
in the back.
51
31
CONTINUED
Protecting Children General Guidelines
Small Children
Placing a forward-facing child seat in
the front seat of a vehicle equipped
with a passenger’s front airbag can
be hazardous.
Larger Children
Children who have outgrown child
seats are also at risk of being injured
or killed by an inflating passenger’s
front airbag.
Never put a rear-facing child seat in
the front seat of a vehicle equipped
with a passenger’s front airbag.
Infants
All Children Should Sit in a Back
Seat
The Passenger’s Front Airbag
Can Pose Serious Risks
Driver and Passenger Safety
35
10/04/19 15:43:04 31SJC650_040
2011 Ridgeline
−
To remind you of the passenger’s
front airbag hazards, and that
children must be properly restrained
in a back seat, your vehicle has
warninglabelsonthedashboard
(U.S. models) and on the front visors.
Please read and follow the
instructions on these labels.
Protecting Children General Guidelines
Canadian Models
U.S. Models
36
SUN VISORS DASHBOARD
SUN VISORS
10/04/19 15:43:15 31SJC650_041
2011 Ridgeline
−
Many parents say they prefer to put
an infant or a small child in the front
passenger seat so they can watch the
child, or because the child requires
attention.
Placing a child in the front seat
exposes the child to hazards in a
frontal collision, and paying close
attention to a child distracts the
driver from the important tasks of
driving, placing both of you at risk.
Your vehicle has a back seat where
children can be properly restrained.
If you ever have to carry a group of
children, and a child must ride in
front:
Place the largest child in the front
seat, provided the child is large
enough to wear the lap/shoulder
belt properly (see page ).
If a child requires close physical
attention or frequent visual contact,
we strongly recommend that another
adult ride with the child in the back
seat. The back seat is far safer for a
child than the front.
Move the vehicle seat as far to the
rear as possible (see page ).
Have the child sit upright and well
backintheseat(seepage ).
Make sure the seat belt is properly
positioned and secured (see page
).
13
17
16
51
If You Must Drive with Several
Children
If a Child Requires Close
Attention
Protecting Children General Guidelines
Driver and Passenger Safety
37
10/04/19 15:43:23 31SJC650_042
2011 Ridgeline
−
During a crash, the
belt could press deep into the child
and cause serious or fatal injuries.
If they do, they
could be very seriously injured in a
crash.
Children who play in vehicles
can accidentally get trapped inside.
Teach your children not to play in
or around vehicles. Know how to
operate the emergency In-Bed
Trunk opener and decide if your
children should be shown how to
use this feature (see page ).
Opening or
closing the tailgate could cause
accidental injuries.
Even very young
children learn how to unlock
vehicle doors, turn on the ignition
switch, and open the windows,
which can lead to accidental injury
or death.
If you are not wearing a
seat belt in a crash, you could be
thrown forward and crush the
child against the dashboard or a
seat-back. If you are wearing a
seat belt, the child can be torn
from your arms and be seriously
hurt or killed.
If a child wraps a loose
seat belt around their neck, they
can be seriously or fatally injured.
(See pages and for how to
activate and deactivate the
lockable retractor.)
Leaving children without
adult supervision is illegal in most
states, Canadian provinces and
territories, and can be very
hazardous.
This can prevent
children from accidentally falling
out (see page ).
For example, infants and small
childrenleftinavehicleonahot
day can die from heatstroke. A
child left alone with the key in the
ignition switch can accidentally set
the vehicle in motion, possibly
injuring themselves or others.
46 47
104
117
Additional Safety Precautions
Protecting Children General Guidelines
Never put a seat belt over yourself
and a child.
Never let two children use the
same seat belt.
Lock all doors and the In-Bed
Trunk when your vehicle is not in
use.
Teach your children not to play on
the pickup bed.
Keep vehicle keys/remote
transmitters out of the reach of
children.
Neverholdaninfantorchildon
your lap.
Make sure any unused seat belt
that a child can reach is buckled,
the lockable retractor is activated,
and the belt is fully retracted and
locked.
Do not leave children alone in a
vehicle.
Use the childproof door locks to
prevent children from opening the
rear doors.
38
10/04/19 15:43:31 31SJC650_043
2011 Ridgeline
CONTINUED
An infant must be properly
restrained in a rear-facing, reclining
child seat until the child reaches the
seat maker’s weight or height limit
for the seat, and the child is at least
one year old.
Only a rear-facing child seat provides
proper support for a baby’s head,
neck, and back.
Two types of seats may be used: a
seat designed exclusively for infants,
or a convertible seat used in the rear-
facing, reclining mode.
If placed
facing forward, an infant could be
very seriously injured during a
frontal collision.
A rear-facing child seat can be placed
in any seating position in the back
seat, but not in the front.
If the passenger’s front airbag
inflates, it can hit the back of the
child seat with enough force to kill or
seriously injure an infant.
When properly installed, a rear-
facing child seat may prevent the
driver or a front passenger from
moving their seat as far back as
recommended, or from locking their
seat-back in the desired position.
It could also interfere with proper
operation of the passenger’s
advanced front airbag system.
Protecting Infants
Child Seat Type
Do not put a rear-f acing child seat in
a forward-facing position.
Never put a
rear-facing child seat in the front
seat.
Rear-facing Child Seat Placement
Protecting Infants and Small Children
Driver and Passenger Safety
39
10/04/19 15:43:40 31SJC650_044
2011 Ridgeline
In any of these situations, we
strongly recommend that you install
the child seat directly behind the
front passenger’s seat, move the seat
as far forward as needed, and leave it
unoccupied. Or, you may wish to get
a smaller rear-facing child seat.
Many states, Canadian provinces and
territories allow a child one year of
age or older who also meets the
minimum size and weight
requirements to transition from a
rear-facing child seat to a forward
facing seat. Know the requirements
where you are driving and follow the
child seat instructions. Many experts
recommend use of a rear-facing seat
up to age two, if the child’s height
and weight are appropriate for a
rear-facing seat.
If the vehicle seat is too
far forward, or the child’s head is
thrown forward during a collision, an
inflating airbag can strike the child
with enough force to cause very
serious or fatal injuries.
We strongly recommend placing a
forward-facing child seat in a back
seat, not the front.
We also recommend that a small
child use the child seat until the child
reaches the weight or height limit
for the seat.
Of the different seats available, we
recommend those that have a five-
point harness system as shown.
Protecting Infants and Small Children
Protecting Small Children
Child Seat Type
Placing a forward-facing child seat in
the front seat of a vehicle equipped
with a passenger’s airbag can be
hazardous.
Child Seat Placement
40
Placing a rear-facing child seat
in the front seat can result in
serious injury or death during a
crash.
Always place a rear-facing child
seat in the back seat, not the
front.
10/04/19 15:43:49 31SJC650_045
2011 Ridgeline
Since LATCH-compatible child seats
are easier to install and reduce the
possibility of improper installation,
we recommend selecting this style.
In seating positions and vehicles not
equipped with LATCH, a LATCH-
compatible child seat can be installed
using a seat belt.
Whatever type of seat you choose, to
provide proper protection, a child
seat should meet three
requirements:
Look for FMVSS 213 or CMVSS
213 on the box.
When buying a child seat, you need
to choose either a conventional child
seat, or one designed for use with
the Lower Anchors and Tethers for
CHildren (LATCH) system.
Conventional child seats must be
secured to a vehicle with a seat belt,
whereas LATCH-compatible seats
are secured by attaching the seat to
hardware built into each rear seating
position in the back seat.
If it is necessary to put a forward-
facing child seat in the front, move
the vehicle seat as far to the rear as
possible, and be sure the child seat is
firmly secured to the vehicle and the
child is properly strapped in the seat.
Even with advanced front airbags
that automatically turn the
passenger’s front airbag off (see
page ), a back seat is the safest
place for a small child.
Rear-facing for infants, forward-
facing for small children.
31
CONTINUED
Protecting Infants and Small Children, Selecting a Child Seat
Selecting a Child Seat
The child seat should meet
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Standard 213 or Canadian Motor
Vehicle Safety Standard 213.
The child seat should be of the
proper type and size to fit the child.
1.
2.
Driver and Passenger Safety
41
Placing a forward-facing child
seat in the front seat can result
in serious injury or death if the
front airbag inflates.
Ifyoumustplaceaforward-
facing child seat in front, move
the vehicle seat as far back as
possible, and properly restrain
the child.
10/04/19 15:43:58 31SJC650_046
2011 Ridgeline
After selecting a proper child seat
and a good place to install the seat,
there are three main steps in
installing the seat:
All child seats must be
secured to the vehicle with the lap
part of a lap/shoulder belt or with
the LATCH (Lower Anchors and
Tethers for CHildren) system. A
child whose seat is not properly
secured to the vehicle can be
endangered in a crash.
After installing a child
seat, push and pull the seat
forward and from side-to-side to
verify that it is secure.
A child seat secured with a seat belt
should be installed as firmly as
possible. However, it does not need
to be ‘‘rock solid.’’ Some side-to-side
movement can be expected and
should not reduce the child seat’s
effectiveness.
If the child seat is not secure, try
installing it in a different seating
position, or use a different style of
child seat that can be firmly secured.
Before purchasing a conventional
child seat, or using a previously
purchased one, we recommend that
you test the seat in the specific
vehicle seating position or positions
where the seat will be used.
Make sure the child is properly
strappedinthechildseat
according to the child seat maker’s
instructions. A child who is not
properly secured in a child seat
can be seriously injured in a crash.
The following pages provide
guidelines on how to properly install
a child seat. A forward-facing child
seat is used in all examples, but the
instructions are the same for rear-
facing child seats.
Selecting a Child Seat, Installing a Child Seat
Installing a Child Seat
Properly secure the child seat to
the vehicle.
Make sure the child seat is firmly
secured.
The child seat should fit the
vehicle seating position (or
positions) where it will be used.
Secure the child in the child seat.
1.
2.
3.
3.
42
10/04/19 15:44:06 31SJC650_047
2011 Ridgeline
To install a LATCH-compatible child
seat:
Make sure there are no objects
near the anchors that could
prevent a secure connection
between the child seat and the
anchors.
When using the tether strap on
the child seat, attach the tether
strap hook to the center tether
anchor before installing the child
seat to the lower anchors for the
LATCH system, because the
center tether anchor is positioned
behind the child seat.
If needed, move the seat belt
buckle or tongue away from the
lower anchors.
Whenever using the center tether
anchor point, make sure to push
down the head restraint to the lowest
position, route the strap over the
seat-back, then around the upper
guide before attaching the tether
strap hook to the center tether
anchor (see page ).
The location of each lower anchor is
indicated by a small button above the
anchor point.
The lower anchors are located
between the seat-back and seat
bottom, and are to be used only with
a child seat designed for use with
LATCH.
Your vehicle is equipped with
LATCH (Lower Anchors and
Tethers for CHildren) at the rear
seats.
1.
2.
3.
48
CONTINUED
On the center seating position
Installing a Child Seat
Installing a Child Seat with
LATCH
Driver and Passenger Safety
43
BUTTON
CENTER TETHER ANCHOR
LATCH
ANCHOR
POINTS
UPPER GUIDE
10/04/19 15:44:16 31SJC650_048
2011 Ridgeline
Make sure the head restraint is in
the lowest position. Lift the cover,
then route the tether strap around
the upper guide. Route the tether
strap downward properly, making
sure the strap is not twisted, then
attach the strap hook to the center
tether anchor.
Place the child seat on the vehicle
seat, then attach the seat to the
lower anchors according to the
child seat maker’s instructions.
Some LATCH-compatible seats
have a rigid-type connector as
shown above.
Other LATCH-compatible seats
have a flexible-type connector as
shown above.
Whatever type you have, follow
the child seat maker’s instructions
for adjusting or tightening the fit.
5.
4.
Installing a Child Seat
44
Flexible typeRigid type
10/04/19 15:44:22 31SJC650_049
2011 Ridgeline
Lift the head restraint (see page
), then route the tether strap
over the seat-back and through
the head restraint legs.
Lift the cover, then route the
tether strap around the upper
guide. Route the tether strap
downward properly, making sure
the strap is not twisted, then
attach the strap hook to the tether
anchor on the outside of the seat
bottom (see page ).
Push and pull the child seat
forward and from side-to-side to
verify that it is secure.
Tighten the strap according to the
seat maker’s instructions.
6. 7.
8.
48
123
On the outer seating position
Installing a Child Seat
Driver and Passenger Safety
45
Outer Position Center Position TETHER ANCHORTETHER ANCHOR
UPPER GUIDE UPPER GUIDE
10/04/19 15:44:28 31SJC650_050
2011 Ridgeline
When not using the LATCH system,
all child seats must be secured to the
vehicle with the lap part of a lap/
shoulder belt.
With the child seat in the desired
seating position, route the belt
through the child seat according
to the seat maker’s instructions,
then insert the latch plate into the
buckle and remove any slack from
the lap portion of the belt.
To activate the lockable retractor,
slowly pull the shoulder part of the
belt all the way out until it stops,
then let the belt feed back into the
retractor.
After the belt has retracted, tug on
it. If the belt is locked, you will not
be able to pull it out. If you can pull
thebeltout,itisnotlocked,and
you will need to repeat these steps.
In addition, the lap/shoulder belts in
all seating positions except the
driver’s have a lockable retractor
that must be activated to secure a
child seat.
If you intend to install the child seat
in the rear center seating position
and use the tether strap for
additional security, make sure to
push down the head restraint to the
lowest position and hook the tether
strap hook to the anchor before
securing the child seat with the lap/
shoulder belt. Refer to page for
how to route the tether strap
properly.
1. 2.
3.
48
Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/
Shoulder Belt
Installing a Child Seat
46
10/04/19 15:44:36 31SJC650_051
2011 Ridgeline
After confirming that the belt is
locked, grab the shoulder part of
the belt near the buckle, and pull
up to remove any slack from the
lap part of the belt. Remember, if
the lap part of the belt is not tight,
the child seat will not be secure.
Push and pull the child seat
forward and from side-to-side to
verify that it is secure enough to
stay upright during normal driving
maneuvers. If the child seat is not
secure, unlatch the belt, allow it to
retract fully, then repeat these
steps.
To remove slack, it may help to
putweightonthechildseat,or
push on the back of the seat while
pulling up on the belt.
To deactivate the lockable retractor
and remove a child seat, unlatch the
buckle, unroute the seat belt, and let
the belt fully retract.
4. 5.
Installing a Child Seat
Driver and Passenger Safety
47
10/04/19 15:44:41 31SJC650_052
2011 Ridgeline
When using a tether anchor, always
hook the tether strap through the
upper guide to route it properly.
Since a tether can provide additional
security to the lap/shoulder belt
installation, we recommend using a
tether whenever one is required or
available.
Each outer seating position has a
tether anchor at the outside of the
seat bottom. The center seating
position has a tether anchor between
the lower anchors for the LATCH-
compatible child seat. Each anchor
point is shown above.
Lift the cover, then hook the
tether strap through the upper
guide as shown.
After properly securing the child
seat (see page ), lift the head
restraint, then route the tether
strap over the seat-back and
through the head restraint legs.
A child seat with a tether can be
installed in any seating position in
the back seat.
1.
2.
46
Installing a Child Seat
Installing a Child Seat with a
Tether
Using an Outer Tether Anchor
48
COVER
CENTER
TETHER
ANCHOR
OUTER
TETHER
ANCHOR
OUTER TETHER ANCHOR
UPPER GUIDE
UPPER GUIDE
10/04/19 15:44:50 31SJC650_053
2011 Ridgeline
Route the tether strap downward
properly, making sure the strap is
not twisted.
Attach the tether strap hook to the
outertetheranchorontheoutside
of the seat bottom.
Make sure to attach the tether strap
hook to the anchor before installing
the child seat, because the tether
anchor is positioned behind the child
seat.
Place the child seat on the rear
seat.
Push down the rear center head
restraint to the lowest position.
Route the tether strap over the
seat-back, lift the cover, then hook
the tether strap through the upper
guide as shown.
Route the tether strap downward
properly along the seat-back,
making sure the strap is not
twisted.
Tighten the strap according to the
seat maker’s instructions.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
3.
4.
CONTINUED
Installing a Child Seat
Using the Center Tether Anchor
Driver and Passenger Safety
49
UPPER GUIDE
CENTER TETHER ANCHOR
10/04/19 15:44:59 31SJC650_054
2011 Ridgeline
Attach the tether strap hook to the
center tether anchor between the
loweranchorsfortheLATCH-
compatible child seat.
Properlysecurethechildseat(see
page ), then tighten the tether
strap according to the seat maker’s
instructions.
Whenever using the tether strap,
make sure to route the strap through
the upper guide before attaching the
tether strap hook to the tether
anchor. If the tether strap is not
routed properly and secured, the
child seat may not be secured. This
could lead to serious injury or death.
5.
6.
46
Installing a Child Seat
50
CENTER TETHER ANCHOR
UPPER GUIDE
10/04/19 15:45:04 31SJC650_055
2011 Ridgeline
The following pages give
instructions on how to check proper
seat belt fit, what kind of booster
seat to use if one is needed, and
important precautions for a child
who must sit in front.
To determine if a lap/shoulder belt
properly fits a child, have the child
put on the seat belt, then ask
yourself:
Does the child sit all the way back
against the seat?
Do the child’s knees bend
comfortably over the edge of the
seat?
When a child reaches the
recommended weight or height limit
for a forward-facing child seat, the
child should sit in a back seat on a
booster seat and wear the lap/
shoulder belt.
1.
2.
CONTINUED
Protecting Larger Children
Checking Seat Belt Fit
Driver and Passenger Safety
51
Allowing a child age 12 or under
to sit in front can result in injury
or death if the passenger’s front
airbag inflates.
If a child must ride in front,
move the vehicle seat as far
back as possible, use a booster
seat if needed, have the child
sit up properly and wear the
seat belt properly.
10/04/19 15:45:11 31SJC650_056
2011 Ridgeline
Does the shoulder belt cross
between the child’s neck and arm?
Is the lap part of the belt as low as
possible, touching the child’s
thighs?
Will the child be able to stay
seated like this for the whole trip?
If you answer yes to all these
questions, the child is ready to wear
the lap/shoulder belt correctly. If
you answer no to any question, the
child needs to ride on a booster seat. A child who has outgrown a forward-
facing child seat should ride in a
back seat and use a booster seat
until the lap/shoulder belt fits them
properly without the booster.
Some states, Canadian provinces and
territories also require children to
use a booster seat until they reach a
given age or weight (e.g., 6 years or
60 lbs). Be sure to check current
laws in the states, provinces and
territories where you intend to drive.
A child may continue using a booster
seat until the tops of their ears are
even with the top of the vehicle’s or
booster’s seat-back. A child of this
height should be tall enough to use
the lap/shoulder belt without a
booster seat.
If a child who uses a booster seat
must ride in front, move the vehicle
seat as far back as possible and be
sure the child is wearing the seat
belt properly.
Booster seats can be high-back or
low-back. Whichever style you select,
make sure the booster seat meets
federal safety standards (see page
) and that you follow the booster
seat maker’s instructions.
3.
4.
5.
41
Protecting Larger Children
Using a Booster Seat
52
10/04/19 15:45:20 31SJC650_057
2011 Ridgeline
If you decide that a child can safely
ride up front, be sure to:
Carefully read the owner’s manual,
and make sure you understand all
seat belt instructions and all safety
information.
Move the vehicle seat to the rear-
most position.
Have the child sit up straight, back
against the seat, and feet on or
near the floor.
Check that the child’s seat belt is
properly and securely positioned.
Physically, a child must be large
enough for the lap/shoulder belt to
properly fit (see pages and ). If
the seat belt does not fit properly,
with or without the child sitting on a
booster seat, the child should not sit
in front.
To safely ride in front, a child must
be able to follow the rules, including
sitting properly, and wearing the seat
belt properly throughout a ride.
A side airbag also poses risks. If any
part of a larger child’s body is in the
path of a deploying side airbag, the
child could receive possibly serious
injuries.
If the passenger’s front airbag
inflates in a moderate to severe
frontal collision, the airbag can cause
serious injuries to a child who is
unrestrained, improperly restrained,
sitting too close to the airbag, or out
of position.
The National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration and Transport
Canada recommend that all children
age 12 and under be properly
restrained in the back seat.
Of course, children vary widely. And
while age may be one indicator of
when a child can safely ride in front,
there are other important factors you
should consider.
Supervise the child. Even a mature
child sometimes needs to be
reminded to fasten the seat belt or
sit properly.
16 51
Physical Size
Maturity
When Can a Larger Child Sit in
Front
Protecting Larger Children
Driver and Passenger Safety
53
10/04/19 15:45:30 31SJC650_058
2011 Ridgeline
This could result
in serious neck injuries during a
crash.
This could
cause very serious injuries during
a crash. It also increases the
chance that the child will slide
under the belt in a crash and be
injured.
If they do, they
could be very seriously injured in a
crash.
Devices intended to
improve a child’s comfort or
reposition the shoulder part of a
seat belt can make the belt less
effective and increase the chance
of serious injury in a crash.
Protecting Larger Children
Additional Safety Precautions
Do not let a child wear a seat belt
across the neck.
Do not let a child put the shoulder
part of a seat belt behind the back
or under the arm.
Two children should never use the
same seat belt.
Do not put any accessories on a
seat belt.
54
10/04/19 15:45:35 31SJC650_059
2011 Ridgeline
Your vehicle’s exhaust contains
carbon monoxide gas. Carbon
monoxide should not enter the
vehicle in normal driving if you
maintain your vehicle properly and
follow the information on this page.
High levels of carbon monoxide can
collect rapidly in enclosed areas,
such as a garage. Do not run the
engine with the garage door closed.
Even with the door open, run the
engine only long enough to move the
vehicle out of the garage.
Have the exhaust system inspected
for leaks whenever:
The vehicle is raised for an oil
change.
You notice a change in the sound
of the exhaust.
The vehicle was in a crash that
may have damaged the underside.
With a truck cap installed and the
back window open, engine exhaust
may enter the vehicle and cause a
hazardous condition. Keep the back
window tightly closed whenever you
drive with a truck cap installed.
If you must sit in your parked vehicle
with the engine running, even in an
unconfined area, adjust the heating
and cooling system/climate control
system as follows:
Select the fresh air mode.
Select the mode.
Turn the fan on high speed.
Set the temperature control to a
comfortable setting.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Carbon Monoxide Hazard
Driver and Passenger Safety
55
Carbon monoxide gas is toxic.
Breathing it can cause
unconsciousness and even kill
you.
Avoid any enclosed areas or
activities that expose you to
carbon monoxide.
10/04/19 15:45:43 31SJC650_060
2011 Ridgeline
These labels are in the locations
shown. They warn you of potential
hazards that could cause serious
injury or death. Read these labels
carefully.
If a label comes off or becomes hard
to read (except for the U.S.
dashboard label which may be
removed by the owner), contact your
dealer for a replacement.
U.S. models
Canadian models
U.S. models only
U.S. models only
Safety Labels
56
RADIATOR CAP
DASHBOARD
SUN VISOR
SUN VISORS
10/04/19 15:45:57 31SJC650_061
2011 Ridgeline
U.S. models U.S. models Canadian modelsCanadian models
Safety Labels
Driver and Passenger Safety
57
PICKUP BEDDOORJAMBS
10/04/19 15:46:14 31SJC650_062
2011 Ridgeline
58
10/04/19 15:46:16 31SJC650_063
2011 Ridgeline
This section gives information about
the controls and displays that
contribute to the daily operation of
your vehicle. All the essential
controls are within easy reach.
...........................Control Locations . 60
............................Instrument Panel . 61
..........Instrument Panel Indicators . 62
.............................................Gauges . 76
..............Multi-Information Display .82
Controls Near the Steering
...........................................Wheel . 93
........................Multi-Control Lever . 94
........................................Headlights . 95
...............Headlight Control Dial . 95
........................................Fog Lights . 97
........Instrument Panel Brightness . 98
.................Hazard Warning Button . 99
..........Steering Wheel Adjustment . 99
................................................Keys . 100
......................Immobilizer System . 101
..............................Ignition Switch . 102
....................................Door Locks . 103
............Childproof Door Locks . 104
Auto Door Locking/
..............................Unlocking . 104
.....................Remote Transmitter . 110
.....................Dual-Action Tailgate . 113
...............................In-Bed Trunk
. 116
...............................................Seats . 119
..................................Seat Heaters . 126
............................Power Windows . 128
.......................................Moonroof . 131
...............................Parking Brake . 132
...........................................Mirrors . 133
.........Interior Convenience Items . 135
.........................Center Console . 136
.......Console Compartments . 136
.........................Cargo Hooks . 137
.....................Beverage Holders . 137
..................................Glove Box . 138
................................Coat Hooks . 138
....................Sunglasses Holder . 138
........Accessory Power Sockets . 139
...................................Sun Visor . 140
............................Vanity Mirror . 140
........................AC Power Outlet .141
...............................Interior Lights . 142
.....................................Bed Lights . 144
Instruments and Controls
Instruments and Controls
59
10/04/19 15:46:20 31SJC650_064
2011 Ridgeline
＊
＊
＊
: If equipped
Control Locations
60
Vehicle with navigation system is shown.
(P.103)
POWER DOOR LOCK
MASTER SWITCH
MIRROR CONTROLS
ACCESSORY POWER SOCKETS
(P.134)
(P.139)
REAR VIEW MIRROR WITH COMPASS
(P.213)
(P.132)
PARKING BRAKE
RELEASE HANDLE
INSTRUMENT PANEL INDICATORS
GAUGES (P.76)
(P.62)
POWER WINDOW
SWITCHES
(P.128)
PARKING BRAKE PEDAL
(P.132) (P.136)
CENTER CONSOLE
HOOD RELEASE HANDLE
(P.252)
FUEL FILL DOOR RELEASE
HANDLE
(P.249)
AUXILIARY INPUT JACK
(P.205)
AUDIO SYSTEM
HEATING/COOLING
CONTROLS
CLIMATE CONTROL
SYSTEM
GLOVE BOX
(P.138)
(P.146)
(P.152)
(P.159)
10/04/19 15:46:26 31SJC650_065
2011 Ridgeline
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
On models without navigation system.
On models with navigation system.
The U.S. instrument panel is shown. Differences for the Canadian models are noted in the text.
1:
2:
3:
On RTS, RTL models, and Canadian EX-L models.
Instrument Panel
Instruments and Controls
61
CRUISE CONTROL
INDICATOR
(P.72)
(P.70)
(P.75)
(P.65)
(P.63)
(P.63)
(P.63)
(P.69)
(P.75)
(P.82)/
INFORMATION
DISPLAY
MULTI-INFORMATION
DISPLAY
(P.77)
(P.67)
(P.62)
SIDE AIRBAG OFF INDICATOR
(P.74)
(P.67)
(P.66)
SECURITY SYSTEM INDICATOR (P.68)
HIGH BEAM
INDICATOR
(P.73)
(P.68)
(P.64)
ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM
(ABS) INDICATOR
DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHTS
INDICATOR
WASHER LEVEL INDICATOR
(P.67)
SEAT BELT REMINDER
INDICATOR
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT
SYSTEM INDICATOR
LOW FUEL INDICATOR
(P.71)
(P.69)
DOOR AND TAILGATE OPEN INDICATOR
IN-BED TRUNK OPEN INDICATOR
A/T TEMPERATURE INDICATOR
BED LIGHTS ON INDICATOR
(P.74)
MALFUNCTION INDICATOR
LAMP
LOW OIL PRESSURE
INDICATOR
CHARGING SYSTEM
INDICATOR
PARKING BRAKE AND BRAKE
SYSTEM INDICATOR
BACK WINDOW OPEN
INDICATOR
VTM-4 INDICATOR
LOW TIRE PRESSURE INDICATOR/
TPMS INDICATOR
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM
(TPMS) INDICATOR
LIGHTS ON INDICATOR
(P.75)
VEHICLE STABILITY ASSIST (VSA)
SYSTEM INDICATOR (P.70)
IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM
INDICATOR
(P.66)
MESSAGE INDICATOR
(P.64)
CRUISE MAIN
INDICATOR
(P.67)
(P.67)
MAINTENANCE MINDER INDICATOR
2
1
3
2
1
10/04/19 15:46:37 31SJC650_066
2011 Ridgeline
VSA OFF INDICATOR (P
.
71)
The instrument panel has many
indicators to give you important
information about your vehicle. This indicator comes on when you
turn the ignition switch to the ON
(II) position. It reminds you and your
passengers to fasten your seat belts.
A beeper also sounds if you have not
fastened your seat belt.
If you turn the ignition switch to the
ON (II) position before fastening
your seat belts, the beeper sounds,
and the indicator flashes. If you do
not fasten your seat belts before the
beeper stops, the indicator stops
flashing but remains on.
If your front passenger does not
fasten their seat belt, the indicator
comes on about 6 seconds after the
ignition switch is turned to the ON
(II) position.
If either of you do not fasten your
seat belt while driving, the beeper
will sound and the indicator will flash
again at regular intervals. For more
information, see page .
You will also see a ‘‘FASTEN SEAT
BELT’’ or ‘‘FASTEN PASSENGER
SEAT BELT’’ message on the multi-
information display (see page ).
For more information, see page .20
20
90
On models with navigation system
Seat Belt Reminder
Indicator
Instrument Panel Indicators
62
10/04/19 15:46:45 31SJC650_067
2011 Ridgeline
If this indicator comes on when the
engine is running, the battery is not
being charged. For more information,
see page .
The engine can be severely damaged
if this indicator flashes or stays on
when the engine is running. For
more information, see page .
For more information, see page .
You will also see a ‘‘CHECK
EMISSION SYSTEM’’ message on
the multi-information display (see
page ). For more information, see
page .
You will also see a ‘‘CHECK
CHARGING SYSTEM’’ message on
the multi-information display (see
page ).
You will also see a ‘‘CHECK
ENGINE OIL LEVEL’’ message on
the multi-information display (see
page ).
375
90
375
374
91
374
90
On models with navigation system
On models with navigation system On models with navigation system
Malfunction Indicator
Lamp
Charging System
Indicator
Low Oil Pressure
Indicator
Instrument Panel Indicators
Instruments and Controls
63
10/04/19 15:46:52 31SJC650_068
2011 Ridgeline
This indicator comes on for several
seconds when you turn the ignition
switch to the ON (II) position. If it
comes on at any other time, it
indicates a potential problem with
your front airbags. This indicator will
also alert you to a potential problem
with your side airbags, passenger’s
side airbag automatic cutoff system,
side curtain airbags, rollover sensor,
automatic seat belt tensioners,
driver’s seat position sensor, or the
front passenger’s weight sensors.
For more information, see page .
You will also see a ‘‘CHECK
AIRBAG SYSTEM’’ message on the
multi-information display (see page
).
You will also see a ‘‘PASSENGER
SIDE AIRBAG OFF’’ message on the
multi-information display (see page
).
This indicator comes on for several
seconds when you turn the ignition
switch to the ON (II) position. If it
comes on at any other time, it
indicates that the passenger’s side
airbag has automatically shut off.
For more information, see page .
30
90
31
90
On models with navigation system
On models with navigation system
Side Airbag Off
Indicator
Supplemental Restraint
System Indicator
Instrument Panel Indicators
64
U.S. Canada
10/04/19 15:47:00 31SJC650_069
2011 Ridgeline
This indicator has two functions:
Itcomesonwhenyouturnthe
ignition switch to the ON (II)
position. It is a reminder to check
the parking brake. A beeper
sounds if you drive with the
parking brake not fully released.
Driving with the parking brake not
fully released can damage the
brakes and tires.
You will also see a ‘‘RELEASE
PARKING BRAKE’’ message on the
multi-information display (see page
).
If it stays on after you have fully
released the parking brake while
the engine is running, or if it
comes on while driving, there
could be a problem with the brake
system. For more information, see
page .
You will also see a ‘‘BRAKE FLUID
LOW’’ or ‘‘CHECK BRAKE
SYSTEM’’ message on the multi-
information display (see page ) .
1.
2.
90
376
90
On models with navigation system
On models with navigation system
Parking Brake
and Brake
System
Indicator
Instrument Panel Indicators
Instruments and Controls
65
U.S. Canada
10/04/19 15:47:07 31SJC650_070
2011 Ridgeline
This indicator normally comes on for
a few seconds when you turn the
ignition switch to the ON (II)
position, and when the ignition
switch is turned to the START (III)
position. If it comes on at any other
time, there is a problem with the
ABS. If this happens, have your
vehicle checked at a dealer. With the
indicator on, your vehicle still has
normal braking ability but no anti-
lock brakes. For more information,
see page .
This indicator comes on for a few
seconds when you turn the ignition
switch to the ON (II) position. It will
go off if you have inserted a properly
coded ignition key. If it is not a
properly coded key, the indicator will
blink and the engine will not start
(see page ).
This indicator also blinks several
times when you turn the ignition
switch from the ON (II) position to
the ACCESSORY (I) or LOCK (0)
position.
You will also see a ‘‘CHECK ABS
SYSTEM’’ message on the multi-
information display (see page ).
The left or right turn signal indicator
blinks when you signal a lane change
or turn. If an indicator does not blink
or blinks rapidly, it usually means
one of the turn signal bulbs is
burned out (see pages and ).
Replace the bulb as soon as possible,
since other drivers cannot see that
you are signaling.
When you press the hazard warning
button, both turn signal indicators
and all turn signals on the outside of
the vehicle flash.
289
91
101
338 340
On models with navigation system
Anti-lock Brake System
(ABS) Indicator
Immobilizer System
Indicator
Turn Signal and
Hazard Warning
Indicators
Instrument Panel Indicators
66
10/04/19 15:47:15 31SJC650_071
2011 Ridgeline
This indicator comes on with the
high beam headlights. For more
information, see page .
If this indicator comes on when the
ignition switch is turned to the ON
(II) position and the parking brake is
released, it means there is a problem
with a circuit. Have your vehicle
checked by your dealer.
If you see a ‘‘CHECK DRL
SYSTEM’’ message on the multi-
information display, there is a
problem with the daytime running
light circuit. Take your vehicle to a
dealer to have it checked.
This indicator comes on when the
washer fluid level is low. Add washer
fluidwhenyouseethisindicator
(see page ).
This indicator comes on when you
set the cruise control. See page
for information on operating the
cruise control.
This indicator comes on when you
turn on the cruise control system by
pressing the CRUISE button (see
page ).
You will see a ‘‘WASHER FLUID
LOW’’ message on the multi-
information display (see page ).
95
330
91
210
210
On models with navigation system
On models with navigation system
High Beam Indicator Washer Level Indicator
Cruise Control Indicator
Cruise Main Indicator
Daytime Running Lights
Indicator
Instrument Panel Indicators
Instruments and Controls
67
10/04/19 15:47:25 31SJC650_072
2011 Ridgeline
This indicator comes on as a
reminder that you must refuel soon.
When the indicator comes on, there
are about 3.3 U.S. gal (12.5
)offuel
remaining in the tank.
When the needle reaches E, there is
a very small amount of fuel in the
tank.
You will also see a ‘‘FUEL LOW’’
message on the multi-information
display.
This indicator comes on when the
security system is set. See page
for more information on the
security system.
208
On models with navigation system
On RTS, RTL models, and Canadian
EX-L models
Low Fuel Indicator Security System Indicator
Instrument Panel Indicators
68
LOW FUEL INDICATOR
SECURITY SYSTEM INDICATOR
10/04/19 15:47:32 31SJC650_073
2011 Ridgeline
This indicator monitors the
temperature of the automatic
transmission fluid. It should come on
for a few seconds when you turn the
ignition switch to the ON (II)
position. If it comes on while driving,
it means the transmission fluid
temperature is too high. Pull to the
side of the road when it is safe, shift
to Park, and let the engine idle until
the indicator goes out.
This indicator reminds you that the
exterior lights are on. It comes on
when you turn the headlight control
dial to either the or
position.
If you turn the ignition switch to the
ACCESSORY (I) or LOCK (0)
position without turning off the
headlight control dial, this indicator
remains on. A reminder chime will
also sound when you open the
driver
’
s
door.
You will also see an ‘‘A/T TEMP
HIGH’’ message on the multi-
information display (see page ).91
On models with navigation system
Lights On Indicator A/T Temperature
Indicator
Instrument Panel Indicators
Instruments and Controls
69
Continuing to drive with the A/T
temperature indicator on may cause
serious damage to the transmission.
10/04/19 15:47:38 31SJC650_074
2011 Ridgeline
This indicator normally comes on for
a few seconds when you turn the
ignition switch to the ON (II)
position.
You will also see a ‘‘CHECK VSA
SYSTEM’’ message on the multi-
information display (see page ).
This indicator normally comes on for
a few seconds when you turn the
ignition switch to the ON (II)
position. If it comes on at any other
time, there is a problem in the 4WD
system. Take the vehicle to your
dealer to have it checked.
If the indicator blinks while driving,
the VTM-4 fluid temperature is too
high. Pull to the side of the road
when it is safe, shift to Park, and let
the engine idle until the indicator
goes out.
This indicator has two functions:
It flashes when VSA is active (see
page ).
Ifitcomesonandstaysonatany
other time, there is a problem with
the VSA system. Take your
vehicle to a dealer to have it
checked. Without VSA, your
vehicle still has normal driving
ability, but will not have VSA
traction and stability enhancement.
For more information, see page
.
91
1.
2.
291
290
On models with navigation system
Instrument Panel Indicators
Vehicle Stability Assist
(VSA) System Indicator
VTM-4 Indicator
70
Continuing to drive with the VTM-4
indicator blinking may cause serious
damage to the system.
11/07/12 15:04:35 31SJC650_075
2011 Ridgeline
This indicator comes on for a few
seconds when you turn the ignition
switch to the ON (II) position. It
remindsyouthatitistimetotake
your vehicle in for scheduled
maintenance. The maintenance main
items and sub items will be displayed
in the information display. See page
for more information on the
Maintenance Minder .
This indicator goes off when your
dealer resets it after completing the
required maintenance service.
This indicator normally comes on for
a few seconds when you turn the
ignition switch to the ON (II)
position. For more information, see
page .
Itcomesonasareminderthatyou
have turned off the vehicle stability
assist (VSA) system.
313
291
Maintenance Minder
Indicator
VSA OFF Indicator
Instrument Panel Indicators
Instruments and Controls
71
TM
11/07/12 15:04:41 31SJC650_076
2011 Ridgeline
If it comes on while driving, it
indicates that one or more of your
vehicle’s tires are significantly low
on pressure.
This indicator normally comes on for
a few seconds when you turn the
ignition switch to the ON (II)
position.
If this happens, pull to the side of the
road when it is safe, check which tire
has lost the pressure on the tire
pressure monitor, and determine the
cause. If it is because of a flat tire,
replace the flat tire with the compact
spare (see page ), and have the
flat tire repaired as soon as possible.
If two or more tires are underinflated,
call a professional towing service
(see page ). Refer to page
for more information.
This indicator normally comes on for
a few seconds when you turn the
ignition switch to the ON (II)
position.
This indicator has two functions:
Check the tire pressure monitor
on the multi-information display
and determine the cause (see page
).
You will also see a ‘‘CHECK TIRE
PRESSURE’’ message on the
multi-information display (see
page ) .
If it comes on while driving, it
indicates that one or more of your
vehicle’s tires are significantly low
on pressure.
1.
383
278
282
91
361
On models without navigation system On models with navigation system
Low Tire Pressure
Indicator
Low Tire Pressure/
TPMS Indicator
Instrument Panel Indicators
72
10/04/19 15:48:04 31SJC650_077
2011 Ridgeline
If this indicator comes on and stays
on at any other time, or if it does not
come on when you turn the ignition
switch to the ON (II) position, there
is a problem with the TPMS. With
this indicator on, the low tire
pressure indicator and the tire
pressure monitor will not come on
when a tire loses pressure. Take the
vehicle to your dealer to have the
system checked.
This indicator normally comes on for
a few seconds when you turn the
ignition switch to the ON (II)
position.
If this happens, pull to the side of the
road when it is safe, check which tire
has lost pressure on the multi-
information display, and determine
the cause. If it is because of a flat tire,
have the flat tire repaired as soon as
possible. If two or more tires are
underinflated, call a professional
towing service. For more
information, see page .
If this indicator begins to flash,
there is a problem with the tire
pressure monitoring system
(TPMS). You will also see a
‘‘CHECK TPMS SYSTEM’’
message on the multi-information
display. The indicator continues to
flash for a while (approximately 1
minute), then stays on. If this
happens, have your dealer check
the system as soon as possible.
For more information, see
page
.
2.
383
284
On models without navigation system
Tire Pressure Monitoring
System (TPMS) Indicator
Instrument Panel Indicators
Instruments and Controls
73
10/04/19 15:48:10 31SJC650_078
2011 Ridgeline
This indicator reminds you that the
bed lights are on. With the shift lever
in the Park position, they come on
when you push the light switch on
the dashboard, swing open the
tailgate, or open the In-Bed Trunk.
If you turn the ignition switch to the
ACCESSORY (I) or LOCK (0)
position without turning off the bed
lights, this indicator will remain on,
andthengooffafter20minutes.See
page for more information.
Most of the time, this indicator
comes on along with other indicators
in the instrument panel such as the
seat belt reminder indicator, SRS
indicator, VSA system indicator, etc.
This indicator comes on when there
is a system message on the multi-
information display. Press the INFO
button on the dashboard (see page
) to see the message (see
page
).
82
90
144
On models with navigation system
Bed Lights On IndicatorMessage Indicator
Instrument Panel Indicators
74
10/04/19 15:48:16 31SJC650_079
2011 Ridgeline
This indicator reminds you that the
back window is not completely
closed when you turn the ignition
switch from the ON (II) position to
the ACCESSORY (I) or LOCK (0)
position. With the ignition switch in
the ACCESSORY (I) position, it goes
off after about 30 seconds. With the
ignition switch in the LOCK (0)
position, it goes off after about 3
minutes.
If you remove the ignition key, turn
off the lights, and open the driver’s
door without closing the back
window, you will hear five beeps and
see the indicator blink. If you do not
close the back window before the
beeper stops, the indicator stops
blinking but remains on. It will go off
after about 3 minutes. See page
for more information.
This indicator reminds you that the
In-Bed Trunk is open. If you do not
close it, the indicator stays on for
about 3 minutes. See page for
more information.
This indicator comes on if any door
or the tailgate is not closed tightly.
116
129
Back Window Open
Indicator
In-Bed Trunk Open
Indicator
Door and Tailgate Open
Indicator
Instrument Panel Indicators
Instruments and Controls
75
10/04/19 15:48:23 31SJC650_080
2011 Ridgeline
▲
▼
This shows the temperature of the
engine’s coolant. During normal
operation, the pointer should rise to
about the middle of the gauge. In
severe driving conditions, the pointer
may rise to the upper zone. If it
reaches the red (hot) mark, pull
safely to the side of the road. For
instructions and precautions on
checking the engine’s cooling
system, see page .
This shows how much fuel you
have. It may show slightly more
or less than the actual amount.
372
Gauges
Temperature Gauge
Fuel Gauge
76
U.S. model is shown.
On models with navigation system
SPEEDOMETER
TACHOMETER
TEMPERATURE GAUGE
SPEEDOMETER
TACHOMETER
TEMPERATURE GAUGE
On models without navigation system
FUEL GAUGE
FUEL GAUGE
INFORMATION DISPLAY
MULTI-INFORMATION DISPLAY
INFO ( ) BUTTON
INFO ( ) BUTTON
TRIP/RESET
BUTTON
SELECT
BUTTON
SEL/RESET
BUTTON
Avoid driving with an extremely low
f uel level. Running out of f uel could
cause the engine to misf ire, damaging
the catalytic converter.
11/07/12 15:04:51 31SJC650_081
2011 Ridgeline
With the ignition switch in the ON
(II) position, the information display
changesasshownonthenextpage
each time you press the SELECT
button or TRIP/RESET button.
When you turn the ignition switch to
the ON (II) position, your last
selection display.
The information display shows the
odometer, trip meter, engine oil life,
outside temperature (if equipped),
instant fuel economy, average fuel
economy, range (estimated distance),
and maintenance item code(s).
For information about the multi-
information display, see page .82
CONTINUED
On models without navigation system
On models with navigation system
Gauges
Information Display
Instruments and Controls
77
TRIP/RESET BUTTON
SELECT BUTTON
10/04/19 15:48:40 31SJC650_082
2011 Ridgeline
Gauges
78
U.S. model is shown.
INFORMATION DISPLAY
OUTSIDE TEMPERATURE INDICATOR
ODOMETER
ODOMETER
RANGE
ENGINE OIL LIFE
TRIP METER A
TRIP METER B
RANGE
TRIP METER B
TRIP METER A
TRIP METER A
AVERAGE FUEL
ECONOMY A
AVERAGE FUEL
ECONOMY B
INSTANT FUEL
ECONOMY
INSTANT FUEL
ECONOMY
TRIP/RESET button
SELECT button
TRIP METER B
10/04/19 15:48:47 31SJC650_083
2011 Ridgeline
±±
−−
−−−
−−−
The odometer shows the total
distance your vehicle has been
driven. It measures miles in U.S.
models and kilometers in Canadian
models. It is illegal under U.S.
federal law and Canadian provincial/
territorial regulations to disconnect,
reset, or alter the odometer with the
intent to change the number of miles
or kilometers indicated.
Both trip meters will reset if the
vehicle’s battery goes dead or is
disconnected.
In certain weather conditions,
temperature readings near freezing
(32°F, 0°C) could mean that ice is
forming on the road surface.
The temperature sensor is in the
front bumper. The temperature
reading can be affected by heat
reflection from the road surface,
engine heat, and the exhaust from
surrounding traffic. This can cause
an incorrect temperature reading
when your vehicle speed is under
19 mph (30 km/h). When you start
your trip, the sensor is not fully
acclimatized, therefore it may take
several minutes until the proper
temperature is displayed.
This shows the outside temperature
in Fahrenheit (U.S. models), or in
Celsius (Canadian models).
If the outside temperature is
incorrectly displayed, you can adjust
it up to 5°F in U.S. models ( 3°C
in Canadian models) warmer or
cooler.
The temperature must be
stabilized before doing this
procedure.
To adjust the outside temperature
indicator, press and hold the TRIP/
RESET button for 10 seconds. The
following sequence will appear for 1
secondeach:0,1,2,3,4,5, 5, 4,
3, 2, 1, 0 (U.S.) or 0, 1, 2, 3,
3, 2, 1, 0 (Canada).
When the temperature reaches the
desired value, release the TRIP/
RESET button. You should see the
new outside temperature displayed.
Each trip meter works independently,
so you can keep track of two
different distances. To reset a trip
meter, display it, and then press and
hold the TRIP/RESET button until
the number resets to ‘‘0.0’’.
There are two trip meters: Trip A
and Trip B. Switch between these
displays by pressing the TRIP/
RESET button repeatedly.
This meter shows the number of
miles (U.S.) or kilometers (Canada)
driven since you last reset it.
CONTINUED
Except RT models
Odometer
Outside Temperature Indicator
Trip Meter
Gauges
Instruments and Controls
79
NOTE:
10/04/19 15:48:57 31SJC650_084
2011 Ridgeline
This display shows the estimated
distance you can travel on the fuel
remaining in the tank.
This distance is estimated from the
fuel economy you have achieved
over the last few miles (kilometers),
so it will vary with changes in speed,
traffic condition, etc.
This display shows the instant fuel
economy you are getting.
It shows the number of mpg (U.S.)
or l/100 km (Canada).
When either of the trip meters (trip
A or B) is displayed, your vehicle’s
average fuel economy since you last
resetthattripmetercanbeshown
on the information display (mpg on
U.S. models and l/100 km on
Canadian models). This number is
updated once per 10 seconds. To see
the average fuel economy, press and
release the TRIP/RESET button
repeatedly.
The average fuel economy will be
reset when you reset the trip meter,
or if the vehicle’s battery goes dead
or is disconnected.This indicator is displayed as the
system message on the multi-
information display (see page ).
The appropriate tire indicator will
come on along with the low tire
pressure indicator if a tire is
significantly underinflated or has
suddenly lost pressure. See
for what to
do if this indicator comes on.
282
On models with navigation system
Gauges
Range (Estimated Distance)Tire Pressure Monitor
Average Fuel Economy
Instant Fuel Economy
Low
Tire Pressure Indicator
80
TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR
10/04/19 15:49:07 31SJC650_085
2011 Ridgeline
The information display in the
instrument panel shows you the
engine oil life and maintenance
service items when the ignition
switch is in the ON (II) position. This
information helps to keep you aware
of the periodic maintenance your
vehicle needs for continued trouble-
free driving. Refer to page for
more information.
Your vehicle’s onboard diagnostic
system will detect a loose or missing
fuel fill cap as an evaporative system
leak. The first time a leak is detected
a ‘‘CHECK FUEL CAP’’ message
appears on the information display.
If the system still detects a leak in
your vehicle’s evaporative emissions
system, the malfunction indicator
lamp (MIL) comes on. If the fuel fill
cap was not already tightened, turn
the engine off, and check or
retighten the fuel fill cap until it
clicks at least once. The MIL should
go off after several days of normal
driving once the cap is tightened or
replaced. If the MIL does not go off,
have your vehicle inspected by a
dealer. For more information, see
page .
Turn the engine off, and confirm the
fuel fill cap is installed. If it is, loosen
it, then retighten it until it clicks at
least once. The message should go
off after several days of normal
driving once you tighten or replace
the fuel fill cap. To scroll to another
display, press the SELECT button or
TRIP/RESET button.
The ‘‘CHECK FUEL CAP’’ message
will appear each time you restart the
engine until the system turns the
message off.
313
375
Maintenance Minder Check Fuel Cap Message
Gauges
Instruments and Controls
81
TM
10/04/19 15:49:14 31SJC650_086
2011 Ridgeline
▲▼
▲▼
▲
▼
With the ignition switch in the ON
(II) position, the multi-information
display changes as shown on the
next page each time you press the
INFO ( / ) button or the SEL/
RESET button.
When you turn the ignition switch to
the ON (II) position, your last
selection is displayed.
The multi-information display in the
instrument panel displays various
information and messages when the
ignition switch is in the ON (II)
position. Some of the messages help
you operate your vehicle more
comfortably. Others help to keep
you aware of the periodic
maintenance your vehicle needs for
continued trouble-free driving.
To change the display, press the
INFO( / )buttononthe
dashboard repeatedly until the main
menu appears (see page ).
When you open the driver’s door, a
‘‘Welcome’’ message is shown on the
multi-information display.
In the multi-information display, the
system message is also displayed
(see page ).
83
90
On models with navigation system
Multi-Information Display
82
SEL/RESET
BUTTON
INFO ( ) BUTTON
INFO ( ) BUTTON
10/04/19 15:49:20 31SJC650_087
2011 Ridgeline
▲▼
Multi-Information Display
Instruments and Controls
83
INFO ( / ) button
SEL/RESET button
U.S. model is shown.
Trip Computer (See page 87)
(See page 84)
Tire Pressure for each tire (See page 86)
Go to Language Selection Menu (See page 92)
Go to HandsFreeLink Menu (See page 86)
10/04/19 15:49:25 31SJC650_088
2011 Ridgeline
The odometer shows the total
distance your vehicle has been
driven. It measures miles in U.S.
models and kilometers in Canadian
models. It is illegal under U.S.
federal law and Canadian provincial/
territorial regulations to disconnect,
reset, or alter the odometer with the
intent to change the number of miles
or kilometers indicated.
This meter shows the number of
miles (U.S.) or kilometers (Canada)
driven since you last reset it. There
are two trip meters: Trip A and Trip
B. Each trip meter works
independently, so you can keep track
of two different distances.
To reset a trip meter, display it, and
then press and hold the SEL/RESET
button until the number resets to
‘‘0.0.’’
When you reset Trip A, AVERAGE
FUEL A, AVERAGE SPEED A, and
ELAPSED TIME A are reset at the
same time. When you reset Trip B,
AVERAGE FUEL B, AVERAGE
SPEED B, and ELAPSED TIME B
are reset.
Multi-Information Display
Odometer Trip Meter
84
TRIP METER
ODOMETER
U.S. model is shown.
U.S. model is shown.
10/04/19 15:49:32 31SJC650_089
2011 Ridgeline
±±
−−
−−−
−−−
If the outside temperature is
incorrectly displayed, you can adjust
it up to 5°F in U.S. models ( 3°C
in Canadian models) warmer or
cooler.
The temperature must be
stabilized before doing this
procedure.
To adjust the outside temperature
indicator, press and hold the SEL/
RESET button for 10 seconds. The
following sequence will appear for 1
secondeach:0,1,2,3,4,5, 5, 4,
3, 2, 1, 0 (U.S.) or 0, 1, 2, 3,
3, 2, 1, 0 (Canada).
When the temperature reaches the
desired value, release the SEL/
RESET button. You should see the
new outside temperature displayed.
The temperature sensor is in the
front bumper. The temperature
reading can be affected by heat
reflection from the road surface,
engine heat, and the exhaust from
surrounding traffic. This can cause
an incorrect temperature reading
when your vehicle speed is under
19 mph (30 km/h). When you start
your trip, the sensor is not fully
acclimatized, therefore it may take
several minutes until the proper
temperature is displayed.
In certain weather conditions,
temperature readings near freezing
(32°F, 0°C) could mean that ice is
forming on the road surface.
This shows the outside temperature
in Fahrenheit (U.S. models), or in
Celsius (Canadian models).
Outside Temperature
Multi-Information Display
Instruments and Controls
85
NOTE:
OUTSIDE TEMPERATURE
U.S. model is shown.
10/04/19 15:49:40 31SJC650_090
2011 Ridgeline
This shows the remaining life of the
engine oil. It shows 100% after the
engine oil is replaced and the display
is reset. The engine oil life is
calculated based on engine operating
conditions and accumulated engine
revolutions. For more information,
see page .
Whenthetirepressuremonitoris
shown on the multi-information
display, press the SEL/RESET
button. The display changes as
shown.
You can see the pressure of each tire
in this monitor. If one or more tires
are low, inflate them to the correct
pressure. For more information, see
page .
You can receive or make phone calls
from your cell phone through your
vehicle’s
HandsFreeLink
(HFL) system without touching your
cell phone.
313
282
Bluetooth
Engine Oil Life Tire Pressure Monitor HandsFreeLink
Bluetooth
Multi-Information Display
86
ENGINE OIL LIFE
U.S.
Canada
10/04/19 15:49:47 31SJC650_091
2011 Ridgeline
▲▼
To use the system, your cell phone
and the HFL system must be linked.
Not all cell phones are compatible
with this system. Refer to page
for instructions on how to link
your cell phone to HFL and how to
receive or make phone calls, or visit
the handsfreelink.com website. In
Canada, visit , or call
1-
(888) 9-HONDA-9.
221
www.honda.ca
CONTINUED
Multi-Information Display
Trip Computer
Instruments and Controls
87
Average Fuel Economy/Range
Average Vehicle Speed/Elapsed Time
SEL/RESET button
INFO ( / ) button
U.S. model is shown.
Instantaneous Fuel Economy
10/04/19 15:49:54 31SJC650_092
2011 Ridgeline
This shows the accumulated
traveling time since you last reset it.
When you turn the ignition switch to
the ON (II) position, ELAPSED
TIME is reset.
This shows your vehicle’s average
fuel economy in mpg (U.S. models)
or liter/100 km (Canadian models)
since you last reset Trip A or Trip B.
This shows the estimated distance
you can travel on the fuel remaining
in the fuel tank. This distance is
estimated from the fuel economy
you received over the last several
miles (U.S.) or kilometers (Canada),
so it will vary with changes in speed,
traffic, etc.
This shows the average speed you
are traveling in miles per hour (mph)
forU.S.modelsorkilometersper
hour (km/h) for Canadian models.
Along with the trip meter, the trip
computer calculates these values:
Average Fuel Economy
Range
Average Vehicle Speed
Elapsed Time
Instantaneous fuel economy
This shows your instant fuel
economy.
ELAPSED TIME A/BAVERAGE FUEL A/B
RANGE
AVERAGE SPEED A/B
INSTANT FUEL MPG (U.S.
models)/INSTANT FUEL L/100 km
(Canadian models)
Multi-Information Display
88
10/04/19 15:50:04 31SJC650_093
2011 Ridgeline
▲▼
▲▼
If there is a problem with your
vehicle, for example the engine oil
level is low or a door is not fully
closed, the multi-information display
will show you the problem. It does
this by interrupting the current
display with one or more messages.
The system message(s) triggers the
appropriate indicator(s) on the
instrument panel, including the
system message indicator, to come
on. The system message indicator
does not go off until the problem(s)
is corrected.
You will also hear a beep when the
system message comes on for the
first time.
When there are several messages to
be shown, the system switches the
messages every 5 seconds.
The message is shown until you
push the INFO ( or ) button.
To see the message again, press the
INFO ( or ) button, 5 seconds
after the display disappears.
Here is a list of messages shown on
the multi-information display:
CONTINUED
System Messages
Multi-Information Display
Instruments and Controls
89
SYSTEM MESSAGE INDICATOR
10/04/19 15:50:11 31SJC650_094
2011 Ridgeline
▲▼
Press the SEL/RESET button to see
the selections.
There are three language selections
you can make: English, Spanish, and
French. To choose the language you
want, follow these instructions: Select the desired language by
pressing the SEL/RESET button,
then enter your selection by pressing
and holding the SEL/RESET button.
When your selection is successfully
completed, the display returns to the
‘‘LANGUAGE SELECTION’’ display.
Press and release the INFO ( / )
button repeatedly to select the
‘‘LANGUAGE SELECTION’’ display.
Multi-Information Display
Language Selection
92
10/04/19 15:50:39 31SJC650_097
2011 Ridgeline
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
▲
▼
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
Only on vehicles equipped with navigation system. Refer to the navigation system manual.
To use the horn, press the center pad of the steering wheel.
If equipped
On models with navigation system.
On models without navigation system.
1:
2:
3:
4:
5:
Controls Near the Steering Wheel
Instruments and Controls
93
MOONROOF SWITCH
REMOTE AUDIO CONTROLS
HEADLIGHT CONTROL DIAL
VEHICLE STABILITY ASSIST (VSA)
SYSTEM OFF SWITCH
STEERING WHEEL
ADJUSTMENT
PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF
INDICATOR
SEL/RESET BUTTON
INFO ( ) BUTTON
SELECT BUTTON
TRIP/RESET BUTTON
Vehicle with navigation system is shown.
CRUISE CONTROLS
HAZARD WARNING BUTTON
MULTI-CONTROL LEVER
(WINDSHIELD WIPERS/
WASHERS/TURN SIGNALS/
HEADLIGHT HIGH BEAMS)
(P.131)
(P.94)
(P.95)
FOG LIGHTS
(P.292)
(P.99)
(P.31)
(P.76)
(P.76)
(P.76)
(P.76)
(P.76)
(P.203)
(P.221)
INSTRUMENT PANEL
BRIGHTNESS (P.98)
SHIFT LEVER
(P.271)
VTM-4 LOCK
(P.276)
BED LIGHT SWITCH (P.144)
BLUETOOTH
HANDSFREELINK
SYSTEM VOICE CONTROL
BUTTONS
(P.97)
(P.210)
(P.142)
SEAT HEATERS
INTERIOR LIGHT CONTROL
SWITCH
(P.126)
HORN
(P.99)
VOICE CONTROL BUTTONS
INFO ( ) BUTTON
2
2
4
4
5
5
2
3
2
1
3
4
10/04/19 15:50:50 31SJC650_098
2011 Ridgeline
−
−
OFF
INT: Intermittent
INT TIME ring
LO: Low speed
HI: High speed
MIST
Windshield washers
Turn signal
High beams
Flashhighbeams
The multi-control lever has many
functions, including windshield
wipers and washers, turn signals,
headlight high beams, and headlight
high beam flashing.
To select a position, turn the rotary
switch,pushthebuttonontheendof
the lever, or push the lever up, down,
forward, or backward.
The wipers are not activated.
The wipers run at low speed.
The wipers run at high speed.
The length of the wiper
interval is varied automatically
according to the vehicle’s speed.
Vary the delay by turning the INT
TIME ring. If you turn it to the
shortest delay, the wipers change
to low speed when the vehicle
speed exceeds 12 mph (20 km/h).
The wipers run at high speed
until you release the lever.
Push the
buttonontheendofthemulti-
control lever. The washers spray
until you release the button. The
wipers run at low speed, then
complete one more sweep after
you release the button.1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
OFF:
LO
HI
INT:
MIST:
Windshield Washer:
Multi-Control Lever
94
10/04/19 15:50:59 31SJC650_099
2011 Ridgeline
−
−
OFF
Parking and indicator lights
Headlights
Push down on the
multi-control lever to signal a left
turn and up to signal a right turn. To
signal a lane change, push lightly on
the lever and hold it. The lever will
return to center when you release it
or complete a turn.
To turn on the high
beams, push the multi-control lever
forward until you hear a click. The
blue high beam indicator will come
on (see page ). Pull the lever back
to return to the low beams.
To flash the high beams, pull the
lever back lightly, then release it.
The high beams will stay on as long
as you hold the lever back.
Your vehicle has heating wires at the
bottom of the windshield to help
heat the wiper blades and the
windshield. If the outside
temperature is near freezing, the
heater turns on automatically when
you turn the ignition switch to the
ON (II) position. The heater turns
off automatically when the outside
temperature is above freezing.
This function helps to increase wiper
performance when the wiper arms
sit in the parked position in snowy or
icy conditions.
1.
2.
3.
67
CONTINUED
Headlight Control DialTurn Signal
High Beams
Automatic Heated Wiper Zone
Multi-Control Lever, Headlights
Instruments and Controls
95
10/04/19 15:51:07 31SJC650_100
2011 Ridgeline
− If you remove the key from the
ignition switch with the headlight
control dial on, but do not open the
door, the lights will turn off after 10
minutes.
Turning the dial to
the ‘‘ ’’ position turns on the
parking lights, taillights, instrument
panel lights, and license plate lights.
Turning the dial to the ‘‘ ’’
position turns on the headlights. If
you leave the lights on and remove
the key from the ignition switch, you
will hear a reminder chime when you
open the driver’s door.
When the dial is in the ‘‘ ’’ or
‘‘ ’’ position, the lights on
indicator comes on as a reminder.
This indicator stays on if you leave
the lights on and turn the ignition
switch to the ACCESSORY (I) or
LOCK (0) position.
The automatic lighting off feature
turns off the headlights, all other
exterior lights, and the instrument
panel lights within 15 seconds of
removing the key from the ignition
switch and closing the driver’s door. The lights will turn on again when
you unlock or open the driver’s door.
This feature activates if you leave
the headlight control dial in the
‘‘ ’’ or ‘‘ ’’ position, remove
the key, then open and close the
driver’s door.
If you unlock the door, but do not
open it within 15 seconds, the lights
go off. With the driver’s door open,
you will hear a lights-on reminder
chime.
Automatic Lighting Off FeatureHeadlights
Headlights
96
10/04/19 15:51:14 31SJC650_101
2011 Ridgeline
With the headlight control dial off,
the daytime running lights come on
when you turn the ignition switch to
the ON (II) position and release the
parkingbrake.Theyremainonuntil
you turn the ignition switch off, even
if you set the parking brake.
The headlights revert to normal
operation when you turn them on
with the headlight control dial.
If you see a ‘‘CHECK DRL
SYSTEM’’ message on the multi-
information display, there is a
problem with the daytime running
light circuit. Take your vehicle to a
dealer to have it checked.
You can use the fog lights only when
the headlights are on low beam.
They will go off when you turn the
headlights off or onto high beam.
Turn the fog lights on and off by
pressing the button. The indicator in
the button lights to show the fog
lights are on.
If equipped
On models with navigation system
Daytime Running Lights Fog Lights
Headlights, Fog Lights
Instruments and Controls
97
10/04/19 15:51:21 31SJC650_102
2011 Ridgeline
The dial on the instrument panel
controls the brightness of the
instrument panel lights and the
console compartment light. Turn the
dial to adjust the brightness.
The instrument panel will illuminate
when you unlock and open the
driver’s door. The brightness will
increase when you insert the key in
the ignition switch.
If you do not insert the key in the
ignition switch after opening the
driver’s door, the illumination turns
off about 30 seconds after you close
the door.
If you insert the key but do not turn
the ignition switch to the ON (II)
position, the illumination turns off in
about 10 seconds.
The instrument panel brightness is
dimmedwhenyouturntheheadlight
controldialtothe‘‘ ’’or
‘‘ ’’ position to reduce glare at
night. To cancel it, turn the
instrument panel brightness control
dial upward fully until you hear a
click.
Instrument Panel Brightness
98
INSTRUMENT PANEL
BRIGHTNESS CONTROL DIAL
10/04/19 15:51:27 31SJC650_103
2011 Ridgeline
Push the lever up to lock the
steering wheel in position.
Make sure you have securely
locked the steering wheel in place
by trying to move it up and down.
Make any steering wheel adjustment
before you start driving.
Move the steering wheel so it
points toward your chest, not
toward your face. Make sure you
can see the instrument panel
gauges and indicators.
Push the lever on the left side of
the steering column all the way
down.
Pushthebuttontoturnonthe
hazard warning lights (four-way
flashers). This causes all four
outside turn signals and both turn
indicators in the instrument panel to
flash. Use the hazard warning lights
if you need to park in a dangerous
area near heavy traffic, or if your
vehicle is disabled.
3.
4.1.
2.
Steering Wheel AdjustmentHazard Warning Button
Hazard Warning Button, Steering Wheel Adjustment
Instruments and Controls
99
Adjusting the steering wheel
position while driving may
cause you to lose control of the
vehicle and be seriously injured
inacrash.
Adjust the steering wheel only
when the vehicle is stopped.
10/04/19 15:51:35 31SJC650_104
2011 Ridgeline
These keys contain electronic
circuits that are activated by the
immobilizer system. They will not
work to start the engine if the
circuits are damaged.
Protect the keys from direct
sunlight, high temperature, and
high humidity.
Donotdropthekeysorsetheavy
objects on them.
The master key fits all the locks on
your vehicle. The valet key works
only in the ignition and the driver’s
door lock. You can keep the glove
boxlockedwhenyouleaveyour
vehicle and the valet key at a parking
facility.
You can also keep the In-Bed Trunk
locked by using the main switch in
theglovebox(seepage ).
Youshouldhavereceivedakey
number tag with your keys. You will
need this key number if you ever
have to get a lost key replaced. Use
only Honda-approved key blanks.
Keep the keys away from liquids.
If they get wet, dry them
immediately with a soft cloth.
The valet key does not contain a
battery. Do not try to take it apart.
118
Keys
100
VALET KEY
(LIGHT GRAY)
MASTER KEY
WITH REMOTE
TRANSMITTER
KEY
NUMBER
TAG
10/04/19 15:51:42 31SJC650_105
2011 Ridgeline
When you turn the ignition switch to
the ON (II) position, the immobilizer
system indicator should come on for
a few seconds, then go off. If the
indicator starts to blink, it means the
system does not recognize the
coding of the key. Turn the ignition
switch to the LOCK (0) position,
remove the key, reinsert it, and turn
the ignition switch to the ON (II)
position again.
Do not attempt to alter this system
or add other devices to it. Electrical
problems could result that may make
your vehicle inoperable.
If the system repeatedly does not
recognize the coding of your key,
contact your dealer.
The immobilizer system protects
your vehicle from theft. If an
improperly coded key (or other
device) is used, the engine’s fuel
system is disabled.
If you have lost your key and cannot
start the engine, contact your dealer.
The system may not recognize your
key’s coding if another immobilizer
key or other metal object (i.e. key
chain) is near the ignition switch
when you insert the key.
As required by the FCC:
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) This device
may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
This device complies with Industry
Canada Standard RSS-210.
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) this device may not cause
interference, and (2) this device must
accept any interference that may cause
undesired operation of the device.
Immobilizer System
Instruments and Controls
101
Always take the ignition key with you
whenever you leave the vehicle alone.
10/04/19 15:51:50 31SJC650_106
2011 Ridgeline
−
−
−
−
The ignition switch has four
positions: LOCK (0), ACCESSORY
(I), ON (II), and START (III).
You can insert or
remove the key only in this position.
To turn the key, the shift lever must
be in Park, and you must push the
key in slightly.
If the front wheels are turned, the
anti-theft lock may make it difficult
to turn the key. Firmly turn the
steering wheel to the left or right as
you turn the key.
You can
operate the audio system and the
accessory power sockets in this
position.
This is the normal key
position when driving. Several of the
indicators on the instrument panel
come on as a test when you turn the
ignition switch from the
ACCESSORY (I) to the ON (II)
position.
Use this position
only to start the engine. The switch
returns to the ON (II) position when
you let go of the key.
You will hear a reminder beeper if
you leave the key in the ignition
switch in the LOCK (0) or the
ACCESSORY (I) position and open
the driver’s door. Remove the key to
turn off the beeper.
TheshiftlevermustbeinPark
before you can remove the key from
the ignition switch.
LOCK (0)
ACCESSORY (I)
ON (II)
START (III)
Ignition Switch
102
10/04/19 15:51:57 31SJC650_107
2011 Ridgeline
To lock any passenger’s door when
getting out of the vehicle, push the
lock tab down, and close the door.
To lock the driver’s door, remove the
key from the ignition switch, and
push the lock tab down, or push the
front of the master switch, then
close the door.
With the driver’s door open and the
key in the ignition, both master door
lock switches will not lock, but they
will unlock. The lock feature is not
disabled if the driver’s door is closed.
Pushing the front of the switch on
the open passenger’s door will lock
all doors and the In-Bed Trunk.
The lock tab on each door locks and
unlocks that door. Pulling up on the
driver’s door lock tab only unlocks
the driver’s door. To unlock the
driver’s door and the In-Bed Trunk
from the outside, turn the key and
release it. If you turn it again, all the
doors unlock.
Youcanopenorclosetheside
windows by using the key in the
driver’s door (see page ).
To lock all doors and the In-Bed
Trunk, push the front of the master
door lock switch on either front door,
pressthelocktabdownonthe
driver’s door, or use the key on the
outside lock on the driver’s door. This vehicle has auto door locking/
unlocking features. See page for
how to set them.Pushing the rear of either master
door lock switch will unlock all of the
doors and the In-Bed Trunk.
130
104
Lockout Prevention
Power Door Locks
Door Locks
Instruments and Controls
103
MASTER DOOR LOCK SWITCH
LOCK TAB
10/04/19 15:52:05 31SJC650_108
2011 Ridgeline
The childproof door locks are
designed to prevent children seated
in the rear from accidentally opening
the rear doors. Each rear door has a
lock lever near the edge. With the
lever in the LOCK position, the door
cannot be opened from inside
regardless of the position of the lock
tab. To open the door, pull the lock
tab up, and use the outside door
handle.
The auto door locking feature has
three possible settings:
The auto door locking is
deactivated all the time.
The doors lock whenever you
move the shift lever out of the
Park (P) position.
The doors lock when the vehicle
speed reaches 9 mph (15 km/h).
This is the default setting.
Your vehicle has customizable
settings for the doors to
automatically lock and unlock. There
are default settings for each of these
features. You can turn off or change
the settings for these features as
described on the following pages.
When you customize the setting,
make sure your vehicle is parked
safely, the engine is off, and the
parking brake is applied. Make all
settings before you start driving.
With the auto door locking and
unlocking, the In-Bed Trunk also
locks and unlocks.
Auto Door Locking/UnlockingChildproof Door Locks Auto Door Locking
Door Locks
104
LOCK LEVER
10/04/19 15:52:14 31SJC650_109
2011 Ridgeline
Locks all doors when the shift lever is
moved out of the Park (P) position.
Pushandholdthefrontofthe
master door lock switch on the
driver’s door until you hear a click
(after about 5 seconds).
Release the switch, and within 5
seconds, turn the ignition switch
to the LOCK (0) position.
Make sure the shift lever is in the
Park (P) position.
Turn the ignition switch to the ON
(II) position, and open the driver’s
door.
Make sure the shift lever is in the
Park (P) position.
Turn the ignition switch to the ON
(II) position, and make sure to
close the driver’s door.
1.
2.
1.
2.
3.
4.
CONTINUED
Door Locks
To turn off the Auto Door Lock
modes:
To program the Park Lock mode:
Instruments and Controls
105
10/04/19 15:52:23 31SJC650_110
2011 Ridgeline
Push and hold the brake pedal,
and move the shift lever out of the
Park (P) position.
Release the switch and, within 5
seconds, turn the ignition switch
to the ACCESSORY (I) position.
Move the shift lever to the Park
(P) position.
Pushandholdthefrontofthe
master door lock switch on the
driver’s door. You will hear a click.
Keep holding the switch until you
hear another click (after about 5
seconds).
Release the switch, and within 5
seconds, turn the ignition switch
to the LOCK (0) position.
Pushandholdthefrontofthe
master door lock switch on the
driver’s door. You will hear a click.
Keep holding the switch until you
hear another click (after about 5
seconds).
Turn the ignition switch to the
LOCK (0) position.
Make sure the shift lever is in the
Park (P) position.
Turn the ignition switch to the ON
(II) position, and make sure to
close the driver’s door.
1.
2.
3.
5.
4.
6.
3.
4.
Locks all doors when the vehicle’s speed
reaches about 9 mph (15 km/h).
To program the Drive Lock mode:
Door Locks
106
10/04/19 15:52:32 31SJC650_111
2011 Ridgeline
CONTINUED
Pushandholdtherearofthe
master door lock switch on the
driver’s door. You will hear a click,
and after about 5 seconds, you will
hear another click.
The auto door unlocking feature has
five possible settings:
The driver’s door unlocks when
you move the shift lever to the
Park (P) position with the brake
pedal depressed.
The auto door unlocking is
deactivated all the time.
Release the switch, and within 5
seconds, turn the ignition switch
to the LOCK (0) position.
Make sure the shift lever is in the
Park (P) position.
Turn the ignition switch to the ON
(II) position, and open the driver’s
door.
All doors unlock whenever you
turn the ignition switch to the
ACCESSORY (I) position.
The driver’s door unlocks
whenever you turn the ignition
switch to the ACCESSORY (I)
position.
All doors unlock when you move
the shift lever to the Park (P)
position with the brake pedal
depressed.
This is the default setting.
1.
2.
3.
4.
To turn off the Auto Door Unlock
modes:
Door Locks
Auto Door Unlocking
Instruments and Controls
107
10/04/19 15:52:44 31SJC650_112
2011 Ridgeline
−
−
Pushandholdtherearofthe
master door lock switch on the
driver’s door. You will hear a click.
Continue to hold down the switch:
Or, until you hear two more
clicks (after about 10 seconds)
to activate the all doors unlock
feature.
Release the switch, and within 5
seconds, turn the ignition switch
to the LOCK (0) position.
Until you hear another click
(after about 5 seconds) to
activate
Make sure the shift lever is in the
Park (P) position.
Turn the ignition switch to the ON
(II) position, and make sure to
close the driver’s door.
Turn the ignition switch to the ON
(II) position, and make sure to
close the driver’s door.
Make sure the shift lever is in the
Park (P) position.
1.
2.
4.
3.
1.
2.
Unlocks the driver’s door or all doors
when the shift lever is moved into the
Park (P) position with the brake pedal
depressed.
driver’s door unlock
feature.
Unlocks the driver’s door or all doors
when the ignition switch is moved out of
the ON (II) position.
Door Locks
To program the Park Unlock mode: To program the Ignition Switch
Unlock mode:
108
10/04/19 15:52:53 31SJC650_113
2011 Ridgeline
−
−Or, until you hear two more
clicks (after about 10 seconds)
to activate the all doors unlock
feature.
Until you hear another click
(after about 5 seconds) to
activate the driver’s door unlock
feature.
Pushandholdtherearofthe
master door lock switch on the
driver’s door. You will hear a click.
Continue to hold the switch:
Release the switch and, within 5
seconds, turn the ignition switch
to the ACCESSORY (I) position.
Move the shift lever to the Park
(P) position.
Turn the ignition switch to the
LOCK (0) position.
If your vehicle’s battery is removed
or goes dead, the auto door lock/
unlock setting is reset to the
deactivated mode.
Push and hold the brake pedal,
then move the shift lever out of
the Park (P) position.
5.
4.
6.
3.
Door Locks
Instruments and Controls
109
10/04/19 15:53:00 31SJC650_114
2011 Ridgeline
−
−
−
Press this button once
to unlock the driver’s door and the
In-Bed Trunk. Push it twice to
unlock the remaining doors.
Some exterior and interior lights will
flash twice each time you push the
button.
When you press the UNLOCK
button, the front and rear individual
map lights, depending on the interior
light control switch position, will
come on (see page ). If you do
not open any door, the lights stay on
for about 30 seconds, then go out. If
you relock the doors and the In-Bed
Trunk with the remote transmitter
before 30 seconds have elapsed, the
lights will go off immediately.
Press this button once to
lock all doors and the In-Bed Trunk.
Some exterior and interior lights will
flash once.
When you push LOCK twice within 5
seconds, you will hear a beep to
verify that the doors and In-Bed
Trunk are locked and the security
system (if equipped) has set. This
button does not work if any door is
not fully closed or the key is in the
ignition switch.
Press and hold this
button for about 1 second to attract
attention; the horn will sound, and
the exterior lights will flash for about
30 seconds. To cancel panic mode,
press any other button on the remote
transmitter, or turn the ignition
switch to the ON (II) position. Panic
mode does not work when the key is
in the ignition switch.
If you do not open any door within 30
seconds, the doors automatically
relock, and the security system sets
(if equipped). The UNLOCK button
does not work when the key is in the
ignition switch.
You can also open all side windows
from outside the vehicle with the
remote transmitter (see page ).
142
130
UNLOCK
LOCK
PANIC
Remote Transmitter
110
LED
UNLOCK
BUTTON
PANIC
BUTTON
LOCK
BUTTON
10/04/19 15:53:07 31SJC650_115
2011 Ridgeline
Avoid dropping or throwing the
transmitter.
Protect the transmitter from
extreme temperature.
Do not immerse the transmitter in
any liquid.
If you lose a transmitter, the
replacement needs to be
reprogrammed by your dealer.
Remove the screw at the base of
the transmitter with a small
Phillips-head screwdriver.
To replace the battery:
Battery type: CR1616
If it takes several pushes on the
button to lock or unlock the doors,
replace the battery as soon as
possible.
Inside the transmitter, separate
the inner cover from the keypad
by releasing the two tabs on the
cover.
Separate the transmitter by prying
its middle seam with your
fingernail.
1.
2.
3.
CONTINUED
Remote Transmitter Care Replacing the Transmitter
Battery
Remote Transmitter
Instruments and Controls
111
SCREW
BATTERY
10/04/19 15:53:17 31SJC650_116
2011 Ridgeline
＋
As required by the FCC:
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) This device
may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
This device complies with Industry
Canada Standard RSS-210.
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) this device may not cause
interference, and (2) this device must
accept any interference that may cause
undesired operation of the device.
Remove the old battery from the
back of the inner cover, and insert
a new battery into the back of the
cover with the side facing down.
An improperly disposed of battery
can hurt the environment.
Always confirm local regulations
for battery disposal.
Install the parts in reverse order.
4.
5.
Remote Transmitter
112
10/04/19 15:53:23 31SJC650_117
2011 Ridgeline
Youcanopenthetailgatetwo
different ways:
Drop it open by using the upper
handle.
Swingitopenbyusingtheright
lower handle.
To drop open the tailgate, pull up the
upper handle, then pull down the
tailgate. To close the tailgate, push
firmly up until it latches.
Before you open the tailgate a
different way (dropped open, and
then swung open), make sure it is
fully closed.
Make sure all passengers and
objects are clear of the tailgate
before opening and closing it, and
make sure the tailgate is closed
securely before driving.
As a safety feature, the upper handle
is disabled if you do not fully close
the tailgate after it is swung open.
And the lower handle is disabled if
you do not fully close the tailgate
after it is dropped open.
CONTINUED
To Drop Open the Tailgate
Dual-Action Tailgate
Instruments and Controls
113
NOTE:
UPPER HANDLE
10/04/19 15:53:31 31SJC650_118
2011 Ridgeline
To swing open the tailgate, first
make sure it is fully closed, then pull
up the right lower handle, and swing
the tailgate to the left.
To close, swing the tailgate back,
and push it firmly until it is latched.
The dropped open tailgate can be
used as an extended pickup bed.
Make sure to secure the items in the
pickup bed, and do not exceed the
maximum allowable weight on the
tailgate(seepage ).
To turn the bed lights on or off, use
the bed light switch on the
dashboard (see page ).
Before opening or closing the
tailgate, check that passengers,
especially children, are not in the
tailgate’s path.
263
144
To Swing Open the Tailgate
Dual-Action Tailgate
114
HANDLE
Swinging the tailgate open or
closed while anyone is in its
path can cause serious injury.
Make sure all passengers are
clear of the tailgate’s path
before opening or closing it.
Do not drive with the tailgate swung
open. This could damage the tailgate.
10/04/19 15:53:38 31SJC650_119
2011 Ridgeline
See page for information on
cargo loading and weight limits.
You can also store and lock items in
the In-Bed Trunk (see page ).
If you do not fasten the seat belt, you
first hear the seat belt reminder
alarm, then the tailgate reminder
beeper sounds.
The indicator does not monitor the
tailgate when it is dropped open.
Do not allow anyone to hang on the
swung open tailgate. This could
damage the tailgate.
Do not leave the tailgate swung open.
The tailgate may swing and shut
accidentally. This could cause
serious injuries.
Thebedlightscomeonwhenyou
swing open the tailgate. You can also
turn the bed lights on or off by
pushing the bed light switch on the
dashboard (see page ).
If the tailgate is swung open or not
closed tightly when the ignition
switch is in the ON (II) position, you
will hear six beeps and see the
indicator blinking. The indicator
stays on until you close the tailgate.
The beeper also sounds and the
indicator blinks when you move the
shift lever out of the Park or neutral
position.
This indicator is in the door and
tailgate open monitor on the
instrument panel. It comes on when
the tailgate is swung open or it is not
completely closed. This indicator
worksevenifthekeyisnotinthe
ignition switch.
The tailgate open indicator appears
on the multi-information display (see
page ).11
144
259
116
On models without navigation system
On models with navigation system
Loading Cargo
Tailgate Open Indicator
Dual-Action Tailgate
Instruments and Controls
115
10/04/19 15:53:48 31SJC650_120
2011 Ridgeline
YoucanopentheIn-BedTrunktwo
different ways:
Push the release button on the
lower right side of the In-Bed
Trunk lid when the driver’s door is
unlocked.
To close the In-Bed Trunk, lower the
lid, then press down on the back
edge.
If your vehicle’s battery is
disconnected or goes dead, the
release button on the In-Bed Trunk
lid is disabled. To open the In-Bed
Trunk, use the master key.
Usethemasterkeytoopenthe
In-Bed Trunk when the driver’s
door is locked.
Thebedlightscomeonwhenyou
open the In-Bed Trunk. You can also
turn the bed lights on or off by
pushing the bed light switch on the
dashboard (see page ).
You can store items in the In-Bed
Trunk up to 300 lbs (136 kg). Do not
exceed this weight limit, or you may
damage the In-Bed Trunk. See page
for information on loading cargo
and weight limits.
To store items separately in the
In-Bed Trunk, optional divider
guides are available from your dealer.
When the In-Bed Trunk is closed
securely, it can be locked or
unlocked along with the power door
locks (see page ).
144
259
103
In-Bed Trunk
116
RELEASE
BUTTON
10/04/19 15:53:56 31SJC650_121
2011 Ridgeline
To avoid damaging the key and key
cylinder of the In-Bed Trunk lid, do
notclosethetailgatewhenthekeyis
in the lid.
As a safety feature, your vehicle has
a release lever on the latch of the
In-Bed Trunk lid so it can be opened
from the inside. To open the In-Bed
Trunk, push the release lever in the
direction of the arrow.
Parents should decide if their
children should be shown how to use
this feature. For more information
about child safety, see page .
To avoid damaging the seal on the
In-Bed Trunk lid, remove any debris
from the lid’s mating surface before
you close it.
To avoid damaging the bottom of the
In-Bed Trunk, do not drive over large
obstacles, and do not use it as a
jacking point to raise the vehicle.
To avoid damaging the In-Bed Trunk
lid, and to prevent items from being
thrown about the vehicle and
possibly hurting someone in a crash
or sudden stop, be sure the In-Bed
Trunk lid is securely closed before
driving away.
This indicator on the instrument
panel reminds you that the In-Bed
Trunk is open (see page ).
38
75
Emergency Opener
In-Bed Trunk Open
Indicator
In-Bed Trunk
Instruments and Controls
117
RELEASE LEVER
10/04/19 15:54:05 31SJC650_122
2011 Ridgeline
There are two cargo hooks for
plastic grocery bags at the back of
the In-Bed Trunk. They are designed
to hold light items. Heavy objects
may damage the hooks.
To protect items in the In-Bed Trunk,
you can disable its release button by
turning off the main switch in the
glove box and locking the glove box
with the master key.
Even if the main switch is in the OFF
position, you can open the In-Bed
Trunk with the master key.
When you are finished washing the
In-Bed Trunk, dry it with a soft cloth,
and reinstall the drain plug.
Youcanwashtheinsideofthe
In-Bed Trunk with a water and mild
detergent solution, and a soft brush
or cloth.
To drain water from the In-Bed
Trunk, remove the drain plug by
turning it counterclockwise.
Cargo HooksWashing the In-Bed TrunkIn-Bed Trunk Main Switch
In-Bed Trunk
118
DRAIN PLUG
CARGO HOOKS
MAIN SWITCH
10/04/19 15:54:13 31SJC650_123
2011 Ridgeline
−
The front passenger’s seat in all
models adjusts manually.
To adjust the seat forward or
backward, pull up on the bar under
the seat cushion’s front edge. Move
the seat to the desired position, and
releasethebar.Trytomovetheseat
to make sure it is locked in position.
Make all seat adjustments before
you start driving.
See pages for important safety
information and warnings about how to
properly position the seats and seat-
backs.
On RT and Canadian DX and VP models
13 15
CONTINUED
Manual Seat Adjustments
Seats
Instruments and Controls
119
10/04/19 15:54:19 31SJC650_124
2011 Ridgeline
Make sure to pull the lever upward
or downward to its full range.
Make all seat adjustments before
you start driving.
To change the seat-back angle of the
front seat, pull up the lever on the
outside of the seat bottom.
Once a seat is adjusted correctly,
rock it back and forth to make sure it
is locked in position.
The height of your driver’s seat is
adjustable. To raise the seat,
repeatedly pull up the lever on the
outside of the seat cushion. To lower
the seat, push the lever down
repeatedly.
On RT and Canadian DX and VP models
Seats
Driver’s Seat Manual Height
Adjustment
120
10/04/19 15:54:26 31SJC650_125
2011 Ridgeline
−
Moves the seat forward
and backward.
The controls for the power
adjustable driver’s seat are on the
outside edge of the seat bottom. You
can adjust the seat with the ignition
switch in any position. Make all seat
adjustments before you start driving.
Moves the whole seat up
and forward, or down
and backward. The front
of the seat also tilts up or
down at the same time.
Moves the front of the
seat up or down.
Raises or lowers the seat.
Adjusts the seat-back
angle forward or
backward.
Increases or decreases
the lumbar support.
(RTL and Canadian EX-L
models)
See pages for important safety
information and warnings about how to
properly position the seats and seat-
backs.
13 15
On RTS, RTL and Canadian EX-L
models
Power Seat Adjustments
Seats
Instruments and Controls
121
10/04/19 15:54:37 31SJC650_126
2011 Ridgeline
To use the console lid as an armrest,
slide it to the desired position.
The rear seat armrest is in the
center of the rear seats. Pivot it
down to use it.
Your vehicle is equipped with head
restraints in all seating positions to
help protect you and your
passengers from the likelihood of
whiplash and other injuries.
Make sure your passenger’s hands
and fingers are away from the
armrest before moving it.
See page for important safety
information and a warning about
improperly positioning head restraints.
15
Armrests Head Restraints
Seats
122
FRONT REAR
10/04/19 15:54:44 31SJC650_127
2011 Ridgeline
When a passenger is seated in the
rear center seating position, make
sure the center head restraint is
properly positioned.
Theyaremosteffectivewhenyou
adjust them so the center of the back
of the occupant’s head rests against
the center of the restraint.
The head restraints adjust for height.
You need both hands to adjust the
restraint. Do not attempt to adjust it
while driving. To raise it, pull upward.
To lower the restraint, push the
release button sideways, and push
the restraint down.
CONTINUED
Seats
Adjusting the Head Restraint
Instruments and Controls
123
Rear Center Position
RELEASE BUTTON
CUSHION
LEGS
SEAT-BACK
RELEASE BUTTON
LEGS
CUSHION
10/04/19 15:54:51 31SJC650_128
2011 Ridgeline
The driver’s and front passenger’s
seats have active head restraints. If
the vehicle is struck severely from
the rear, the occupant properly
secured with the seat belt will be
pushed against the seat-back and the
head restraint will automatically
move forward.
This reduces the distance between
the restraint and the occupant’s head.
It also helps protect the occupants
against the likelihood of whiplash
and injuries to the neck and upper
spine.
To remove a head restraint for
cleaning or repair, pull it up as far as
it will go. Push the release button,
then pull the restraint out of the seat-
back.
When reinstalling a head restraint,
put the legs back in place. Then
adjust it to the appropriate height
while pressing the release button.
Make sure the head restraint locks
in position when you reinstall it.
If the restraints do not return to their
normal position, or in the event of a
severe collision, have the vehicle
inspected by a Honda dealer.
After a collision, the activated
restraint should return to its normal
position.
Seats
Active Head RestraintsRemoving the Head Restraint
124
Failure to reinstall the head
restraints can result in severe
injury during a crash.
Always replace the head
restraints before driving.
10/04/19 15:54:59 31SJC650_129
2011 Ridgeline
CONTINUED
For a head restraint system to work
properly:
Do not hang any items on the head
restraints, or from the restraint
legs.
Do not place any object between
an occupant and the seat-back.
Install each restraint in its proper
location.
Only use genuine Honda
replacement head restraints.
The left and right rear seat cushions
can be lifted up separately to make
room for cargo.
To fold a rear seat cushion, pull up
the lever on the outside of the
cushion. The seat cushion pops up,
and the seat legs store underneath it.
Push the cushion firmly against the
seat-back to lock it in place.
Remove any items from the seat
beforeyoufolduptheseatcushion.
Folding the Rear Seats
Seats
Instruments and Controls
125
10/04/19 15:55:07 31SJC650_130
2011 Ridgeline
If equipped
Make sure all items in the cargo area
are secured. Loose items can fly
forward and cause injury if you have
to brake hard (See
on page ).
You can also store small items under
the rear seats. Make sure to secure
the items so they will not shift while
you are driving.
To return the seat cushion to its
original position, pull the lever
outward, then push down the seat
cushion slowly.
Make sure the seat cushion is locked
securely and the seat legs are
positioned properly in the floor guide.
Both front seats are equipped with
seat heaters. Because of the sensors
for the side airbag cutoff system,
there is no heater in the passenger’s
seat-back. The ignition switch must
be in the ON (II) position to use the
heaters.
259
Seat Heaters
Carrying Cargo
Seats, Seat Heaters
126
Passenger’s
Seat
Driver’s
Seat
LEGS
FLOOR GUIDE
HEATERS
10/04/19 15:55:15 31SJC650_131
2011 Ridgeline
Follow these precautions when using
the seat heaters:
Use the HI setting only to heat the
seats quickly, because it draws
large amounts of current from the
battery.
If the engine is left idling for an
extended period, do not use the
seat heaters, even on the LO
setting. It can weaken the battery,
causing hard starting.
In the HI setting, the heater turns off
when the seat gets warm, and turns
back on after the seat’s temperature
drops.
In the LO setting, the heater runs
continuously. It does not cycle with
temperature changes.
Push the top of the switch, HI, to
rapidly heat up the seat. After the
seat reaches a comfortable
temperature, select LO by pushing
the bottom of the switch. This will
keep the seat warm.
Seat Heaters
Instruments and Controls
127
SEAT HEATER SWITCHES
10/04/19 15:55:21 31SJC650_132
2011 Ridgeline
−
Turn the ignition switch to the ON
(II) position to raise or lower any
side window, or open and close the
back window. To open the window,
push the switch down and hold it.
Release the switch when you want
the window to stop. Pull back on the
switchandholdittoclosethe
window.
Thewindowsoperateforupto10
minutes after you turn off the
ignition switch. Opening either front
door cancels this function.
To open or close the
driver’s window, push or pull the
window switch firmly down or up to
the second detent, and release it.
The window will automatically go up
or down all the way. To stop the
window, pull or push the window
switch briefly.
When you push the MAIN switch in,
the passenger windows and the back
window cannot be raised or lowered.
To cancel this feature, push on the
switch again. Keep the MAIN switch
offwhenyouhavechildreninthe
vehicle so they do not injure
themselves by operating the
windows unintentionally.
AUTO
Power Windows
128
DRIVER’S WINDOW
SWITCH
MAIN SWITCH
BACK WINDOW SWITCH
Closing a power window on
someone’s hands or fingers can
cause serious injury.
Make sure your passengers are
away from the windows before
closing them.
10/04/19 15:55:27 31SJC650_133
2011 Ridgeline
− If the driver’s
window senses any obstacle while it
is closing automatically, it will
reverse direction, and then stop. To
close the window, remove the
obstacle, then use the window switch
again.
Auto reverse stops sensing when the
window is almost closed. You should
always check that all passengers and
objects are away from the window
before closing it.
Your vehicle has a power back
window.
This indicator comes on when you
turn the ignition switch from the ON
(II) position to the ACCESSORY (I)
or LOCK (0) position without closing
the back window. With the ignition
switch in the ACCESSORY (I)
position, the indicator goes off after
about 30 seconds. With the ignition
switch in the LOCK (0) position, the
indicator goes off after about 3
minutes.
If your vehicle’s battery is
disconnected or goes dead, or the
driver’s window fuse is removed, the
AUTO function may be disabled. If
the AUTO function is disabled, the
power window system will need to be
reset after reconnecting the battery
or installing the fuse.
If the power windows do not operate
properly after resetting, have your
vehicle checked by your dealer.
Pull and hold the driver’s window
switch to close the window
completely, then hold the switch
for about 2 seconds.
Start the engine. Push down and
hold the driver’s window switch
until the window is fully open.
1.
2.
CONTINUED
AUTO REVERSE Back Window
Back Window Open
Indicator
Power Windows
Instruments and Controls
129
10/04/19 15:55:36 31SJC650_134
2011 Ridgeline
To open:
Insert the key in the driver’s door
lock.
Turn the key clockwise, then
release it.
You can open all of the side windows
from the outside with the remote
transmitter.
Press the UNLOCK button once
to unlock the driver’s door.
Press the UNLOCK button a
second time, and hold it. The
passenger’s doors unlock, and all
four side windows start to open.
To stop the windows, release the
button.
You can open and close the side
windows with the key in the driver’s
door lock.
The back window is not designed to
carry long items through it. Do not
use the opened back window as a
cargo area pass-through.
If you remove the ignition key and
open the driver’s door without
closing the back window, you hear
five beeps and see the indicator blink.
If you do not close the back window
before the beeper stops, the
indicator stops blinking but remains
on. It will go off after about 3
minutes (see page ).
To open the windows further,
press the button again, within
about 3 seconds.
You cannot close the windows with
the remote transmitter.
1.
2.
3.
1.
2.
75
Opening the Side Windows with
the Remote Transmitter
Opening/Closing the Side
Windows with the Key
Power Windows
130
Open
Close
UNLOCK BUTTON
10/04/19 15:55:46 31SJC650_135
2011 Ridgeline
Turnthekeyclockwiseagain,and
hold it. All four side windows start
to open. To stop the windows,
release the key.
To open the windows further, turn
andholdthekeyagain(within
10 seconds).
The moonroof has two positions: it
can be tilted up in the back for
ventilation, or it can slide back into
the roof. Use the switch near the left
dashboard vent to operate the
moonroof. The ignition switch must
be in the ON (II) position.
If the windows stop before
the desired position, repeat steps 2
and 3.
To close the windows further, turn
andholdthekeyagain(within
10 seconds).
To close:
If the windows stop before
the desired position, repeat steps 2
and 3.
Insert the key in the driver’s door
lock.
Turn the key counterclockwise,
then release it.
Turn the key counterclockwise
again, and hold it. All four side
windowsstarttoclose.Tostopthe
windows, release the key.
1.
2.
3.
4.3.
4.
If equipped
CONTINUED
Moonroof
Power Windows, Moonroof
Instruments and Controls
131
NOTE:
NOTE:
MOONROOF SWITCH
10/04/19 15:55:57 31SJC650_136
2011 Ridgeline
You can open and close the
moonroof for up to 10 minutes after
you turn off the ignition switch.
Opening either front door cancels
this function.
To apply the parking brake, push the
pedal down with your foot. To
release it, pull the release handle
fully. The parking brake indicator on
the instrument panel should go out
when the parking brake is fully
released (see page ).
To tilt up the back of the moonroof,
press and hold the center part of the
switch ( ). To close the
moonroof, press and hold the upper
part of the switch ( ). To open
the moonroof, press and hold the
lower part of the switch ( ).
Release the switch when the
moonroof gets to the desired
position.
Make sure everyone’s hands are
away from the moonroof before
opening or closing it.
65
Parking Brake
Moonroof, Parking Brake
132
RELEASE HANDLE
PARKING BRAKE PEDAL
Opening or closing the
moonroof on someone’s hands
or fingers can cause serious
injury.
Make sure all hands and fingers
are clear of the moonroof
before opening or closing it.
If you try to open the moonroof in
below-freezing temperatures, or when
it is covered with snow or ice, you can
damage the moonroof panel or its
motor.
10/04/19 15:56:05 31SJC650_137
2011 Ridgeline
Keeptheinsideandoutsidemirrors
clean and adjusted for best visibility.
Be sure to adjust the mirrors before
you start driving.
The inside mirror has day and night
positions. The night position reduces
glare from headlights behind you.
Flip the tab on the bottom edge of
the mirror to select the day or night
position.
Therearviewmirrorhasacompass
function to indicate the vehicle’s
direction.
Refer to on page .
You will also see a ‘‘RELEASE
PARKING BRAKE’’ message on the
multi-information display (see page
).90
213
If equipped
On models with navigation system
CONTINUED
Mirrors
Compass
Parking Brake, Mirrors
Instruments and Controls
133
TAB
Driving the vehicle with the parking
brake applied can damage the rear
brakes and hubs. A beeper will sound if
the vehicle is driven with the parking
brake on.
10/04/19 15:56:13 31SJC650_138
2011 Ridgeline
Turn the ignition switch to the ON
(II) position.
When you finish, move the
selector switch to the center (off)
position. This turns the
adjustment switch off to keep your
settings.
The outside mirrors are heated to
remove fog and frost. With the
ignition switch in the ON (II)
position, turn on the heaters by
pressing the button. The indicator in
the button comes on as a reminder.
Press the button again to turn the
heaters off.
Push the appropriate edge of the
adjustment switch to move the
mirrorright,left,up,ordown.
Move the selector switch to L
(driver’s side) or R (passenger’s
side).
1.
2.
3.
4.
If equipped
Adjusting the Power Mirrors Heated Mirrors
Mirrors
134
SELECTOR SWITCH
ADJUSTMENT SWITCH
HEATED MIRROR BUTTON
10/04/19 15:56:21 31SJC650_139
2011 Ridgeline
＊
＊
Interior Convenience Items
Instruments and Controls
135
GLOVE BOX
ACCESSORY POWER
SOCKET
CENTER UPPER
POCKET
CENTER POCKET
CENTER LOWER POCKET BEVERAGE HOLDERS
: On vehicle without navigation system
CONSOLE COMPARTMENT
ACCESSORY
POWER SOCKETS
SUN VISOR VANITY MIRROR
BEVERAGE HOLDERCOAT HOOK
CENTER CONSOLE
SUNGLASSES
HOLDER
10/04/19 15:56:25 31SJC650_140
2011 Ridgeline
Your vehicle has a multi-function
center console. It includes beverage
holders, storage compartments, an
armrest, a coin holder, and a storage
tray.
The center console main
compartment is under the tray and
the beverage holder. You can access
the main compartment in two ways
(front or rear).
To open the front of the
compartment, squeeze the knob, and
push it forward while sliding the
beverage holder. To close, squeeze
the knob and pull the compartment
backward until the beverage holder
latches.
To open the rear of the compartment,
push the button at the end of the
tray, then slide the tray forward. To
close, slide the tray back in place.
The console compartment light
comesonwhentheinstrumentpanel
lights are on.
There are two removable partitions
in the main compartment. The
partitions can be used to divide the
main compartment, or can be stored
at the front of the compartment.
Center Console
Console Compartments
Interior Convenience Items
136
10/04/19 15:56:33 31SJC650_141
2011 Ridgeline
You can put small items in the upper
console compartment. To use it, pull
up on the lever and lift up the
armrest. Spilled liquids can damage the
upholstery, carpeting, and electrical
components in the interior.
There are two cargo hooks for
plastic grocery bags at the back of
the center console. They are
designed to hold light items. Heavy
objects may damage the hooks.
Be careful when you are using the
beverage holders. A spilled liquid
that is very hot can scald you or your
passengers. Liquid can also spill
from the door panel beverage
holders when you close the doors.
Use only resealable containers in the
door beverage holders.
The center console has two beverage
holders on the front. Your vehicle
also has beverage holders in the rear
seat armrest and the rear door
panels.
The upper console compartment has
a removable coin holder. Pull the
coin holder straight up to remove it.
To install it, push it down along the
guides on the side of the
compartment.
Beverage Holders
Cargo Hooks
Interior Convenience Items
Instruments and Controls
137
CARGO HOOKS
COIN HOLDER
10/04/19 15:56:41 31SJC650_142
2011 Ridgeline
The glove box light comes on when
the parking lights are on.
Some larger styles of sunglasses
may not fit in the holder.
These hooks are not designed for
large or heavy items.
To open the sunglasses holder, push
on the rear edge. Make sure the
holder is closed while you are driving.
Open the glove box by pulling up on
thehandle.Closeitwithafirmpush.
Lock or unlock the glove box with
the master key.
Glove Box Sunglasses HolderCoat Hooks
Interior Convenience Items
138
SUNGLASSES HOLDER
An open glove box can cause
serious injury to your passenger
inacrash,evenifthe
passenger is wearing the seat
belt.
Always keep the glove box
closed while driving.
10/04/19 15:56:49 31SJC650_143
2011 Ridgeline
There are three accessory power
sockets in your vehicle. Two
accessory power sockets are above
the center pocket on the dashboard,
and another is on the back of the
center console.
These sockets are intended to supply
power for 12 volt DC accessories
that are rated 120 watts or less (10
amps).
To use an accessory power socket,
the ignition switch must be in the
ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position.
None of the sockets will power an
automotive type cigarette lighter
element. When both sockets are
being used, the combined power
rating of the accessories should be
120 watts or less (10 amps).
Accessory Power Sockets
Interior Convenience Items
Instruments and Controls
139
FRONT REAR
10/04/19 15:56:55 31SJC650_144
2011 Ridgeline
Pull up the vanity mirror cover to use
it.
The light comes on when you pull up
the cover.
The light will not come on if the sun
visor is slid outward.
Make sure you put the sun visor
back in place when you are getting
into or out of the vehicle.
In this position, the sun visor can be
adjusted by moving it on its slider.
Do not use the extended sun visor
over the inside mirror.
To use the sun visor, pull it down.
Whenusingthesunvisorforthe
side window, remove the support rod
from the clip, and swing it out.
Sun Visor Vanity Mirror
Interior Convenience Items
140
SUN VISOR
Slide
10/04/19 15:57:02 31SJC650_145
2011 Ridgeline
Always run the engine when you use
the AC power outlet.
The maximum capacity for this
power outlet is 115 volt AC at 100
watts or less. If you use an appliance
which requires more than 100 watts,
it automatically stops supplying the
power. If this happens, turn the
ignition switch off and turn it on
again.
The AC power outlet is not
designed for electric appliances
which require high initial peak
wattage such as cathode-ray tube
type televisions, refrigerators,
electric pumps, etc. It is also not
suitable for devices that process
precise data such as medical
equipment or measuring instruments.
Any appliances that require an
extremely stable power supply such
as microcomputer-controlled electric
blankets, touch sensor lamps, etc.,
should not be connected to this
outlet.
There is a 115 volt AC power outlet
inside the front console
compartment. To use the AC power
outlet, open the lids and open the
outlet cover. Insert the plug into the
receptacle slightly, turn it 90°
clockwise, then push in the plug all
the way.
On RTL and Canadian EX-L
Interior Convenience Items
AC Power Outlet
Instruments and Controls
141
NOTE:
10/04/19 15:57:08 31SJC650_146
2011 Ridgeline
When the interior light control switch is
in the ON position:
When the switch is in the OFF position:When the switch is in the door position:
None of the lights come on when a
door is opened.
The map lights in the front can be
turned on and off by pushing each
lens. The rear map lights cannot
be used.
All the individual map lights and
the rear console light come on and
stay on as long as the switch
remains in the ON position.
The individual map lights and the
rear console light come on when
any door is opened, or when the
remote transmitter or the key is
used to unlock the doors. When
the doors are closed, each
individual map light can be turned
on and off by pushing the lens.
The lights fade out about 30
seconds after all the doors are
closed.
With any door left open and the
key removed from the ignition
switch, the lights stay on about 3
minutes, then go out.
Interior Light Control Switch
Interior Lights
142
ON
OFF
DOOR POSITION
10/04/19 15:57:16 31SJC650_147
2011 Ridgeline
Turn on a front individual map light
by pushing the lens. Push the lens
again to turn it off. With the interior
light control switch in the door
position, a rear map light can be
turned on by pushing the lens. Push
the lens again to turn it off.
The courtesy light in each door
comes on when you open that door.
The light around the ignition switch
only comes on when you open the
driver’s door. After you close the
door, the ignition switch light fades
out in about 30 seconds.
The courtesy light in the back of the
center console comes on when you
open any door with the interior light
control switch in the door position.
After you close the doors, the light
fades out.
The map lights stay on when the
interior light control switch is in the
door position and the map light
switch is on.
The courtesy light between the front
map lights comes on when you turn
the parking lights on. To adjust its
brightness, turn the instrument
panel brightness control dial on the
dashboard (see page ).98
If equipped
Individual Map Lights Individual Interior Lights Courtesy Light
Interior Lights
Instruments and Controls
143
10/04/19 15:57:24 31SJC650_148
2011 Ridgeline
If you turn the ignition switch to
ACCESSORY (I) or LOCK (0)
without turning off the bed lights,
the lights and the indicator will
remain on, then go off after 20
minutes (see page ).
Your vehicle has bed lights in the
pickup bed: a light on each front
upper and rear bottom side. With the
shift lever in the Park position, the
bed lights come on when you push
the bed light switch on the
dashboard, swing open the tailgate,
or open the In-Bed Trunk. The
indicator on the instrument panel
alsocomesontoremindyouthatthe
bed lights are on.
To turn off the lights, push the light
switch again, or close the tailgate
and the In-Bed Trunk.
When you move the shift lever out of
the Park position, the bed lights go
off and cannot be used.
74
Bed Lights
144
BED LIGHT SWITCH
10/04/19 15:57:29 31SJC650_149
2011 Ridgeline
The heating and air conditioning
system in your vehicle provides a
comfortable driving environment in
all weather conditions.
The standard audio system has
many features. This section
describes those features and how to
use them.
Your vehicle has an anti-theft audio
system that requires a code number
to enable it.
The security system helps to dis-
courage vandalism and theft of your
vehicle.
Theclimatecontrolsystemandthe
audio system have a voice control
feature. Refer to the navigation
system manual for more information.
.............Vents, Heating, and A/C . 146
...............Climate Control System . 152
..........Playing the AM/FM Radio . 159
............AM/FM Radio Reception . 165
................Playing the XM
Radio . 167
...................................Playing CDs . 173
.......................................CD Player . 175
CD Changer
(Models without navigation
..................................system) . 181
CD Changer
(Models with navigation
..................................system) . 189
....................Protecting Your CDs . 198
CD Player/Changer Error
...................................Messages . 202
................Remote Audio Controls . 203
......................Auxiliary Input Jack . 205
.................Radio Theft Protection . 206
..........................Setting the Clock . 207
............................Security System . 208
...............................Cruise Control . 210
.........................................Compass . 213
HomeLink
Universal
................................Transceiver . 217
........
HandsFreeLink . 221
...Rearview Camera and Monitor . 246
Bluetooth
On RTS, RTL models, and Canadian
EX-L models
On models with navigation system
Features
Features
145
10/04/19 15:57:35 31SJC650_150
2011 Ridgeline
See page for automatic climate
control and semi-automatic operation
information.
152
On RTS, RTL and Canadian EX-L
models
Vents, Heating, and A/C
146
FAN CONTROL DIAL MAX A/C BUTTON
RECIRCULATION BUTTON
WINDSHIELD DEFROSTER BUTTON
TEMPERATURE
CONTROL DIAL
MODE BUTTONS
MODE BUTTONS
AIR CONDITIONING BUTTON
RT, Canadian DX, and VP models
10/04/19 15:57:40 31SJC650_151
2011 Ridgeline
This button turns the air
conditioningonandoff.Youwillsee
A/C ON or A/C OFF in the display.
When the indicator in the button is
on, air from the vehicle’s interior is
sent throughout the system again.
When the indicator is off, air is
brought in from the outside of the
vehicle (fresh air mode).
Thesystemshouldbeleftinfresh
air mode under almost all conditions.
Keeping the system in recirculation
mode, particularly with the A/C off,
can cause the windows to fog up.
Switch to recirculation mode when
driving through dusty or smoky
conditions, then return to fresh air
mode.
The outside air intakes for the
heating and cooling system are at
the base of the windshield. Keep this
area clear of leaves and other debris.
Turn this dial to increase or decrease
the fan speed and airflow.
Turning this dial clockwise increases
the temperature of the airflow.
Vents, Heating, and A/C
Air Conditioning (A/C) Button Recirculation ButtonFan Control Dial
Temperature Control Dial
Features
147
10/04/19 15:57:48 31SJC650_152
2011 Ridgeline
Use the mode control buttons to
select the vents air flows from. Some
air will flow from the dashboard
corner vents in all modes.
Air flows from the center,
corner, and rear vents in the
dashboard.
Airflow is divided between
the vents in the dashboard, rear and
the floor vents.
Air flows from the floor
vents. When you select , the
system automatically switches to
fresh air mode.
Airflow is divided between
the floor vents and defroster vents at
the base of the windshield.
Air flows from the defroster
vents at the base of the windshield.
When you select , the system
automatically switches to fresh air
mode and turns on the A/C.
When you switch to from
, the A/C stays on, and you
canturnitonandoffmanually.
The system automatically
turns on the A/C and switches to
Recirculation mode. Air flows from
the center and side vents in the
dashboard.
Vents, Heating, and A/C
Mode Control Windshield Defroster Button MAX A/C Button
148
10/04/19 15:58:01 31SJC650_153
2011 Ridgeline
Air conditioning places an extra load
on the engine. Watch the engine
coolant temperature gauge (see page
). If it moves near the red mark,
turn off the A/C until the gauge
reads normally.
The heater uses engine coolant to
warm the air. If the engine is cold, it
will be several minutes before you
feel warm air coming from the
system.
Select .
When you select , the system
automatically switches to the fresh
air mode.
Set the fan to the desired speed.
Adjust the warmth of the air with
the temperature control dial.
Set the temperature to the lower
limit.
Make sure the A/C is off.
Select and fresh air mode.
Set the fan to the desired speed.
If the outside air is humid, select
recirculation mode. If the outside
air is dry, select fresh air mode.
Select .
Make sure the temperature is set
to the lower limit.
Turn on the A/C by pressing the
button. You will see A/C ON in
the display.
Set the fan to the desired speed.
The ventilation system draws in
outside air, circulates it through the
interior, then exhausts it through
vents near the back window.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
1.
2.
3.
1.
2.
3.
4.
76
CONTINUED
Vents, Heating, and A/C
Using the A/CVentilation Using the Heater
Features
149
10/04/19 15:58:13 31SJC650_154
2011 Ridgeline
To remove fog from the inside of the
windows:
Air conditioning, as it cools, removes
moisture from the air. When used in
combination with the heater, it
makes the interior warm and dry.
This setting is suitable for all driving
conditions whenever the outside
temperature is above 32°F (0°C).
Turn the fan on.
Press the A/C button.
Select and fresh air mode.
Adjust the temperature to your
preference.
Set the fan to the desired speed, or
high for faster defrosting.
Select . The system
automatically switches to fresh air
mode and turns on the A/C. The
A/C ON indicator will not be
displayed if it was off to start with.
Adjust the temperature so the
airflow feels warm.
To increase airflow to the
windshield, close the corner vents.
When you switch to another mode
from , the A/C turns off. But
if it was on to start with, it stays on.
This function helps to increase wiper
performance when the wiper arms
sit in the parked position in snowy or
icy conditions.
Your vehicle has heating wires at the
bottom of the windshield to help
heat the wiper blades and the
windshield. If the outside
temperature is near freezing, the
heater turns on automatically when
you turn the ignition switch to the
ON (II) position. The heater turns
off automatically when the outside
temperature is above freezing.
If the interior is very warm, you can
cool it down more rapidly by partially
opening the windows, turning on the
A/C, and setting the fan to
maximum speed in fresh air mode.
1.
2.
3.
4.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Vents, Heating, and A/C
To Defog and Defrost
Dehumidify the Interior
Automatic Heated Wiper Zone
150
10/04/19 15:58:23 31SJC650_155
2011 Ridgeline
Set the fan and temperature
controls to maximum level.
Select . The system
automatically switches to fresh air
mode and turns on the A/C.
The A/C ON indicator will not be
displayed if it was off to start with.
Select .
Turning the fan speed control dial all
the way to the left shuts the system
off.
Keep the system off for short
periods only.
To keep stale air and mustiness
from collecting, you should have
the fan running at all times.
You can adjust the direction of the
air coming from the rear vents in the
back of the center console by
moving the tab in the center of each
vent up-and-down and side-to-side.
You can also adjust the amount of
airflow by turning the dial between
the vents.
To clear the windows faster, you can
close the dashboard corner vents by
rotating the wheel next to
(passenger’s side) or below it
(driver’s side). This will send more
warm air to the windshield defroster
vents. Once the windshield is clear,
select fresh air mode to avoid
fogging the windows.
For your safety, make sure you have
a clear view through all the windows
before driving.
1.
2.
3.
To Remove Exterior Frost or Ice
From the Windows
To Turn Everything Off Rear Ventilation
Vents, Heating, and A/C
Features
151
DIAL
TABS
10/04/19 15:58:33 31SJC650_156
2011 Ridgeline
The climate control system can also
be operated by voice control.
See the navigation system manual
for complete details.
On models with navigation system
Voice Control System
Climate Control System
152
DRIVER’S SIDE
TEMPERATURE
DISPLAY
ON/OFF BUTTON
MODE BUTTON
PASSENGER’S SIDE
TEMPERATURE DISPLAY
AIR CONDITIONING BUTTON
AUTO BUTTON
DRIVER’S SIDE
TEMPERATURE
CONTROL DIAL
RECIRCULATION BUTTON
WINDSHIELD
DEFROSTER BUTTON
RTS, RTL, and Canadian EX-L models
FAN CONTROL
BUTTONS
PASSENGER’S SIDE
TEMPERATURE
CONTROL DIAL
10/04/19 15:58:40 31SJC650_157
2011 Ridgeline
The automatic climate control
system in your vehicle maintains the
interior temperature you select. The
system also adjusts the fan speed
and airflow levels.
The system automatically selects the
proper mix of conditioned and/or
heated air that will, as quickly as
possible, raise or lower the interior
temperature to your preference.
When you set either side
temperature to its lower limit
( ) or its upper limit ( ),
the system runs at full cooling or
heating only. It does not regulate the
interior temperature.
When you press a fan control button,
the fan is taken out of AUTO mode.
The driver’s and passenger’s side
temperatures should always be set
separately. Turn the desired dial
clockwisetoincreasetheairflow
temperature of that side, and
counterclockwise to decrease it.
Press the Auto button on the front
control panel. You will see AUTO
in the system display.
Adjust the temperature for the
driver’s and passenger’s side
separately, using the desired
temperature control dial.
The passenger’s side temperature
setting does not synchronize to the
driver’s side at any time except when
the system is in the defroster mode
(see page ).
1.
2.
155
CONTINUED
Using Automatic Climate Control
Temperature Control
Climate Control System
Features
153
10/04/19 15:58:49 31SJC650_158
2011 Ridgeline
▲
▼
To turn the system completely off,
press the ON/OFF button.
Keep the system completely off
for short periods only.
To keep stale air and mustiness
from collecting, you should have
the fan running at all times.
You can manually select various
functions of the climate control
system when it is in fully automatic
mode. All other features remain
automatically controlled. Making any
manual selection causes the word
AUTO in the display to go out.
Press the button to increase
the fan speed and airflow. Press the
button to decrease it.
This button turns the air
conditioningonandoff.Youwillsee
A/C ON or A/C OFF in the display.
When you turn the A/C off, the
system cannot regulate the inside
temperature if you set the
temperature control below the
outside temperature.
In AUTO mode, the vehicle’s
temperature is independently
regulated, based on the driver’s and
passenger’s side setting. The system
also regulates each temperature
basedontheinformationofthesun
light sensor and the sun’s position
which is updated automatically by
the navigation’s global positioning
system (GPS). For example, if the
driver’s side of the vehicle is getting
too much sun, the system will adjust
to a lower temperature.
On models with navigation system
To Turn Everything Off Semi-automatic Operation
Fan Control
Air Conditioning (A/C) Button
Climate Control System
154
10/04/19 15:58:58 31SJC650_159
2011 Ridgeline
CONTINUED
This button directs the main airflow
to the windshield for faster
defrosting. It also overrides any
mode selection you may have made.
When you select , the system
automatically switches to fresh air
mode and turns on the A/C. For
faster defrosting, manually set the
fanspeedtohigh.Youcanalso
increase airflow to the windshield by
closing the corner vents on the
dashboard. To close the vents, rotate
the wheel under each corner vent.
When you turn off by
pressing the button again, the
system returns to its former settings.
Use the mode control button to
select the vents the air flows from.
Some air will flow from the
dashboard vents in all modes.
Air flows from the center,
corner, and rear vents in the
dashboard.
Airflow is divided between
the vents in the dashboard, rear and
the floor vents.
Air flows from the floor
vents.
Airflow is divided between
the floor and corner vents and the
defroster vents at the base of the
windshield.
When the indicator in the button is
on, air from the vehicle’s interior is
sent through the system again.
When the indicator is off, air is
brought in from the outside of the
vehicle (fresh air mode).
The outside air intakes for the
climate control system are at the
base of the windshield. Keep this
area clear of leaves and other debris.
Thesystemshouldbeleftinfresh
air mode under almost all conditions.
Keeping the system in recirculation
mode, particularly with the A/C off,
can cause the windows to fog up.
Switch to recirculation mode when
driving through dusty or smoky
conditions, then return to fresh air
mode.
Climate Control System
Windshield Defroster ButtonMode ControlRecirculation Button
Features
155
10/04/19 15:59:11 31SJC650_160
2011 Ridgeline
You can adjust the direction of the
air coming from the rear vents in the
back of the center console by
moving the tab in the center of each
vent up-and-down and side-to-side.
You can also adjust the amount of
airflow by turning the dial between
the vents.
For your safety, make sure you have
a clear view through all the windows
before driving.
When the indicator in the button is
on, the passenger’s side temperature
automatically adjusts to the driver’s
side temperature.
Your vehicle has heating wires at the
bottom of the windshield to help
heat the wiper blades and the
windshield. If the outside
temperature is near freezing, the
heater turns on automatically when
you turn the ignition switch to the
ON (II) position. The heater turns
off automatically when the outside
temperature is above freezing.
This function helps to increase wiper
performance when the wiper arms
sit in the parked position in snowy or
icy conditions.
Rear VentilationAutomatic Heated Wiper Zone
Climate Control System
156
TABS
DIAL
10/04/19 15:59:18 31SJC650_161
2011 Ridgeline
The temperatures of the driver’s side
and the front passenger’s side are
controlled independently.
To adjust each temperature, turn
either of the temperature control
dials on the climate control panel.
When you set each temperature to
its lower limit or its upper limit, it will
be displayed as ‘‘ ’’ or ‘‘ ’’.
Climate Control System
Dual Temperature Control
Features
157
Driver’s Side Passenger’s Side
10/04/19 15:59:24 31SJC650_162
2011 Ridgeline
Theclimatecontrolsystemhastwo
sensors. A sunlight sensor is in the
top of the dashboard, and a
temperature sensor is under the
steering column. Do not cover the
sensors or spill any liquid on them.
Sunlight and Temperature
Sensors
Climate Control System
158
SUNLIGHT SENSOR TEMPERATURE SENSOR
10/04/19 15:59:29 31SJC650_163
2011 Ridgeline
CONTINUED
Playing the AM/FM Radio
Features
159
AM/FM
BUTTON
SCAN
BUTTON
SEEK/SKIP BAR
RT, Canadian DX, and VP models
POWER
BUTTON
SOUND BUTTON
VOLUME KNOB
STEREO INDICATOR
TUNE BAR PRESET BARS TUNE BAR
A.SEL
(AUTO
SELECT)
BUTTON
POWER
BUTTON
SOUND
BUTTON
RTS model
VOLUME KNOB
STEREO INDICATOR
SCAN
BUTTON
AM/FM
BUTTON
A.SEL
(AUTO
SELECT)
BUTTON
PRESET BARSSEEK/SKIP BAR
10/04/19 15:59:36 31SJC650_164
2011 Ridgeline
Playing the AM/FM Radio
160
SCAN
BUTTON
TUNE BARPRESET BARS
SEEK/SKIP BAR
SOUND
BUTTON
STEREO INDICATOR
TUNE BAR
VOLUME KNOB
STEREO INDICATOR
AM/FM BUTTON
A.SEL (AUTO SELECT) BUTTON
SEEK/SKIP BAR
SOUND
BUTTON
AM/FM
BUTTON
VOLUME KNOB
A.SEL
(AUTO
SELECT)
BUTTON
SCAN
BUTTON
PRESET BARS
RTL and Canadian EX-L models without navigation system RTL and Canadian EX-L models with navigation system
POWER BUTTON POWER BUTTON
10/04/19 15:59:42 31SJC650_165
2011 Ridgeline
−
−
−
−−
−
You can use any of five methods to
find radio stations on the selected
band: tune, seek, scan, the preset
bars, and auto select.
Use the TUNE bar to tune
the radio to a desired frequency.
Press the side of the bar to tune
to a higher frequency, and press the
side to tune to a lower
frequency.
The scan function samples
all stations with strong signals on the
selected band. To activate it, press
the SCAN button, then release it.
You will see SCAN in the display.
When the system finds a strong
signal, it will stop and play that
station for about 10 seconds.The ignition switch must be in the
ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position.
Turn the system on by pushing the
PWR button or the AM/FM button.
Adjust the volume by turning the
volume knob.
Pushing the AUDIO button will also
turn on the system (see page ).
The band and frequency that the
radio was last tuned to are displayed.
To change bands, press the AM/FM
button. On the FM band, ST will be
displayed if the station is
broadcasting in stereo. Stereo
reproduction in AM is not available.
On the AM band, AM noise
reduction turns on automatically.
The SEEK function
searches up and down from the
current frequency to find a station
with a strong signal. To activate it,
press the or side of the
SEEK/SKIP bar, then release it.
If you do nothing, the system will
scan for the next strong station and
play it for 10 seconds. When it plays
a station that you want to listen to,
press the SCAN button again.
Each side of the bars (1
6) can store one frequency on AM
and two frequencies on FM.
Select the desired band, AM or
FM. FM1 and FM2 let you store
six stations each.
Usethetune,seek,orscan
function to tune the radio to a
desired station.
Pick a preset number (1 6), and
hold it until you hear a beep.
Repeat steps 1 through 3 to store a
total of six stations on AM and
twelve stations on FM.
1.
2.
3.
4.
163
CONTINUED
On models with navigation system
To Play the AM/FM Radio To Select a Station
TUNE
SCAN
SEEK
Preset
Playing the AM/FM Radio
Features
161
10/04/19 15:59:54 31SJC650_166
2011 Ridgeline
−
−
−
−
−
−
If you do not like the stations auto
select has stored, you can store
other frequencies on the preset bars
as previously described.
,pressthe
A. SEL (auto select) button. This
restores the presets you originally
set.
If you are
traveling far from home and can no
longer receive your preset stations,
you can use the auto select feature to
find stations in the local area.
Press the A. SEL button. ‘‘A.SEL’’
flashes in the display, and the system
goes into scan mode for several
seconds. It stores the frequencies of
six AM, and twelve FM stations in
the preset bars.
You will see a ‘‘0’’ displayed after
pressing a preset bar if auto select
cannot find a strong station for every
preset bar.
Adjusts the
strength of sound from the
subwoofer speaker.
Adjusts the bass.
Adjusts the treble.
Adjusts the front-to-back
strength of the sound.
Adjusts the side-to-
side strength of the sound.
For information on FM/AM radio
frequencies and reception, see page
.
Press the SOUND button repeatedly
to display the SUBWOOFER (if
equipped), BASS, TREBLE, FADER,
and BALANCE settings.
Eachmodeisshowninthedisplayas
it changes. Turn the VOLUME knob
to adjust the setting to your liking.
When the level reaches the center,
youwillsee‘‘ ’’inthedisplay.
The system will automatically return
the display to the selected audio
mode about 10 seconds after you
stop adjusting a mode.
165
To turn off auto select
If equipped
AUTO SELECT
SUBWOOFER
BASS
TREBLE
FADER
BALANCE
Adjusting the Sound
Playing the AM/FM Radio
162
10/04/19 16:00:04 31SJC650_167
2011 Ridgeline
−
−
In addition to the knobs, buttons, and
bars on the radio control panel, you
can operate some of the radio
controls on the navigation system
screen.
To adjust the sound, push the
AUDIO button, then enter the sound
grid by touching the SOUND icon on
the display.
While you are listening to the radio,
you can change to another band by
pressing the AUDIO button next to
the navigation system screen, and
then touching the desired band icon
(FM1, FM2, or AM).
AUTO SELECT, SCAN, and SOUND
are adjustable from the navigation
screen. For an explanation of these
functions, see pages and .
Touch the
A.SEL icon to activate the auto select
function. You will see A.SEL flashing
on the display.
Touch the SCAN icon to
activate the scan function. You will
see SCAN on the display. Touch the
icon again to deactivate it.
161 162
CONTINUED
On models with navigation system
Operating the Radio on the
Navigation System Screen
AUTO SELECT
SCAN
Adjusting the Sound
Playing the AM/FM Radio
Features
163
AUDIO BUTTON
10/04/19 16:00:12 31SJC650_168
2011 Ridgeline
−
−
−
＋−
These modes adjust
the strength of the sound coming
from each speaker. Left/Right
balance adjusts the side-to-side
strength, while Front/Rear fader
adjusts the front-to-back strength.
To adjust the left/right balance,
touch the ‘‘L’’ or ‘‘R’’ icon. To adjust
the front/rear fader, touch the ‘‘FR’’
or ‘‘RR’’ icon.
The audio system can also be
operated by voice control. See the
navigation system manual for
complete details.
To adjust the treble
and bass, touch or on each
side of the treble or bass adjustment
bar. The adjustment bar shows you
the current setting.
Adjusts the
strength of sound from the
subwoofer speaker.
To see the audio display when you
are finished adjusting the sound,
wait 5 seconds.
You can use the instrument panel
brightness control dial to adjust the
illumination of the audio system (see
page ). The audio system
illuminates when the parking lights
are on, even if the radio is off.
98
On models with navigation system
Lef t/Right Balance and Front/
Rear Fader
Voice Control System
Treble/Bass
SUBWOOFER
Audio System Lighting
Playing the AM/FM Radio
164
10/04/19 16:00:19 31SJC650_169
2011 Ridgeline
The radio can receive the complete
AM and FM bands.
Those bands cover these frequen-
cies:
AM band: 530 to 1,710 kHz
FM band: 87.7 to 107.9 MHz
Radio stations on the AM band are
assigned frequencies at least 10 kHz
apart (530, 540, 550). Stations on the
FM band are assigned frequencies at
least 0.2 MHz apart (87.9, 88.1, 88.3). Driving very near the transmitter of
a station that is broadcasting on a
frequency close to the frequency of
the station you are listening to can
also affect your radio’s reception.
You may temporarily hear both
stations,orhearonlythestationyou
are close to.
How well the radio receives stations
is dependent on many factors, such
as the distance from the station’s
transmitter, nearby large objects,
atmospheric conditions, and even
items stored on the roof rack.
A radio station’s signal gets weaker
as you get farther away from its
transmitter. If you are listening to an
AM station, you will notice the sound
volume becoming weaker, and the
stationdriftinginandout.Ifyouare
listening to an FM station, you will
see the stereo indicator flickering off
and on as the signal weakens.
Eventually, the stereo indicator will
go off and the sound will fade
completely as you get out of range of
the station’s signal.
Stations must use these exact
frequencies. It is fairly common for
stations to round-off the frequency in
their advertising, so your radio could
display a frequency of 100.9 even
though the announcer may identify
the station as ‘‘FM101.’’
CONTINUED
Radio Frequencies Radio Reception
AM/FM Radio Reception
Features
165
10/04/19 16:00:28 31SJC650_170
2011 Ridgeline
Radio signals, especially on the FM
band, are deflected by large objects
such as buildings and hills. Your
radio then receives both the direct
signal from the station’s transmitter,
and the deflected signal. This causes
the sound to distort or flutter. This is
a main cause of poor radio reception
in city driving.
Radio reception can be affected by
atmospheric conditions such as
thunderstorms, high humidity, and
even sunspots. You may be able to
receive a distant radio station one
day and not receive it the next day
because of a change in conditions.
Electrical interference from passing
vehicles and stationary sources can
cause temporary reception problems.
As required by the FCC:
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
AM/FM Radio Reception
166
10/04/19 16:00:34 31SJC650_171
2011 Ridgeline
CONTINUED
Playing the XM Radio
Features
167
POWER BUTTON
TUNE BAR
DISPLAY/MODE BUTTON
CATEGORY BAR
POWER BUTTON
CATEGORY BAR
DISPLAY/MODE BUTTON
PRESET BARS
SCAN
BUTTON
TUNE BAR
PRESET BARS
XM BUTTON
XM BUTTON
RTL and Canadian EX-L models without navigation system RTL and Canadian EX-L models with navigation system
VOLUME KNOB
VOLUME KNOB
SCAN BUTTON
10/04/19 16:00:40 31SJC650_172
2011 Ridgeline
−
On the audio display, you will see the
selected CHANNEL (number),
CATEGORY, NAME (artist name),
and TITLE (music title).
You may experience periods when
XM Radio does not transmit the
artist’s name and song title
information. If this happens, there is
nothing wrong with your system.
XM Radio receives signals from two
satellites to produce clear, high-
quality digital reception. It offers
many channels in several categories.
Along with a large selection of
different types of music, XM Radio
allows you to view channel and
category selections in the display.
The navigation system screen also
shows all XM information when the
AUDIO button is pressed.
To listen to XM radio, turn the
ignition switch to the ACCESSORY
(I) or ON (II) position. Push the
PWR button to turn on the audio
system, and press the XM button.
Adjust the volume by turning the
volume knob. The last channel you
listened to will show in the display.
Each time you press and release the
DISP/MODE button, the display
changes in the following sequence:
Channel name, channel number,
category, artist name, and music title.
In channel mode, you can select all
of the available channels. In category
mode, such as Jazz, Rock, Classical,
etc., you can select all of the
channels within that category.
To switch between
channel mode and category mode,
press and hold the DISP/MODE
button until the mode changes.
You can also change to the XM
Radio while you are listening to an
FM station, AM station, CD, etc. by
touching the XM1 or XM2 icon on
the audio display (navigation system
screen).
Your vehicle is capable of receiving
XM
Radio anywhere in the United
States and Canada, except Hawaii,
Alaska,andPuertoRico.XMisa
registered trademark of Sirius XM
Radio
,Inc.andXMCANADA is a
registered business name of
Canadian Satellite Radio Inc.
On RTL and Canadian EX-L models
Playing the XM Radio
Operating the XM Radio
MODE
168
On vehicles with navigation system
10/04/19 16:00:48 31SJC650_173
2011 Ridgeline
−
−
−
−Press the TUNE bar to
change channel selections. Press
for higher numbered channels
and for lower numbered
channels. In the category mode, you
can only select channels within that
category.
Press either side of the CATEGORY
bar ( or ) to select another
category.
The scan function gives
you a sampling of all channels while
in the channel mode. In the category
mode, only the channels within that
category are scanned. To activate
scan, press the SCAN button or
touch the SCAN icon on the screen.
The system plays each channel in
numerical order for a few seconds,
then selects the next channel. When
you hear a channel you want to listen
to, press the button or touch the icon
again.
Youcanstoreupto12
preset channels using each side of
the preset bar or preset icons on the
screen. Each side of the bar stores
one channel from the XM1 band and
one channel from the XM2 band.
Pick a preset number (icon) you
want for that channel. Press and
hold the bar (icon) until you hear a
beep.
Repeat steps 2 and 3 to store the
first six channels.
Once a channel is stored, press and
release the proper side of the preset
bar (icon) to tune to it.
To store a channel:
Press the XM button. Either XM1
or XM2 will show in the display.
Usethetune,seek,orscan
function to tune to a desired
channel.
Press the XM button again or
touch the other XM icon (XM1 or
XM2) on the audio display. Store
the next six channels using steps 2
and 3.
In category mode, only channels
within that category can be selected.
In channel mode, all channels can be
selected.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
TUNE
SEEK/SKIP (CATEGORY)
SCAN
Preset
Playing the XM Radio
Features
169
10/04/19 16:00:57 31SJC650_174
2011 Ridgeline
−
−
−
−
−
−
XM is loading the
audio or program information.
The signal is
currently too weak. Move the vehicle
to an area away from tall buildings,
and with an unobstructed view of the
southern horizon.
The channel
currently selected is no longer
broadcasting.
The encryption
code is being updated. Wait until the
encryption code is fully updated.
Channels 0 and 1 should still work
normally.
The selected channel
number does not exist, or is not part
of your subscription, or this channel
has no artist or title information at
this time.
There is a problem
with the XM antenna. Please consult
your dealer.
XM Radio Display Messages
‘‘LOADING’’
‘‘NO SIGNAL’’
‘‘OFF AIR’’
‘‘UPDATING’’
‘‘----’’
‘‘ANTENNA’’
Playing the XM Radio
170
10/04/19 16:01:03 31SJC650_175
2011 Ridgeline
The XM satellites are in orbit over
the equator; therefore, objects south
of the vehicle may cause satellite
reception interruptions. To help
compensate for this, ground-based
repeaters are placed in major
metropolitan areas.
Satellite signals are more likely to be
blocked by tall buildings and
mountains the farther north you
travel from the equator. Carrying
large items on a roof rack can also
block the signal.
CONTINUED
Playing the XM Radio
Features
171
Signal may be blocked by
mountains or large obstacles to
the south.
Signal weaker in
these areas.
SATELLITE
GROUND REPEATER
10/04/19 16:01:08 31SJC650_176
2011 Ridgeline
Depending on where you drive, you
may experience reception problems.
Interference can be caused by any of
these conditions:
Driving on the north side of a
large commercial truck on an
east/west road.
Driving in tunnels.
Driving on a road beside a vertical
wall, steep cliff, or hill to the south
of you.
Driving on the lower level of a
multi-tiered road.
Driving on a single lane road
alongside dense trees taller than
50 ft. (15 m) to the south of you.
Driving on the north side of an
east/west mountain road.
Large items carried on a roof rack.
There may be other geographic
situations that could affect XM Radio
reception.
If your XM Radio service has expired
or you purchased your vehicle from
a previous owner, you can listen to a
sampling of the broadcasts available
on XM Radio. With the ignition
switch in the ACCESSORY (I) or ON
(II) position, push the PWR button to
turn on the audio system and press
the XM button. A variety of music
types and styles will play.
If you decide to purchase XM Radio
service, contact XM Radio at
,orat
1-800-852-9696. In Canada, contact
XM CANADA
at , or
at 1-877-209-0079. You will need to
give them your radio I.D. number
and your credit card number. To get
your radio I.D. number, press the
TUNE bar until ‘‘0’’ appears in the
display. Your I.D. will appear in the
display.
While waiting for activation, make
sure your vehicle remains in an open
area with good reception. Once your
audio system is activated, you’ll be
able to listen to XM Radio broadcasts.
XM Radio will continue to send an
activation signal to your vehicle for
at least 12 hours from the activation
request. If the service has not been
activated after 36 hours, contact
XM
Radio. In Canada, contact XM
CANADA
.
After you’ve registered with XM
Radio, keep your audio system in the
XM radio mode while you wait for
activation. This should take about 30
minutes.
As required by the FCC:
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
www.xmradio.com
www.xmradio.ca
Receiving XM Radio Service
Playing the XM Radio
172
10/04/19 16:01:18 31SJC650_177
2011 Ridgeline
CONTINUED
You operate the CD player with the
same controls used for the radio. See
page for the CD player operation
information.
You operate the CD changer with
the same controls used for the radio.
For models without navigation
system, see pages through .
For models with navigation system,
see pages through .
This audio system can also play
CD-Rs and CD-RWs compressed in
MP3 or WMA formats. When
playing a disc in MP3, you will see
‘‘MP3’’ in the display. In WMA
format, ‘‘WMA’’ will appear in the
display.
You can select up to 999 tracks/files.
If the number of tracks/files is 1,000
or more, the system can not access
them.
When there are more than 99 folders
in a disc, the display only shows two
digits.
You can select up to 400 tracks/files
in a disc.
A disc can support a maximum
number of 100 folders, and each
folder can hold 255 playable files.
If you have a disc that is a
combination of CD-DA tracks and
MP3/WMA files, you can choose the
format to listen by pressing and
holding CD/AUX or CD button until
you hear a beep.
If a file on an MP3 or WMA disc is
protected by digital rights
management (DRM), the audio unit
displays UNSUPPORTED
(UNSUPPORT on models with
navigation system), and then skips to
the next file.
Video CDs and DVDs do not work in
this unit.
175
181 188
189 197
On RTS, RTL and Canadian EX-L
models
On models without navigation system
On models with navigation system
On RT, Canadian DX, and VP models
Playing CDs
Features
173
NOTE:
10/04/19 16:01:28 31SJC650_178
2011 Ridgeline
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
The specifications for compatible
WMA files are:
The specifications for compatible
MP3 files are:
Maximum layers
(including ROOT):
8 layers
99 layers
Sampling frequency:
32/44.1/48 kHz (MPEG1)
16/22.05/24 kHz (MPEG2)
Bitrate:
32/40/48/56/64/80/96/112/128/
160/192/224/256/320 kbps
(MPEG1)
8/16/24/32/40/48/56/64/80/96/
112/128/160 kbps (MPEG2)
Compatible with variable bitrate
and multi-session
Sampling frequency:
32/44.1/48 kHz
Bitrate:
48/64/80/96/128/160/192 kbps
Compatible with variable bitrate
and multi-session
Maximum layers
(including ROOT):
8 layers
99 layers
On models without navigation system
On models with navigation system
On models without navigation system
On models with navigation system
Playing CDs
174
10/04/19 16:01:36 31SJC650_179
2011 Ridgeline
You operate the disc player with the
same controls used for the radio. To
select the disc player, press the CD
button. You will see ‘‘CD’’ in the
display.
To load or play a disc, the ignition
switch must be in the ACCESSORY
(I) or ON (II) position.
CONTINUED
On RT, Canadian DX, and VP models
To Play a Disc
CD Player
Features
175
RANDOM
BUTTON
CD SLOT EJECT BUTTON
TUNE/FOLDER BAR
REPEAT
BUTTON
DISPLAY
BUTTON
AM/FM
BUTTON
RT, Canadian DX, and VP models
CD BUTTON
PWR BUTTON
SCAN BUTTON
SEEK/SKIP BAR PRESET BARS
Do not use discs with adhesive labels.
The label can curl up and cause the
disc to jam in the unit.
10/04/19 16:01:43 31SJC650_180
2011 Ridgeline
Each time you press the DISP button,
the display shows you the text data
on a disc, if the disc was recorded
with text data.
You can see the album, artist, and
track name in the display. If a disc is
recorded in MP3 or WMA, you can
see the folder and file name, and the
artist, album, and track tag.
When you press and release the
DISP button while a disc without text
data is playing, you will see ‘‘NO
INFO’’ on the display.
The display shows up to about 16
characters of selected text data (the
foldername,filename,etc.).Ifthe
text data has more than 17
characters, you will see the first 15
characters and the indicator in
the display. Press and hold the DISP
button until the next 16 characters
are shown. You can see up to 31
characters of the text data.
IfyoupressandholdtheDISP
button again, the display shows the
first 15 characters again.
Insert a disc about halfway into the
disc slot. The drive will pull the disc
intherestofthewaytoplayit.You
operate the disc player with the
same controls used for the radio.
The number of the current track is
showninthedisplay.Whenplayinga
disc in MP3 or WMA, the numbers
of the current folder and file are
shown. The system will continuously
play a disc until you change modes.
If any letter is not available, it is
replaced with ‘‘ . ’’ (dot) in the display.
When the disc has no text data, you
will see ‘‘NO INFO’’ on the display.
For information on how to handle
and protect compact discs, see page
.198
To Load a Disc Text Data Display Function
CD Player
176
10/04/19 16:01:51 31SJC650_181
2011 Ridgeline
−
−
You will also see some text data
under these conditions:
When a new folder, file, or track is
selected.
When you change the audio mode
to play a disc with text data or in
MP3 or WMA.
When you insert a disc, and the
system begins to play.
When playing a CD-DA with text
data, the album and track name are
showninthedisplay.Withadiscin
MP3 or WMA, the display shows the
folder and file name.
You can use the SEEK/SKIP bar
while a disc is playing to select
passages and change tracks (files in
MP3/WMA mode).
Each time you press and
releasethe sideoftheSEEK/
SKIP bar, the player skips forward to
the beginning of the next track (file
in MP3 or WMA mode). Press and
release the side, to skip
backward to the beginning of the
current track. Press it again to skip
to the beginning of the previous
track.
To move rapidly within a track, press
and hold the or side of the
SEEK/SKIP bar.
To
select a different folder, press either
side of the TUNE/FOLDER bar.
Press the side of the bar to skip
to the next folder, and the side
of the bar to skip to the beginning of
the previous folder.
In MP3 or WMA mode
CONTINUED
To Change or Select Tracks/Files
SKIP
FOLDER SELECTION
CD Player
Features
177
10/04/19 16:02:00 31SJC650_182
2011 Ridgeline
−−−
In MP3 or WMA mode
To continuously replay
a track (files in MP3 or WMA mode),
press and release the RPT button.
You will see ‘‘RPT’’ in the display.
Press and hold the RPT button for 2
seconds to turn it off.
This feature,
when activated, replays all files on
the selected folder in the order they
are compressed. To activate folder
repeat, press the RPT button twice.
You will see ‘‘ RPT’’ in the
display. The system continuously
replays the current folder. Press the
RPT button again to turn it off.
Pressing the RDM button, or
selecting a different folder with the
TUNE/FOLDER bar also turns off
the repeat feature.
Each time you press and release the
RPT button, the mode changes from
file repeat to folder repeat, then to
normal play.
This feature plays the
tracks within a disc (the files in MP3
or WMA mode) in random order. To
activate random play, press and
release the RDM button. In MP3 or
WMA mode, press the RDM button
repeatedly to select RDM (within a
disc random play). You will see
‘‘RDM’’ in the display. Press the
RDM button for 2 seconds to return
to normal play.
REPEAT (TRACK/FILE
REPEAT) FOLDER-REPEAT
RANDOM (Random within a
disc)
CD Player
178
10/04/19 16:02:05 31SJC650_183
2011 Ridgeline
−
−−
In MP3 or WMA modeIn MP3 or WMA mode
The system plays the first file in the
first folder for about 10 seconds. If
you do nothing, the system will then
play the first files in the next folders
for 10 seconds. After playing the first
file in the last folder, the system
plays normally.
The scan function samples all tracks
(files in MP3 or WMA) on the disc in
the order they are recorded on the
disc. To activate scan, press and
release the SCAN button. You will
see SCAN in the display. You will get
a10secondsamplingofeachtrack/
file on the disc. Press and hold the
SCAN button until you hear a beep
to get out of scan mode and play the
last track/file sampled.
This
feature, when activated, plays all
files on the selected folder in random
order. To activate folder random,
press the RDM button. You will see
‘‘ RDM’’ in the display. The
system will then select and play files
randomly. This continues until you
deactivate folder random by pressing
and holding the RDM button again,
or by selecting a different folder with
the FOLDER bar.
Each time you press and release the
RDM button, the mode changes
from folder random play to random
play (within a disc random play),
then to normal play.
Pressing either side of the SEEK/
SKIP bar also turns off the scan
feature.
This feature,
when activated, samples the first file
of each folder on the disc. To
activate folder scan, press the SCAN
button twice. You will see
‘‘ SCAN’’ in the display.
Pressing either side of the SEEK/
SKIP bar, selecting a different folder
with the TUNE/FOLDER bar, or
pressing the SCAN button, also turns
off the folder scan.
Each time you press and release the
SCAN button, the mode changes
from file scan to folder scan, then to
normal play.
SCAN (TRACK/FILE SCAN)
FOLDER-RANDOM FOLDER SCAN
CD Player
Features
179
10/04/19 16:02:14 31SJC650_184
2011 Ridgeline
−
＋
You can also eject the disc when the
ignition switch is off.
Press the eject button ( ) to
remove the disc. If you eject the disc,
but do not remove it from the slot,
the system will automatically reload
the disc after 10 seconds. To begin
playing, press the CD button.
To play the radio when a disc is
playing, press the AM/FM button.
Press the CD button again to switch
back to the CD player.
If you turn the system off while a
disc is playing, either with the PWR
button or by turning off the ignition
switch, the disc will stay in the drive.
When you turn the system back on,
the disc will begin playing where it
left off.
An optional six disc CD changer is
available for your vehicle from your
dealer.
This disc changer uses the same
controls used for the in-dash CD
player/changer and the radio.
Load the desired CDs into the
magazine, and load the magazine
into the changer according to the
instructions that came with the unit.
To select the CD changer, press the
AUX button. The disc and track
numbers will be displayed. To select
a different disc, use the preset 5
(DISC ) side for a previous disc or
the preset 6 (DISC ) side to select
the next disc in sequence.
If you select an empty slot in the
magazine, the changer will search
for the next available CD to load and
play.
For information on how to handle
and protect compact discs, see page
.198
To Stop Playing a Disc
Operating the Optional CD
Changer
Protecting Discs
CD Player
180
10/04/19 16:02:23 31SJC650_185
2011 Ridgeline
CONTINUED
CD Changer (Models without navigation system)
Features
181
AM/FM
BUTTON
PRESET BARS
SCAN
BUTTON
RT model
TUNE/FOLDER BAR
CD SLOT
CD BUTTON
SEEK/SKIP BAR
DISPLAY
BUTTON
REPEAT
BUTTON
CD/AUX BUTTON
TUNE/FOLDER BAR
RANDOM BUTTON
DISPLAY
BUTTON
REPEAT
BUTTON
AM/FM
BUTTON
LOAD BUTTON LOAD BUTTON
PWR BUTTON
SCAN
BUTTON
PWR BUTTON
EJECT BUTTON
EJECT BUTTON
RANDOM BUTTON
SEEK/SKIP BAR PRESET BARS
RTL and Canadian EX-L models without navigation system
CD SLOT
10/04/19 16:02:32 31SJC650_186
2011 Ridgeline
Your vehicle’s in-dash disc changer
holdsuptosixdiscs.
To load or play discs, the ignition
switch must be in the ACCESSORY
(I) or ON (II) position.
You operate the disc changer with
the same controls used for the radio.
To select the disc changer, press the
CD or CD/AUX button. You will see
‘‘CD’’ in the display. The disc and
track numbers, and the elapsed time
areshowninthedisplay.Youcan
also select the displayed information
with the DISP button (see page ).
The system will continuously play a
disc until you change modes.
When ‘‘LOAD’’ appears again on
the display, insert the next CD into
the CD slot.
Do not try to insert a disc until
‘‘LOAD’’ appears. You could
damage the audio unit.
Repeat this until all six positions
are loaded. The system will then
begin playing the last CD loaded.
Insert a CD into the CD slot.
Insert it only about halfway; the
drive will pull it in the rest of the
way. You will see ‘‘BUSY’’ in the
display. The CD load indicator
turns red and blinks as the CD is
loaded.
You cannot load and play 3-inch
(8-cm)discsinthissystem.
On the upper right side of the
display, the disc number for an
empty position will begin blinking,
and the green CD load indicator
will come on.
To load only one CD, press and
release the LOAD button.
Press and hold the LOAD button
until you hear a beep and see
‘‘LOAD’’ in the display, then
release the button.
3.
4.
5.
1.
2.
183
On RTS, RTL, and Canadian EX-L
models without navigation system
CD Changer (Models without navigation system)
Loading Discs
To Play a Disc
182
Do not use discs with adhesive labels.
The label can curl up and cause the
disc to jam in the unit.
10/04/19 16:02:42 31SJC650_187
2011 Ridgeline
CONTINUED
If the text data has more than 17
characters, you will see the first 15
characters and the indicator in
the display. Press and hold the DISP
button until the next 16 characters
are shown. You can see up to 31
characters of the text data.
IfyoupressandholdtheDISP
button again, the display shows the
first 15 characters again.
If any letter is not available, it is
replaced with ‘‘ . ’’ (dot) in the display.
When the disc has no text data, you
will see ‘‘NO INFO’’ on the display.
You will also see some text data
under these conditions:
When a new folder, file, or track is
selected.
Each time you press the DISP button,
the display shows you the text data
on a disc, if the disc was recorded
with text data.
You can see the album, artist, and
track name in the display. If a disc is
recorded in MP3 or WMA, you can
see the folder and file name, and the
album, artist, and track tag.
With the folder name, you will see
the FOLDER indicator in the display.
The TRACK indicator is shown with
the file or track name.
When you press and release the
DISP button while a disc without text
data is playing, you will see ‘‘NO
INFO’’ on the display.
The display shows up to 16
characters of selected text data (the
folder name, file name, etc.).
If you are not loading CDs into all six
positions, press the LOAD button
again after the last CD has loaded.
The system will begin playing the
last CD loaded.
If you stop loading CDs before all six
positions are filled, the system will
wait for 10 seconds, then stop the
load operation and begin playing the
last CD loaded.
CD Changer (Models without navigation system)
Text Data Display Function
Features
183
10/04/19 16:02:51 31SJC650_188
2011 Ridgeline
− Each time you press and
releasethe sideoftheSEEK/
SKIP bar, the player skips forward to
the beginning of the next track (file
in MP3 or WMA mode). Press and
release the side, to skip
backward to the beginning of the
current track. Press it again to skip
to the beginning of the previous
track.
To move rapidly within a track or file,
press and hold either side ( or
) of the SEEK/SKIP bar.
Use the SEEK/SKIP bar while a disc
is playing to select passages and
change tracks (files in MP3 or WMA
mode).
In MP3 or WMA mode, use the
TUNE/FOLDER bar to select
folders in the disc and use either
side of the SEEK/SKIP bar to
change files.
To select a different disc, use the
appropriate preset buttons (1
through 6). If you select an empty
position, the system will go into the
loading sequence (see page ).
When you insert a disc, and the
system begins to play.
When you change the audio mode
to play a disc with text data or in
MP3 or WMA.
When playing a CD-DA with text
data, the album and track name are
showninthedisplay.Withadiscin
MP3 or WMA, the display shows the
folder and file name.
When you turn on the audio system
next time, the system keeps your
selection with the DISP button.
182
CD Changer (Models without navigation system)
SKIP
To Change or Select Tracks/Files
184
10/04/19 16:02:59 31SJC650_189
2011 Ridgeline
−
−
−−
This feature
continuously replays the current disc.
To activate disc repeat, press and
release the RPT button repeatedly
until you see ‘‘ RPT’’ in the
display. Press and hold the RPT
button again to turn it off.
Each time you press and release the
RPT button, the mode changes from
file repeat to folder repeat, to disc
repeat then to normal playing.
This feature,
when activated, replays all the files
on the selected folder in the order
they are compressed in MP3 or
WMA. To activate folder repeat
mode, press and release the RPT
button repeatedly until you see
‘‘ RPT’’ in the display. The
system continuously replays the
current folder. Press and hold the
RPT button to turn it off. Pressing
the RDM button, or selecting a
different folder with the TUNE/
FOLDER bar also turns off the
repeat feature.
To continuously replay
a track (files in MP3 or WMA mode),
press and release the RPT button.
You will see ‘‘RPT’’ in the display.
Press and hold the RPT button for 2
seconds to turn it off.
To
select a different folder, press either
side of the TUNE/FOLDER bar.
Press the side of the bar to skip
to the next folder, and the side
of the bar to skip to the beginning of
the previous folder.
In MP3 or WMA mode
In MP3 or WMA mode
CONTINUED
CD Changer (Models without navigation system)
DISC REPEAT
FOLDER REPEAT
REPEAT (TRACK/FILE
REPEAT)FOLDER SELECTION
Features
185
10/04/19 16:03:07 31SJC650_190
2011 Ridgeline
−
−−
The SCAN function
samples all the tracks on the disc in
the order they are recorded on the
disc (all files in the current folder in
MP3 or WMA mode). To activate the
scan feature, press and release the
SCAN button. You will see ‘‘SCAN’’
in the display. You will get a 10
second sampling of each track/file in
the disc/folder. Press and hold the
SCAN button to get out of scan
mode and play the last track sampled.
This
feature, when activated, plays the
files within a current folder in
random order, rather than in the
order they are compressed in MP3
or WMA. To activate folder random
play, press and release the RDM
button repeatedly. You will see
‘‘ RDM’’ in the display. The
system will then select and play files
randomly. This continues until you
deactivate folder random play by
pressing and holding the RDM
button again, or you select a
different folder with the TUNE/
FOLDER bar.
This feature plays the
tracks within a disc (the files in MP3
or WMA mode) in random order. To
activate random play, press and
release the RDM button. In MP3 or
WMA mode, press the RDM button
repeatedly to select RDM (within a
disc random play). You will see
‘‘RDM’’ in the display. Press the
RDM button for 2 seconds to return
to normal play.
Each time you press and release the
RDM button, the mode changes
from folder random play, to within a
disc random play, then to normal
play.
In MP3 or WMA mode
SCAN
FOLDER RANDOM
RANDOM (Random within a
disc)
CD Changer (Models without navigation system)
186
10/04/19 16:03:11 31SJC650_191
2011 Ridgeline
−
−
When the first track in the last disc,
or the first file in the last main folder
in the last disc begins to play, the
disc scan mode will be canceled.
Pressing either side of the SEEK/
SKIP bar or selecting a different
folder with the TUNE/FOLDER bar
also turns off the scan feature.
Each time you press and release the
SCAN button, the mode changes
from scan, disc scan, then to normal
play.
Each time you press and release the
SCAN button, the mode changes
from file scan, folder scan, disc scan,
then to normal play.
This feature, when
activated, samples the first track in
each disc in order (the first file in
themainfolderoneachdiscinMP3
or WMA mode). To activate the disc
scan feature, press and release the
SCAN button repeatedly until
‘‘ SCAN’’ shows in the display.
The system will then play the first
track/file in the first main folder in
the first disc for about 10 seconds. If
you do nothing, the system will then
play the following first tracks/files
for 10 seconds each. When it plays a
track/file that you want to continue
listening to, press and hold the
SCAN button again.
This feature,
when activated, samples the first file
in each folder on the disc in the
order they are recorded. To activate
the folder scan feature, press and
release the SCAN button repeatedly.
Youwillsee‘‘ SCAN’’inthe
display. The system will then play
the first file in the main folders for
about 10 seconds. If you do nothing,
the system will then play the
following first files for 10 seconds
each. When it plays a file that you
want to continue listening to, press
and hold the SCAN button.
Pressing either side of the SEEK/
SKIP bar, or selecting a different
disc (using the preset buttons) or
folder (using the TUNE/FOLDER
bar) turns off the SCAN or F-SCAN
feature.
In MP3 or WMA mode
In MP3 or WMA mode
DISC SCAN
FOLDER SCAN
CD Changer (Models without navigation system)
Features
187
10/04/19 16:03:18 31SJC650_192
2011 Ridgeline
To remove the disc currently in play,
press the eject button ( ). When
a disc is removed from a slot, the
system automatically begins the load
sequence so you can load another
disc in that position. If you do not
remove the disc from the changer
within 10 seconds, the disc will
reload into the slot. Then the system
returns to the previous mode [AM,
FM, or XM (if equipped)].
To remove a different disc from the
changer,firstselectitwiththe
appropriate preset bar. When that
disc begins playing, press the eject
button. Continue pressing the eject
button to remove all the discs from
the changer.
Press the eject button ( ) to
remove the disc. If you eject the disc,
but do not remove it from the slot,
the system will automatically reload
the disc after 10 seconds. To begin
playing, press the CD or CD/AUX
button.
You can also eject the disc when the
ignition switch is off.
To play the radio when a disc is
playing, press the AM/FM or XM (if
equipped) button. Press the CD
(CD/AUX on models with XM
satellite radio) button again to switch
back to the CD changer.
If you turn the system off while a
disc is playing, either with the PWR
button or by turning off the ignition
switch, the disc will stay in the drive.
When you turn the system back on,
the disc will begin playing where it
left off.
For information on how to handle
and protect compact discs, see page
.
You can also eject discs when the
ignition switch is on or off:
To eject one disc, press and release
the eject button.
To eject all discs, press and hold the
eject button until the LOAD
indicator begins to blink.
198
Removing Discs from the In-dash
Disc Changer
To Stop Playing a Disc
Protecting Discs
CD Changer (Models without navigation system)
188
10/04/19 16:03:27 31SJC650_193
2011 Ridgeline
Your audio system has an in-dash
CD changer that holds up to six CDs,
providing several hours of
continuous entertainment. You
operate this CD changer with the
same controls used for the radio.
To load CDs or operate the CD
changer, the ignition switch must be
in the ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II)
position.
CONTINUED
On RTL and Canadian EX-L models with
navigation system
CD Changer (Models with navigation system)
To Play a Disc
Features
189
SEEK/SKIP BAR
DISPLAY BUTTONAM/FM BUTTON
REPEAT
BUTTON
SCAN
BUTTON
LOAD INDICATOR
LOAD BUTTON
RTL and Canadian EX-L models with navigation system
EJECT BUTTONCD SLOT
PRESET BARS RANDOM BUTTON
Do not use CDs with adhesive labels.
The label can curl up and cause the CD
to jam in the unit.
10/04/19 16:03:34 31SJC650_194
2011 Ridgeline
The CD changer is behind the
navigation system screen. To use the
CD changer, press the OPEN button
beside the screen. The screen folds
back, and the CD changer appears.
Be careful not to injure your fingers
when opening or closing the
navigation system screen.
Press and hold the LOAD button
next to the CD slot until the load
indicator above the slot turns from
amber to green.
To load only one CD, press and
release the LOAD button.
To return the screen to the upright
position, press the OPEN button
again. Do not use the folded screen
as a tray. If you put a cup, for
example, on the screen, the liquid
inside the cup may spill on the
screen when you go over a bump.
1.
CD Changer (Models with navigation system)
Loading Discs
190
LOAD BUTTON LOAD INDICATOR
CD SLOT
OPEN BUTTON
10/04/19 16:03:42 31SJC650_195
2011 Ridgeline
The indicators above the disc
buttons of the empty positions will
blink, and the green load indicator
above the CD slot comes on.
If you press the LOAD button while
a CD is playing, the system will stop
playing that CD and start the loading
sequence. It will then play the CD
just loaded.
Repeat this until all six positions
are loaded. The system will then
begin playing the first CD loaded.
If you stop loading CDs before all six
positions are filled, the system will
wait for 10 seconds, then stop the
load operation and begin playing the
last CD loaded.
You can also load a CD into an empty
position while a CD is playing by
pressing the appropriate disc button.
Select an empty disc button (the
indicator above the button is off),
and press the button. The system
will stop playing the current CD and
start the loading sequence. It will
then play the CD just loaded.
You cannot load and play 3-inch
(8-cm)discsinthissystem.
Do not try to insert a disc until
‘‘LOAD’’ appears. You could
damage the audio unit.
Insert a CD into the CD slot.
Insert it only about halfway; the
drive will pull it in the rest of the
way. You will see ‘‘BUSY’’ in the
display. The CD load indicator
turns amber and blinks as the CD
is loaded.
When ‘‘LOAD’’ appears again on
the display, insert the next CD into
the CD slot.
Each time you press the DISP button,
the display shows you the text data
on a disc, if the disc was recorded
with text data.
You can see the album, artist, and
track name in the display. If a disc is
recorded in MP3 or WMA, you can
see the folder and file name, and the
album, artist, and track tag.
With the folder name, you will see
the FOLD indicator in the display.
The TRACK indicator is shown with
the file or track name.
When you press and release the
DISP button while a disc without text
data is playing, you will see ‘‘NO
INFO’’ on the display.
2.
3.
4.
5.
CONTINUED
CD Changer (Models with navigation system)
Text Data Display Function
Features
191
10/04/19 16:03:52 31SJC650_196
2011 Ridgeline
−
＞
You will also see some text data
under these conditions:
When a new folder, file, or track is
selected.
When you change the audio mode
to play a disc with text data or in
MP3 or WMA.
When you insert a disc, and the
system begins to play.
When playing a CD-DA with text
data, the album and track name are
showninthedisplay.Withadiscin
MP3 or WMA, the display shows the
folder and file name.
When you turn on the audio system
next time, the system keeps your
selection with the DISP button.
You can use the SEEK/SKIP bar
while a disc is playing to select
passages and change tracks (files in
MP3/WMA mode).
Each time you press and
releasethe sideoftheSEEK/
SKIP bar, the player skips forward to
the beginning of the next track (file
in MP3 or WMA mode). Press and
release the side, to skip
backward to the beginning of the
current track. Press it again to skip
to the beginning of the previous
track.
To move rapidly within a track, press
andholdthe or SKIPbar.
The display shows up to 16
characters of selected text data (the
folder name, file name, etc.).
If the text data has more than 17
characters, you will see the first 15
characters and the indicator in
the display. Press and hold the DISP
button until the next 16 characters
are shown. You can see up to 31
characters of the text data.
IfyoupressandholdtheDISP
button again, the display shows the
first 15 characters again.
If any letter is not available, it is
replaced with ‘‘ . ’’ (dot) in the display.
When the disc has no text data, you
will see ‘‘NO INFO’’ on the display.
To Change or Select Tracks/Files
SKIP
CD Changer (Models with navigation system)
192
10/04/19 16:04:02 31SJC650_197
2011 Ridgeline
−
−−
−
−
Each time you press and release the
RPT button, the mode changes from
file repeat to folder repeat, to disc
repeat then to normal playing.
This feature plays the
tracks within a disc (the files in MP3
or WMA mode) in random order. To
activate random play, press and
release the RDM button or touch the
TRACK RANDOM icon on the
screen. In MP3 or WMA mode, press
the RDM button repeatedly to select
RDM (within a disc random play).
You will see ‘‘RDM’’ in the display.
Press the RDM button or touch the
TRACK RANDOM icon to return to
normal play.
This feature,
when activated, replays all the files
on the selected folder in the order
they are compressed in MP3 or
WMA. To activate folder repeat
mode, press and release the RPT
button repeatedly until you see
‘‘F-RPT’’ in the display. The system
continuously replays the current
folder.PressandholdtheRPT
button to turn it off. Pressing the
RDM button, or selecting a different
folder with the TUNE bar also turns
off the repeat feature.
To
select a different folder, press either
side of the TUNE bar. Press the
side to skip to the next folder,
andpressthe sidetoskiptothe
beginning of the previous folder.
To continuously replay
a track (file in MP3 or WMA mode),
press and release the RPT button or
touch the TRACK REPEAT icon on
the screen. You will see ‘‘RPT’’ in the
display. Press and hold the RPT
button, or touch the TRACK
REPEAT icon again to turn it off. This feature
continuously replays the current disc.
To activate disc repeat, press and
release the RPT button repeatedly
until you see ‘‘D-RPT’’ in the display,
or touch the DISC REPEAT icon on
thescreen.PressandholdtheRPT
button, or touch the DISC REPEAT
icon again to turn it off.
In MP3 or WMA mode In MP3 or WMA mode
CONTINUED
CD Changer (Models with navigation system)
RANDOM (Random within a
disc)
FOLDER REPEATFOLDER SELECTION
REPEAT (TRACK/FILE
REPEAT)
DISC REPEAT
Features
193
10/04/19 16:04:09 31SJC650_198
2011 Ridgeline
−−
−
This feature, when
activated, samples the first file in
each folder on the disc in the order
they are recorded. To activate the
folder scan feature, press and
release the SCAN button repeatedly.
You will see ‘‘F-SCAN’’ in the display.
The system will then play the first
file in the main folders for about 10
seconds. If you do nothing, the
system will then play the first file in
each folder for 10 seconds. When it
plays a file that you want to continue
listening to, press and hold the
SCAN button.
Pressing either side of the SEEK/
SKIP bar, or selecting a different
disc (using the preset buttons) or
folder (using the TUNE bar) turns
off the SCAN or F-SCAN feature.
This
feature, when activated, plays the
files within a current folder in
random order, rather than in the
order they are compressed in MP3
or WMA. To activate folder random
play, press and release the RDM
button repeatedly. You will see
‘‘F-RDM’’ in the display. The system
will then select and play files
randomly. This continues until you
deactivate folder random play by
pressing and holding the RDM
button again, or you select a
different folder with the TUNE bar.
Each time you press and release the
RDM button, the mode changes
from folder random play, to within a
disc random play, then to normal
play.
The SCAN function
samples all the tracks on the disc in
the order they are recorded on the
disc (all files in the selected folder in
MP3 or WMA mode). To activate the
scan feature, press and release the
SCAN button or touch the TRACK
SCAN icon on the screen. You will
see ‘‘SCAN’’ in the display. You will
get a 10 second sampling of each
track/file in the disc/folder. Press
andholdtheSCANbuttonortouch
the TRACK SCAN icon again to get
out of scan mode and play the last
track sampled.
In MP3 or WMA modeIn MP3 or WMA mode
CD Changer (Models with navigation system)
F-SCANFOLDER RANDOM
SCAN
194
10/04/19 16:04:15 31SJC650_199
2011 Ridgeline
−
CONTINUED
Each time you press and release the
SCAN button, the mode changes
from scan, disc scan, then to normal
play.
Each time you press and release the
SCAN button, the mode changes
from file scan, folder scan, disc scan,
then to normal play.
When the first track in the last disc,
or the first file in the last main folder
in the last disc begins to play, the
disc scan mode will be canceled.
Pressing either side of the SEEK/
SKIP bar or selecting a different
folder with the TUNE bar also turns
off the scan feature.
You can also select a track/file
directly from a track list on the audio
display. Touch the TRACK LIST
icon. The track list menu appears on
the audio display.
When playing a CD recorded with
text data, each track name is shown
on the audio display. With a disc
recorded in MP3 or WMA, the folder
number and the location are also
displayed.
This feature, when
activated, samples the first track in
each disc in order (the first file in
themainfolderoneachdiscinMP3
or WMA mode). To activate the disc
scan feature, press and release the
SCAN button repeatedly until
‘‘D-SCAN’’ shows in the display, or
touch the DISC SCAN icon on the
screen. The system will then play the
first track/file in the first main
folder in the first disc for about 10
seconds. If you do nothing, the
system will then play the following
first track/file for 10 seconds each.
When it plays a track/file that you
want to continue listening to, press
andholdtheSCANbuttonortouch
the DISC SCAN icon again.
In MP3 or WMA mode
CD Changer (Models with navigation system)
Using a Track ListD-SCAN
Features
195
FOLDER ICON TRACK FILE ICON
FOLDER NUMBER
RETURN ICON
10/04/19 16:04:22 31SJC650_200
2011 Ridgeline
▲▼
To remove the disc that is currently
playing, press the eject button. You
will see ‘‘EJECT’’ in the display.
When you remove the disc from the
slot, the system begins the load
sequence so you can load another
disc in that position. If you do not
load another CD within 10 seconds,
the system selects the previous
mode (AM, FM1, FM2, or XM
Radio).
To remove the disc from the
changer,firstselectitbypressing
the appropriate preset bar or
corresponding number on the screen.
When that disc begins playing, press
the eject button.
To take the system out of CD mode,
press the AM/FM button or XM
button. Each time you press the
AM/FM button, the system changes
to the next mode (AM, FM1, or
FM
2). When you return to CD mode
by
pressing the CD/AUX button, play
will continue where it left off.
If you turn the system off while a CD
is playing, either with the PWR
button or the ignition switch, play
will continue at the same point when
youturnitbackon.
If the disc was not recorded with text
data, only the track number is shown.
To scroll through the display, touch
the or icononthesideof
thedisplay.Togobacktothe
previous display, touch the Return
icon on the display.
Select the desired track/file by
touching the icon on the display. The
selected icon will be highlighted in
blue. The system begins to play the
selected track/file. With a disc in
MP3 or WMA, touch the folder icon
on the upper left of the screen to
move to the parent folder. The
current folder is highlighted in blue.
Removing CDs from the In-dash
CD Changer
To Stop Playing a Disc
CD Changer (Models with navigation system)
196
10/04/19 16:04:29 31SJC650_201
2011 Ridgeline
When you press the eject button
while listening to the radio, or with
the audio system turned off, the disc
that was last selected is ejected.
After that disc is ejected, pressing
the eject button again will eject the
next disc in numerical order. By
doing this six times, you can remove
all the discs from the changer.
To eject one disc, press and release
the eject button.
You can also eject discs when the
ignition switch is on or off:
To eject all discs, press and hold the
eject button until the LOAD
indicator begins to blink.
For information on how to handle
and protect discs, see page .198
CD Changer (Models with navigation system)
Protecting Discs
Features
197
10/04/19 16:04:35 31SJC650_202
2011 Ridgeline
When a CD is not being played, store
it in its case to protect it from dust
and other contamination. To prevent
warpage, keep CDs out of direct
sunlight and extreme heat.
To clean a CD, use a clean soft cloth.
Wipe across the CD from the center
to the outside edge.
AnewCDmayberoughonthe
inner and outer edges. The small
plastic pieces causing this roughness
can flake off and fall on the re-
cording surface of the CD, causing
skipping or other problems. Remove
these pieces by rubbing the inner
and outer edges with the side of a
pencil or pen.
Handle a CD by its edges; never
touch either surface. Do not place
stabilizer rings or labels on the CD.
These, along with contamination
from fingerprints, liquids, and felt-tip
pens, can cause the CD to not play
properly or possibly jam in the drive.
Never try to insert foreign objects in
the CD player or the CD changer.
When using CD-R or CD-RW discs,
use only high quality CDs labeled
for audio use.
When recording a CD-R or
CD-RW, the recording must be
closedforittobeusedbythe
system.
Play only standard round CDs.
Odd-shaped CDs may jam in the
driveorcauseotherproblems.
Handle your CDs properly to
prevent damage and skipping.
General Information Protecting CDs
Protecting Your CDs
198
10/04/19 16:04:44 31SJC650_203
2011 Ridgeline
The in-dash disc player/changer has
a sophisticated and delicate
mechanism. If you insert a damaged
disc as indicated in this section, it
maybecomestuckinsideand
damage the audio unit.
Examples of these discs are shown
to the right:
Bubbled, wrinkled, labeled, and excessively thick discs1.
CONTINUED
Additional Information on
Recommended Discs
Protecting Your CDs
Features
199
Using Printer Label KitBubbled/Wrinkled
With Plastic Ring
With Label/Sticker
Sealed
10/04/19 16:04:52 31SJC650_204
2011 Ridgeline
Small, irregular shaped discsDamaged discs Poor quality discs 4.2. 3.
Protecting Your CDs
200
3-inch (8-cm) CD Triangle Shape
Arrow ShapeCan Shape
(Only on models
with CD changer.)
WarpedChipped/
Cracked
Burrs
10/04/19 16:05:00 31SJC650_205
2011 Ridgeline
Discs with scratches, dirty discs
CD-R or CD-RW may not play due
to the recording conditions.
Scratches and fingerprints on the
discs may cause the sound to skip.
Recommended discs are printed
with the following logo.
Audio unit may not play the
following formats.
This audio unit cannot play a
Dual-
disc
.
5.
Protecting Your CDs
Features
201
Fingerprints, scratches, etc.
10/04/19 16:05:10 31SJC650_206
2011 Ridgeline
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
Thechartontherightexplainsthe
error messages you may see in the
display while playing a disc.
If you see an error message in the
display while playing a disc, press
the eject button. After ejecting the
disc, check it for damage or
deformation. If there is no damage,
insert the disc again.
For additional information on
damaged discs, see page .
Theaudiosystemwilltrytoplaythe
disc. If there is still a problem, the
error message will reappear. Press
the eject button, and pull out the disc.
Insert a different disc. If the new
disc plays, there is a problem with
the first disc. If the error message
cycle repeats and you cannot clear it,
take your vehicle to a dealer.
CauseError Message Solution
199
High Temperature
Track/File format not
supported
Mechanical Error
Servo Error
Disc Error
Will disappear when the temperature returns to
normal.
Current track will be skipped. The next
supported track or file plays automatically.
Press the EJECT button and pull out the disc(s).
Check the disc for serious damage, signs of
deformation, excessive scratches, and/or dirt
(see page 199). Insert the disc again. If the code
does not disappear, or the disc(s) cannot be
removed, consult your dealer. Do not try to
force the disc out the player.
Check the disc for serious damage, signs of
deformation, excessive scratches, and/or dirt
(see page 199).
On models without navigation system
On models with navigation system
1:
2:
CD Player/Changer Error Messages
202
HEAT ERROR
HOT
UNSUPPORTED
UNSUPPORT
BAD DISC
PLEASE CHECK
OWNER’S
MANUAL
PUSH EJECT
MECH ERROR
CHANGER ERROR
CHKDISCLOAD
BAD DISC
PLEASE CHECK
OWNER’S
MANUAL
CHECK DISC
DISC ERROR
1
2
1
2
1
2
10/04/19 16:05:17 31SJC650_207
2011 Ridgeline
＋
−
＋−
▲▼
Three controls for the audio system
are mounted in the steering wheel
hub. These let you control basic
functions without removing your
hand from the wheel.
If you are listening to the radio, use
the CH button to change stations.
Each time you press the top ( ) of
the button, the system goes to the
next preset station on the band you
are listening to. Press the bottom
( ) to go back to the previous
station.
To search up and down from the
current frequency and find a station
with a strong signal, press the top
( ) or bottom ( ) of the button for
1 second.
The VOL button adjusts the volume
up ( ) or down ( ). Press the top
or bottom of the button, hold it until
the desired volume is reached, then
release it.
The MODE button changes the
mode. Pressing the button
repeatedly selects FM1, FM2, AM,
XM1, XM2 (if equipped), CD (if a
disc is loaded), or AUX-Audio.
CONTINUED
On RTS, RTL and Canadian EX-L
models
Remote Audio Controls
Features
203
MODE BUTTON
CH BUTTONVOL BUTTON
10/04/19 16:05:24 31SJC650_208
2011 Ridgeline
＋
−
＋
−
＋
−
＋
−
＋
−
If you are playing a disc, the system
skips to the beginning of the next
track each time you press the top
( ) of the CH button. Press the
bottom ( ) to return to the
beginning of the current track. Press
it again to return to the previous
track. You will see the disc and track
numbers in the upper display.
To go to the next disc, press the top
( ) of the button for 1 second.
Press the bottom ( ) for 1 second
to go back to the previous disc.
When you play an MP3/WMA disc,
press the top ( ) of the button for 1
second to go to the next folder. Press
the bottom ( ) for 1 second to go
back to the previous folder.
If you are listening to XM Radio, use
the CH button to change channels.
Each time you press the top ( ) of
the button, the system goes to the
next preset channel. Press the
bottom( )togobacktothe
previous preset channel.
To go to the next channel of the
category you are listening to, press
the top ( ) of the button for 1
second. Press the bottom ( ) for 1
second to go back to the previous
channel.
On models without navigation system
Remote Audio Controls
204
10/04/19 16:05:29 31SJC650_209
2011 Ridgeline
The auxiliary input jack is on the tray
above the glove box. The system will
accept auxiliary input from standard
audio accessories.
When the appropriate audio unit is
connected to the auxiliary input jack,
press the CD/AUX or AUX button to
select the unit.
Except RT and Canadian DX models
Auxiliary Input Jack
Features
205
AUXILIARY
INPUT JACK
10/04/19 16:05:33 31SJC650_210
2011 Ridgeline
Your vehicle’s audio system will
disable itself if it is disconnected
from electrical power for any reason.
To make it work again, you must
enter a specific code with the preset
bars. Because there are hundreds of
number combinations possible from
the five digits, making the system
work without knowing the exact
code is nearly impossible.
If you lose the card, you must obtain
the code number from your dealer.
To do this, you will need the audio
system’s serial number.
You should have received a radio
code card that lists your audio
system’s code and serial numbers. It
is best to store this card in a safe
place at home. In addition, you
should write the audio system’s
serial number in this owner’s manual.
If your vehicle’s battery is
disconnected or goes dead, or the
radio fuse is removed, the audio
system will disable itself. If this
happens, you will see
‘‘ENTER CODE’’ in the frequency
display the next time you turn on the
system. Use the preset bars to enter
the code. The code is located on the
radio code card included in your
owner’s manual kit. When it is
entered correctly, the radio will start
playing.
If you make a mistake entering the
code, do not start over; complete the
sequence, then enter the correct
code. You have ten tries to enter the
correct code. If you are unsuccessful
in ten attempts, you must then leave
the system on for 1 hour before
trying again.
Radio Theft Protection
206
10/04/19 16:05:38 31SJC650_211
2011 Ridgeline
Press and hold the H (Preset 1) side
of the bar until the hour advances to
the desired time. Press and hold the
M (Preset 2) side of the bar until the
minutes advance to the desired time.
To set the time, press the CLOCK
button until you hear a beep. The
displayed time begins to blink.
If your vehicle’s battery is
disconnected or goes dead, you may
need to set the clock. You can quickly set the time to the
nearest hour. If the displayed time is
before the half hour, pressing the
clock set button until you hear a
beep, then pressing the R (Preset 3)
side of the bar sets the clock back to
the previous hour.
If the displayed time is after the half
hour, the clock sets forward to the
beginning of the next hour.
Press the clock set button again to
enter the set time.
For example:
The navigation system receives
signals from the global positioning
system (GPS), and the displayed
time is updated automatically by the
GPS. Refer to the navigation system
manual for how to adjust the time.
1:06 will reset to 1:00
1:52 will reset to 2:00
On models with navigation system
On models without navigation system
Setting the Clock
Features
207
PRESET BARS
CLOCK BUTTON
CLOCK BUTTON
Model without XM satellite
radio is shown.
RT, Canadian DX, and VP models
PRESET BARS
RTS, RTL, and Canadian EX-L models without navigation system
10/04/19 16:05:47 31SJC650_212
2011 Ridgeline
If equipped
The security system helps to protect
your vehicle and valuables from theft.
The horn sounds and a combination
of headlights, parking lights, license
plate lights, and taillights flash if
someone attempts to break into your
vehicleorremovetheradio.This
alarm continues for 2 minutes, then
the system resets. To reset an
activated system before the 2
minutes have elapsed, unlock the
driver’s door with the key or the
remote transmitter. Once the security system is set,
opening any door (without using the
key or the remote transmitter), the
hood,ortheIn-BedTrunk,willcause
it to alarm. It also alarms if the radio
and navigation components are
removed from the dashboard or the
wiring is cut.
The security system automatically
sets 15 seconds after you lock the
doors, hood, and the In-Bed Trunk.
For the system to activate, you must
lock the doors from the outside with
the key, driver’s lock tab, door lock
switch, or remote transmitter. The
security system indicator on the
instrument panel starts blinking
immediately to show you the system
is setting itself.
Security System
208
SECURITY SYSTEM INDICATOR
10/04/19 16:05:52 31SJC650_213
2011 Ridgeline
The security system will not set if
the hood, In-Bed Trunk, or any door
is not fully closed. If the system will
not set, check the door and tailgate
open monitor and In-Bed Trunk open
indicator on the instrument panel
(see pages and ) to see if the
doors and In-Bed Trunk are fully
closed. Since it is not part of the
monitor display, manually check the
hood.
Use the remote transmitter
to quickly check that the hood,
In-Bed Trunk, and all doors are
closed. Push the lock button twice
within 5 seconds. There should be an
audible confirmation beep.
Do not attempt to alter this system
or add other devices to it.
11 75
Security System
Features
209
NOTE:
10/04/19 16:05:56 31SJC650_214
2011 Ridgeline
Cruise control allows you to maintain
asetspeedabove25mph(40km/h)
without keeping your foot on the
accelerator pedal. It should be used
for cruising on straight, open
highways. It is not recommended for
city driving, winding roads, slippery
roads, heavy rain, or bad weather.
Push in the CRUISE button on the
steering wheel. The CRUISE
MAIN indicator on the instrument
panel comes on.
Press and release the SET/
DECELbuttononthesteering
wheel. The CRUISE CONTROL
indicator on the instrument panel
comes on to show the system is
now activated.
Accelerate to the desired cruising
speedabove25mph(40km/h).
Thecruisecontrolsystemcanbe
lefton,evenwhenitisnotinuse.
1.
2.
3.Using Cruise Control
Cruise Control
210
CRUISE BUTTON
CANCEL
BUTTON
SET/DECEL BUTTON
RES/ACCEL
BUTTON
Improper use of the cruise
control can lead to a crash.
Use the cruise control only
when traveling on open
highways in good weather.
10/04/19 16:06:03 31SJC650_215
2011 Ridgeline
You can increase the set cruising
speed in any of these ways:
You can decrease the set cruising
speed in any of these ways:
Press and hold the RES/ACCEL
button. When you reach the
desired cruising speed, release the
button.
Push on the accelerator pedal.
Accelerate to the desired cruising
speed, then press the SET/
DECEL button.
Cruise control may not hold the set
speed when you are going up and
down hills. If your vehicle speed
increases going down a hill, use the
brakes to slow down. This will cancel
thecruisecontrol.Toresumetheset
speed, press the RES/ACCEL button.
The CRUISE CONTROL indicator
on the instrument panel will come
back on.
To increase the speed in very
small amounts, tap the RES/
ACCEL button. Each time you do
this, your vehicle will speed up
about 1 mph (1.6 km/h).
If you need to decrease your
speed quickly, use the brakes as you
normally would.
Tap the brake pedal lightly with
your foot. The CRUISE
CONTROL indicator on the
instrument panel will go out.
When the vehicle slows to the
desired speed, press the SET/
DECEL button.
Press and hold the SET/DECEL
button. Release the button when
you reach the desired speed.
To slow down in very small
amounts, tap the SET/DECEL
button. Each time you do this,
your vehicle will slow down about
1 mph (1.6 km/h).
CONTINUED
Changing the Set Speed
Cruise Control
Features
211
NOTE:
10/04/19 16:06:12 31SJC650_216
2011 Ridgeline
Tap the brake pedal.
Push the CANCEL button on the
steering wheel.
Resting your foot on the brake pedal
causes cruise control to cancel.
You can cancel cruise control in any
of these ways:
Push the CRUISE button on the
steering wheel.
When you push the CANCEL button
or tap the brake pedal, the system
remembers the previously set speed.
To return to that speed, accelerate to
above25mph(40km/h),thenpress
and release the RES/ACCEL button.
The CRUISE CONTROL indicator
comes on. The vehicle accelerates to
thesamespeedasbefore.
Pressing the CRUISE button turns
the system completely off and erases
the previous cruising speed.
Even with cruise control turned on,
you can still use the accelerator
pedal to speed up for passing. After
completing the pass, take your foot
off the accelerator pedal. The vehicle
will return to the set cruising speed.
Resuming the Set SpeedCanceling Cruise Control
Cruise Control
212
CRUISE BUTTON
CANCEL BUTTON
10/04/19 16:06:20 31SJC650_217
2011 Ridgeline
The direction and center position
icons come on when you turn the
ignition switch to the ON (II)
position. The system then begins to
check the vehicle direction and
illuminates the appropriate icon(s).
The compass can be affected by
driving near power lines or stations,
across bridges, through tunnels,
over railroad crossings, past large
vehicles, or driving near large
objects that cause magnetic
interference. It can also be affected
by accessories such as antennas and
roof racks that are mounted by
magnets.
Your vehicle has a compass in the
rearview mirror. The compass
indicates the vehicle direction with
illuminated letters: N (north), S
(south), W (west), and E (east). The
center blue icon in the compass is
always on. It serves as a reference
point.
To turn the compass on or off, press
the compass button on the back of
the rearview mirror.
If equipped
CONTINUED
Compass Function
Compass
Features
213
COMPASS
BUTTON
CENTER ICON
REARVIEW MIRROR
10/04/19 16:06:27 31SJC650_218
2011 Ridgeline
Drive the vehicle slowly in circles
at less than 5 mph (8 km/h) until
the center icon turns blue. This
icon also turns blue by continuing
to drive the vehicle under normal
driving conditions. When you see
an actual heading on the compass,
calibration is completed.
The compass may need to be
manually calibrated after exposure to
a strong magnetic field. If the
compassseemstocontinuallyshow
the wrong direction, do this.
Do this procedure in an open
area, away from buildings, power
lines, and other vehicles.
With the blue center icon
displayed,pressandholdthe
compass button for about 6
seconds. When the center icon
turns red, release the button.
The compass mirror has a light
sensor behind the right side of the
rearview mirror. Make sure the
extended sun visor or an accessory is
not covering the sensor.
2.
1.
Compass
Compass Calibration
214
NOTE:
10/04/19 16:06:33 31SJC650_219
2011 Ridgeline
CONTINUED
In most areas, there is a variation
between magnetic north and true
north. Zone selection is required so
the compass can compensate for this
variation. To check and select the
zone, do this:
Find the zone for your area on the
zone map (see page ). Each
zone number (1 through 15)
corresponds to a compass zone on
the table (see page ).
Press and hold the compass
button for about 3 seconds. When
all of the direction icons begin to
blink, release the button.
The blue direction icon(s) blink
and show the current zone.
If the zone is incorrect, press and
release the compass button
repeatedly to get to the correct
number.
The compass will return to the
normal display about 4 seconds
after you stop adjusting a zone
number.
2.
3.
4.1.
5.
216
216
Compass
Compass Zone Selection
Features
215
10/04/19 16:06:40 31SJC650_220
2011 Ridgeline
Compass
216
Zone Map
Compass Display for Each Zone
10/04/19 16:06:44 31SJC650_221
2011 Ridgeline
The HomeLink Universal
Transceiver built into your vehicle
canbeprogrammedtooperateupto
three remote controlled devices
around your home, such as garage
doors, lighting, or home security
systems.
Before programming your
HomeLink to operate a garage door
opener, confirm that the opener has
an external entrapment protection
system, such as an ‘‘electronic eye,’’
or other safety and reverse stop
features.
If your garage door was
manufactured before April 1, 1982,
you may not be able to program
HomeLink to operate it. These units
do not have safety features that
cause the motor to stop and reverse
it if an obstacle is detected during
closing, increasing the risk of injury.
Do not use HomeLink with any
garage door opener that lacks safety
stop and reverse features.
If equipped
CONTINUED
HomeLink Universal Transceiver
General Information
Features
217
10/04/19 16:06:49 31SJC650_222
2011 Ridgeline
×
−
Units manufactured between April 1,
1982 and January 1, 1993 may be
equipped with safety stop and
reverse features. If your unit does
not have an external entrapment
protection system, an easy test to
confirm the function and
performance of the safety stop and
reverse feature is to lay a 2 4
under the closing door. The door
should stop and reverse upon
contacting the piece of wood.
As an additional safety feature,
garage door openers manufactured
after January 1, 1993 are required to
have external entrapment protection
systems, such as an electronic eye,
which detect an object obstructing
the door.
Refer to the safety information that
came with your garage door opener
to test that the safety features are
functioning properly. If you do not
have this information, contact the
manufacturer of the equipment.
Before programming HomeLink to a
garage door or gate opener, make
sure that people and objects are out
ofthewayofthedevicetoprevent
potential injury or damage.
When programming a garage door
opener, park just outside the garage.
If you just
received your vehicle and have not
trained any of the buttons in
HomeLink before, you should erase
any previously learned codes before
training the first button. To do this,
press and hold the two outside
buttons on the HomeLink
transceiver for about 20 seconds,
until the red indicator flashes.
Release the buttons, then proceed to
step 1.
HomeLink Universal Transceiver
Important Safety Precautions Training HomeLink
Before you begin
218
10/04/19 16:06:55 31SJC650_223
2011 Ridgeline
If you are training the second or third buttons, go directly to step 1.
CONTINUED
HomeLink Universal Transceiver
Features
219
10/04/19 16:07:08 31SJC650_224
2011 Ridgeline
As required by the FCC:
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) This device
may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
This device complies with Industry
Canada Standard RSS-210.
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) this device may not cause
interference, and (2) this device must
accept any interference that may cause
undesired operation of the device.
HomeLink is a registered
trademark of Johnson Controls, Inc.
HomeLink Universal Transceiver
220
10/04/19 16:07:12 31SJC650_225
2011 Ridgeline
−
−
Bluetooth
handsfreelink.honda.
com
www.honda.ca,
HandsFreeLink (HFL)
allows you to place and receive
phone calls using voice commands,
without handling your cell phone.
Press and
release to give a command or answer
a call.
Press and
release to end a call, go back to the
previous command, or cancel the
command.
To use HFL, you need a Bluetooth-
compatible cell phone. For a list of
compatible phones, pairing
procedures, and special feature
capabilities:
In the U.S., visit
or call (888) 528-7876.
In Canada, visit or call
(888) 9-HONDA-9.
CONTINUED
On models with navigation system
HFL Buttons
Bluetooth
HandsFreeLink
Using HFL
HFL Talk button
HFL Back button
Features
221
HFL BACK BUTTON
NAVI VOICE
CONTROL
BUTTONS
HFL TALK
BUTTON
10/04/19 16:07:21 31SJC650_226
2011 Ridgeline
＃＃＃＃
Try to reduce all background
noise. If the microphone picks up
voices other than yours,
commands may be misinterpreted.
Many commands can be spoken
together. For example, you can
say ‘‘Call 123-456- ’’ or
‘‘Dial Peter.’’
Press and release the HFL Talk
button each time you want to
make a command. After the beep,
speak in a clear, natural tone.
When HFL is in use, navigation
voice commands cannot be
recognized.
To change the volume level of
HFL, use the audio system volume
knob or the steering wheel volume
controls.
Airorwindnoisefromthe
dashboard and side vents and all
windows may interfere with the
microphone. Adjust or close them
as necessary.
Bluetooth
HandsFreeLink
Voice Control Tips
222
MICROPHONE
10/04/19 16:07:27 31SJC650_227
2011 Ridgeline
CONTINUED
To hear general HFL information,
including help on pairing a phone
or setting up the system, say
‘‘Tutorial.’’
For help at any time, including a
list of available commands, say
‘‘Hands free help.’’
As an incoming call notification, you
will see the following display:
Some phones may send battery,
signal strength, and roaming status
information to HFL.
Bluetooth
HandsFreeLink
Help Features Information Display
Features
223
PHONE DIALING
HFL
MODE
BATTERY
LEVEL STATUS
ROAM STATUS
SIGNAL
STRENGTH
10/04/19 16:07:34 31SJC650_228
2011 Ridgeline
A notification that there is an
incoming call, or HFL is in use, will
appear on the navigation screen
when the audio system is on.
When there is an incoming call, or
HFL is in use, ‘‘HANDS FREE
LINK’’ will appear on the audio
display.
The Bluetooth icon will also
appear on the audio display when a
phone is linked.
Bluetooth
HandsFreeLink
224
BLUETOOTH INDICATOR
10/04/19 16:07:40 31SJC650_229
2011 Ridgeline
＃＃＃＃
CONTINUED
Bluetooth
HandsFreeLink
How to Use HFL
Features
225
‘‘Phone Setup’’
‘‘Call’’ or ‘‘Dial’’
‘‘Pair’’
‘‘Edit’’
‘‘Delete’’
‘‘Jim Smith’’
‘‘Set Pairing
Code’’
The ignition switch must be in the ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position.
‘‘List’’
‘‘Status’’
‘‘Next Phone’’
‘‘123-555- ’’
Press HFL
Talk button
Press and release the HFL Talk button each time you give a command.
(See page 228)Pair a phone to the system
(See page 229)
Edit the name of a paired phone
(See page 229)Delete a paired phone from the system
(See page 229)
Hear a list of all phones paired to the system
Hear which paired phone is currently linked to the system
(See page 230)
(See page 230)Search for another previously paired phone to link to
(See page 230)
Set the pairing code to a ‘‘Fixed’’ or ‘‘Random’’ number
(See page 231)Enter desired phone number
(See page 231)
Once a phonebook entry is stored, you can say a name here.
10/04/19 16:07:48 31SJC650_230
2011 Ridgeline
Bluetooth
HandsFreeLink
226
‘‘Redial’’
‘‘Transfer’’
‘‘Mute’’
‘‘Send’’
‘‘Phonebook’’
‘‘Store’’
‘‘Edit’’
‘‘Delete’’
‘‘Receive
Contact’’
‘‘List’’
Press HFL
Talk button
Press and release the HFL Talk button each time you give a command.
Redial the last number called
Transfer a call from HFL to your phone, or from your phone to HFL
(See page 232)
(See page 234)
Mute your voice to the person at the other end of the call
(See page 234)
Send numbers or names during a call
(See page 234)
Store a phonebook entry (See page 235)
Edit the number of an existing phonebook entry
(See page 235)
Delete a phonebook entry
(See page 236)
If your phone supports this function, use this to transfer contacts from
your phone to HFL (See page 236)
Hear a list of all stored phonebook entries
(See page 236)
10/04/19 16:07:55 31SJC650_231
2011 Ridgeline
＊
＊
CONTINUED
Bluetooth
HandsFreeLink
Features
227
‘‘Change Language’’
‘‘Hands Free Help’’
‘‘System
Set up’’
‘‘Tutorial’’
‘‘Clear’’
‘‘Auto Transfer’’
‘‘Call Notification’’
‘‘Security’’
‘‘Change Passcode’’
Press HFL
Talk button
Press and release the HFL Talk button each time you give a command.
: Canadian models
Apply a security passcode to the system that must be input at each key
cycle to access the system
(See page 241)
Set how you would like to be notified of an incoming call
Change your security passcode
(See page 242)
(See page 242)
Set calls to automatically transfer from your phone to HFL when you
enter the vehicle
(See page 242)
Clear the system of all paired phones, phonebook entries and security
passcode
(See page 243)
Change language from English to French
(See page 244)
Hear a tutorial for general rules on using the system
(See page 223)
Hear a list of available commands and additional information describing each command
(See page 223)
10/04/19 16:08:02 31SJC650_232
2011 Ridgeline
To use HFL, you need to pair your
Bluetooth-compatible cell phone to
the system.
This command group is available for
paired cell phones.
You cannot pair your phone while
the vehicle is moving.
Your phone must be in discovery
or search mode to pair. Refer to
your phone’s manual.
Up to six phones can be paired.
Your phone’s battery may drain
faster when it is paired to HFL.
If after three minutes your phone
is not ready to pair or a phone is
not found, the system will time out
andreturntoidle.
Press and release the HFL Talk
button. If you are pairing a phone
for the first time, HFL will give
you information about the pairing
process. If it is not the first phone
you are pairing, say ‘‘
’’ and say ‘‘ .’’
Follow the HFL prompts and put
your phone in discovery or search
mode. HFL will give you a 4-digit
pairing code and begin searching
foryourphone.
When your phone finds a
Bluetooth device, select HFL from
the options and enter the 4-digit
code from the previous step.
Follow the HFL prompts and
name the newly paired phone.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Phone Setup
Phone
setup Pair
Phone pairing tips
To pair a cell phone:
Bluetooth
HandsFreeLink
228
10/04/19 16:08:12 31SJC650_233
2011 Ridgeline
Say ‘‘ .’’
Say‘‘ ’’aftertheprompts.
If there is more than one phone
paired to the system, HFL will ask
you which phone’s name you want
to change. Follow the HFL
prompts and rename the phone.
Press and release the HFL Talk
button before a command.
Press and release the HFL Talk
button before a command.
Say ‘‘ .’’
Say‘‘ ’’aftertheprompts.
HFL will ask you which phone you
want to delete. Follow the HFL
prompts to continue with the
deletion.
Press and release the HFL Talk
button before a command.
HFL will read out all the paired
phone’s names.
Say‘‘ ’’aftertheprompts.
Say ‘‘ .’’
1.
2.
3. 3.
1.
2.
1.
2.
3.
CONTINUED
Phone setup
Edit
Phone setup
Delete
List
Phone setup
To hear the names of all paired
phones:
To rename a paired phone: To delete a paired phone:
Bluetooth
HandsFreeLink
Features
229
10/04/19 16:08:23 31SJC650_234
2011 Ridgeline
Press and release the HFL Talk
button before a command.
Say ‘‘ .’’
Say‘‘ ’’aftertheprompts.
HFL will tell you which phone is
linked to the system.
Press and release the HFL Talk
button before a command.
Say ‘‘ .’’
Say ‘‘ .’’
Press and release the HFL Talk
button before a command.
Say ‘‘ ’’ after the
prompts.
HFL disconnects the linked phone
and searches for another paired
phone.
Once another phone is found, it is
linked to the system. HFL will
inform you which phone is now
linked.
If no other phones are found or
paired, HFL will inform you that the
original phone is linked again.
Say ‘‘ ’’ after the
prompts.
If you want HFL to create a
random code each time you pair a
phone, say ‘‘ .’’ If you want
to choose your own 4-digit code to
be used each time, say ‘‘ ’’
and follow the HFL prompts.
1.
2.
3.
1.
2.
3.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Bluetooth
HandsFreeLink
To hear which paired phone is
currently linked:
To change from the currently linked
phone to another paired phone:
To change the pairing code setting:
Phone setup
Status
Phone setup
Phone setup
Next phone
Set pairing code
Random
Fixed
230
10/04/19 16:08:34 31SJC650_235
2011 Ridgeline
CONTINUED
You can make calls using any phone
number or a name in the HFL
phonebook. You can also redial the
last number called.
Press and release the HFL Talk
button before a command.
Say ‘‘ ’’ or ‘‘ .’’
Follow the HFL prompts and say
the phone number you want to dial.
Follow the HFL prompts to
confirm the number and say
‘‘ ’’ or ‘‘ .’’
Once connected, you will hear the
person you called through the audio
speakers.
Press and release the HFL Talk
button before a command.
Follow the HFL prompts to
confirm the name and make the
call.
Follow the HFL prompts and say
thenamestoredintheHFL
phonebook that you want to call.
Say ‘‘ ’’ or ‘‘ .’’
HFLusesaClass2Bluetooth,which
means, the maximum range between
yourphoneandvehicleis30feet(10
meters).
During a call, HFL allows you to talk
up to 30 minutes after you remove
the key from the ignition switch.
However, this may weaken the
vehicle’s battery.
1.
2.
3.
1.
2.
3.
Bluetooth
HandsFreeLink
Making a Call
Call Dial
Call Dial
Call Dial
To make a call using a phone
number:
Tomakeacallusinganameinthe
HFL phonebook:
Features
231
10/04/19 16:08:46 31SJC650_236
2011 Ridgeline
Select ‘‘
.’’
Press the INFO button, then select
‘‘ .’’
Select a phonebook you want to
choose a phone number from.
If the phonebook you select is PIN-
protected, you will need to enter the
PIN to access it. See page for
more information.
Press and release the HFL Talk
button and say ‘‘ .’’
1.
2.
3.
239
Bluetooth
HandsFreeLink
Search Imported
Phonebook
Cellular Phonebook
Redial
To redial the last number called by
HFL:
To make a call from an imported
phonebook:
232
10/04/19 16:08:53 31SJC650_237
2011 Ridgeline
Select the name. All the phone
numbers stored for that name will
be listed.
When you receive a call, an incoming
call notification (if activated) will
play and interrupt the audio system
if it is on.
Press the HFL Talk button to answer
the call, or the HFL Back button to
hang up.
If your phone has Call Waiting, press
and release the HFL Talk button to
put the original call on hold and
answer the incoming call.
To return to the original call, press
the HFL Talk button again. If you
don’t want to answer the incoming
call, disregard it and continue with
your original call. If you want to hang
up the original call and answer the
new call, press the HFL Back button.
To search for a specific name in the
phonebook, enter the keyword for
either the first or last name.
To display all names in the
phonebook, select the ‘‘ ’’ option.
If you choose ‘‘
,’’ the phone
number will be stored in HFL, so
that you can call it using HFL’s name
tag by voice.
Select the phone number, and
HFL begins dialing.
4.
5.
Bluetooth
HandsFreeLink
Receiving a Call
List
Store in
HandsFreeLink
Call Waiting
Features
233
10/04/19 16:09:02 31SJC650_238
2011 Ridgeline
＃
You can transfer a call from HFL to
your phone, or from your phone to
HFL.
Press and release the HFL Talk
button and say ‘‘ .’’
You can mute your voice to the
person you are talking to during a
call.
HFL allows you to send numbers or
names during a call. This is useful
when you call a menu-driven phone
system.To mute your voice during a call,
press and release the HFL Talk
button and say ‘‘ .’’
To unmute your voice, press and
release the HFL Talk button and say
‘‘ ’’ again.
Press and release the HFL Talk
button before a command.
To send a pound ( ), say
‘‘pound.’’ To send a star (*), say ‘‘star.’’
Follow the HFL prompts to send
the tones and continue the call.
Follow the HFL prompts and say
the name or number you want to
send.
Say ‘‘ .’’1.
2.
3.
Bluetooth
HandsFreeLink
Transferring a Call
Transfer
Muting a Call Send Numbers or Names During
aCall
Mute
Mute
Send
To send a name or number during a
call:
234
NOTE:
10/04/19 16:09:12 31SJC650_239
2011 Ridgeline
Youcanstoreupto50nameswith
their associated numbers in HFL.
The numbers you store can be not
only phone numbers but other types,
such as account numbers or
passwords, which can be sent during
a menu-driven call.
Press and release the HFL Talk
button before a command.
Say ‘‘ .’’
Say‘‘ ’’aftertheprompts.
Say a name you want to list as your
phonebook entry.
Say the number you want to store
for the name entry.
Follow the HFL prompts and say
‘‘ ’’ to store the entry.
Avoid using duplicate name
entries.
Avoid using ‘‘home’’ as a name
entry.
It is easier for HFL to recognize a
multisyllabic or longer name. For
example, use ‘‘Peter’’ instead of
‘‘Pete,’’ or ‘‘John Smith’’ instead of
‘‘John.’’
Press and release the HFL Talk
button before a command.
Say ‘‘ .’’
Say‘‘ ’’aftertheprompts.
Follow the HFL prompts and say
thenameentryyouwanttoedit.
When asked, say the new number
for that name.
Follow the HFL prompts to
complete the edit.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
CONTINUED
Bluetooth
HandsFreeLink
To store a phonebook entry:
To edit the number stored in a name:
Phonebook
Store
Enter
Phonebook
Edit
Phonebook
Features
235
NOTE:
10/04/19 16:09:26 31SJC650_240
2011 Ridgeline
Press and release the HFL Talk
button before a command.
Press and release the HFL Talk
button before a command.
Say ‘‘ .’’
Say‘‘ ’’aftertheprompts.
Say the name you want to delete
and follow the HFL prompts to
complete the deletion.
Say ‘‘ .’’
Say‘‘ ’’aftertheprompts.
HFL begins reading the names in
the order they were stored.
If you hear a name you want to call,
immediatelypresstheHFLTalk
button and say ‘‘ .’’
Press and release the HFL Talk
button before a command.
Follow the HFL prompts, select a
number from your cell phone, and
send it to HFL.
Say ‘‘ ’’ after the
prompts.
Say ‘‘ .’’
Follow the HFL prompts and
name the number, or say
‘‘ ’’ if it is not the number
you want to store.
Follow the HFL prompts if you
want to store another number.
1.
2.
3.
4.
1.
2.
3.
4.
1.
2.
3.
5.
Bluetooth
HandsFreeLink
Phonebook
Delete
Phonebook
List
Call
Receive contact
Phonebook
Discard
To delete a name: To list all names in the phonebook: To store a specific phone number
from your cell phone directly to the
HFL phonebook (available on some
phones):
236
10/04/19 16:09:39 31SJC650_241
2011 Ridgeline
(available on some phones)
handsfreelink.honda.
com
www.honda.ca,
If you select
from the Information screen menu,
you will see four HFL options.
In the U.S., visit
or call (888) 528-7876.
In Canada, visit or call
(888) 9-HONDA-9.
The entire phonebook data of the
cell phone that is linked to HFL can
be imported to the navigation system.
Select ‘‘
,’’ and HFL will begin
importing the phonebook. Select
‘‘ ’’ after the import is completed.
Once a phonebook has been
imported, you can search the phone
numbers by the person’s name.
Select ‘‘
,’’ and a list of imported
phonebooks will be displayed.
Select a phonebook from the list.
For a list of cell phones that are
compatible with this feature:
CONTINUED
Bluetooth
HandsFreeLink
Cellular Phonebook
Cellular Phonebook
Import Cellular
Phonebook
OK
Search Imported
Phonebook
Import Cellular Phonebook: Search Imported Phonebook:
Features
237
IMPORTED PHONEBOOK
IMPORTED DATE
PIN ICON
10/04/19 16:09:50 31SJC650_242
2011 Ridgeline
Select a person from the list. Up to
three category icons are displayed in
the left side of the list:
Select the person’s number you want
to call, and press the HFL Talk
button.
These indicate how many numbers
are stored for the name. If a name
has more than three category icons,
‘‘…’’ is displayed.
If the phonebook is PIN-protected,
you will need to enter the 4-digit PIN.
To search for a specific name in the
phonebook, enter the keyword for
either the first or last name.
To display all names in the
phonebook, select the ‘‘ ’’ option.
Bluetooth
HandsFreeLink
List
238
Preference
Home
Mobile
Work
Pager
Fax
Car
Voice
Other
10/04/19 16:10:02 31SJC650_243
2011 Ridgeline
Select ‘‘
,’’ and a list of imported
phonebooks will be displayed.
After making a selection, the
following screen will appear.
Select‘‘ ,’’then‘‘ ’’tocomplete
the deletion.
You can add, change, or remove a
PIN number from any phonebook.
You can delete any imported
phonebook.
Select a phonebook you want to
delete. If the phonebook is PIN-
protected, you will need to enter the
4-digit PIN number.
If you have selected a phonebook
without a PIN, you will see the above
display.
Enter the new 4-digit PIN. You will
have to re-enter the PIN for
confirmation.
CONTINUED
Bluetooth
HandsFreeLink
Delete Imported
Phonebook
Yes OK
PIN Number
Delete Imported Phonebook:
To add a PIN:
Features
239
10/04/19 16:10:12 31SJC650_244
2011 Ridgeline
Select ‘‘ ,’’ then select
‘‘ ’’ after you enter
the current PIN.
Enter the new 4-digit PIN number.
You will be asked to re-enter the PIN
for verification.
The display will change as shown
above.
Select the phonebook you want. The
display will change as shown above.
Enter the current PIN for this
phonebook.
Bluetooth
HandsFreeLink
To remove a PIN:To change the PIN to a new number:
PIN number
Do not use PIN
240
10/04/19 16:10:18 31SJC650_245
2011 Ridgeline
This command group allows you to
change or customize HFL basic
settings.
Press and release the HFL Talk
button before a command.
Say ‘‘ .’’
Once a passcode is set, you
will need to enter it to use HFL each
time you start the vehicle. If you
forget the code, your dealer will have
toresetitforyou,oryouwillhaveto
clear the entire system (see page
).
Follow the HFL prompts to
confirm the number.
Follow the HFL prompts and say
the 4-digit passcode you want to
set.
Say‘‘ ’’aftertheprompts.
1.
2.
3.
4.
243
CONTINUED
System Setup
System setup
Security
Bluetooth
HandsFreeLink
To set a 4-digit passcode to lock the
HFL system for security purposes:
Features
241
NOTE:
10/04/19 16:10:26 31SJC650_246
2011 Ridgeline
＊
＊
If you get into the vehicle while you
are on the phone, the call can be
automatically transferred to HFL
with the ignition switch in the
ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position.
Press and release the HFL Talk
button before a command.
Say ‘‘ .’’
Press and release the HFL Talk
button before a command.
Say ‘‘ .’’
Press and release the HFL Talk
button before a command.
Say ‘‘ .’’
Follow the HFL prompts to
confirm the number.
Follow the HFL prompts and say
the new 4-digit passcode.
Say ‘‘ ’’ after the
prompts.
Follow the HFL prompts and say
‘‘ ’’ or ‘‘ .’’ You
can also say ‘‘ ’’ for no audible
incoming call notification.
Say ‘‘ ’’ after the
prompts.
The default setting is a ring tone. HFL will let you know if auto
transfer is on or off, depending on
the previous setting. Follow the
HFL prompts to change the
setting.
Say ‘‘ ’’ after the
prompts.
2.
3.
4.
1.
2.
3.
1.
2.
3. 1.
:
System setup
System setup
System setupChange passcode
Ring tone Prompt
Off
Call notification
Auto transfer
Bluetooth
HandsFreeLink
To change your security passcode: To select either a ring tone or a
prompt as the incoming call
notification :
To activate or deactivate the auto
transfer function:
242
10/04/19 16:10:39 31SJC650_247
2011 Ridgeline
This operation clears the passcodes,
paired phones, all names in the HFL
phonebook, and all imported
phonebook data.
Press and release the HFL Talk
button before a command.
Say ‘‘ .’’
Say‘‘ ’’aftertheprompts.
Follow the HFL prompts to
continue to complete the clearing
procedure.
Press and release the HFL Talk
button before a command.
Say the language you want to
change to in that language.
Follow the HFL prompts.
You can also clear the system when
you have forgotten the passcode and
cannot access HFL. When HFL asks
you for the passcode, say ‘‘
.’’ Paired phones, all names in
the HFL phonebook and all imported
phonebook data will be lost.
1.
2.
3.
2.
1.
Canadian models only
System setup
Clear
Quick Language Selection
System
clear
Bluetooth
HandsFreeLink
To clear the system:
To quickly change the language:
Features
243
10/04/19 16:10:48 31SJC650_248
2011 Ridgeline
Press and release the HFL Talk
button before a command.
Say ‘‘ .’’
Follow the HFL prompts to
change the language to English or
French.
The
name and logos are
registered trademarks owned by
Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use of
such marks by Honda Motor Co.,
Ltd. is under license. Other
trademarks and trade names are
those of their respective owners.
If you have not named your paired
phone in the language you just
selected, HFL will ask you to name it
in the current language.
When French is your currently
selected language, you can give voice
commands in French.1.
2.
BluetoothCanadian models only
Bluetooth
HandsFreeLink
Change Language
Change language
Wireless Technology
To change the system language
between English and French:
Bluetooth
244
10/04/19 16:10:55 31SJC650_249
2011 Ridgeline
As required by the FCC:
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) This device
may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
This device complies with Industry
Canada Standard RSS-210.
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) this device may not cause
interference, and (2) this device must
accept any interference that may cause
undesired operation of the device.
Bluetooth
HandsFreeLink
Features
245
10/04/19 16:10:59 31SJC650_250
2011 Ridgeline
For the best picture, always keep the
rearview camera clean, and do not
cover the camera lens. To avoid
scratching the lens when you clean it,
use a moist, soft cloth.
Since the rearview camera display
area is limited, you should always
back up slowly and carefully, and
look behind you for obstacles.
Whenever you shift to reverse (R)
with the ignition switch in the ON
(II) position, the rearview is shown
on the navigation system screen.
On models with navigation system
Rearview Camera and Monitor
246
10/04/19 16:11:03 31SJC650_251
2011 Ridgeline
Before you begin driving your
vehicle, you should know what
gasoline to use and how to check the
levels of important fluids. You also
need to know how to properly store
luggage or packages. The
information in this section will help
you. If you plan to add any
accessories to your vehicle, please
read the information in this section
first.
.............................Break-in Period . 248
.................Fuel Recommendation . 248
.........Service Station Procedures . 249
....................................Refueling . 249
Opening and Closing the
.......................................Hood . 252
...................................Oil Check . 253
.............Engine Coolant Check . 253
...............................Fuel Economy . 254
...Accessories and Modifications . 257
.............................Carrying Cargo . 259
Before Driving
Before Driving
247
10/04/19 16:11:07 31SJC650_252
2011 Ridgeline
Help assure your vehicle’s future
reliability and performance by paying
extra attention to how you drive
during the first 600 miles (1,000 km).
During this period:
Avoid full-throttle starts and rapid
acceleration.
Do not change the oil until the
scheduled maintenance time.
Avoidhardbrakingforthefirst
200 miles (300 km).
Do not tow a trailer.
You should also follow these
recommendations with an
overhauled or exchanged engine, or
when the brakes are replaced.
Your vehicle is designed to operate
on unleaded gasoline with a pump
octane number of 87 or higher. Use
of a lower octane gasoline can cause
a persistent, heavy metallic rapping
noise that can lead to engine damage.
We recommended using a quality
gasoline containing detergent
additives that help prevent fuel
system and engine deposits.
In addition, in order to maintain good
performance, fuel economy, and
emissions control, we strongly
recommend, in areas where it is
available, the use of gasoline that
does NOT contain manganese-based
fuel additives such as MMT.
Use of gasoline with these additives
may adversely affect performance,
and cause the malfunction indicator
lamp on your instrument panel to
come on. If this happens, contact
your authorized dealer for service.
Some gasoline today is blended with
oxygenates such as ethanol or
MTBE. Your vehicle is designed to
operate on oxygenated gasoline
containing up to 10% ethanol by
volume and up to 15% MTBE by
volume. Do not use gasoline
containing methanol.
If you notice any undesirable
operating symptoms, try another
service station or switch to another
brand of gasoline.
Premium fuel is recommended when
towing in certain conditions (see
page ).
For further important fuel-related
information for your vehicle, or
information on gasoline that does not
contain MMT, visit Owner Link at
. In Canada, visit
for additional
information on gasoline.
303
owners.honda.com
www.honda.ca
Break-in Period Fuel Recommendation
Break-in Period, Fuel Recommendation
248
10/04/19 16:11:18 31SJC650_253
2011 Ridgeline
CONTINUED
Open the fuel fill door by pulling
onthehandletotheleftofthe
driver’s seat.
Park with the driver’s side closest
to the service station pump.
Stop filling the tank after the fuel
nozzle automatically clicks off. Do
not try to ‘‘top off’’ the tank. This
leaves some room in the fuel tank
for the fuel to expand with
temperature changes.
Remove the fuel fill cap slowly.
You may hear a hissing sound as
pressure inside the tank escapes.
The fuel fill cap is attached to the
fuel filler with a tether. Insert the
attachment on the fuel fill cap into
the slit on the fuel fill door.
If the fuel nozzle keeps clicking off
even though the tank is not full,
there may be a problem with your
vehicle’s fuel vapor recovery
system. The system helps keep
fuel vapor from going into the
atmosphere. Try filling at another
pump. If this does not fix the
problem, consult your dealer.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Refueling
Service Station Procedures
Before Driving
249
Pull
FUEL FILL CAP
ATTACHMENT
TETHER
Gasoline is highly flammable
and explosive. You can be
burned or seriously injured
when handling fuel.
Stop the engine, and keep
heat, sparks, and flame away.
Handle fuel only outdoors.
Wipe up spills immediately.
10/04/19 16:11:27 31SJC650_254
2011 Ridgeline
Screw the fuel fill cap back on
until it clicks at least once.
If you do not properly tighten the
cap, you will see a ‘‘CHECK FUEL
CAP’’ message on the information
display (see page ).
If the system still detects a leak in
the vehicle’s evaporative emissions
system, the malfunction indicator
lamp (MIL) comes on. If the fuel fill
cap was not already tightened, turn
the engine off, and check or
retighten the fuel fill cap until it
clicks at least once. The MIL should
go off after several days of normal
driving once the cap is tightened or
replaced. If the MIL does not go off,
have your vehicle inspected by a
dealer. For more information, see
page .
Your vehicle’s on board diagnostic
system will detect a loose or missing
fuel fill cap as an evaporative system
leak. The first time a leak is detected
a ‘‘TIGHTEN FUEL CAP’’ message
appears on the multi-information
display. Turn the engine off, and
confirm the fuel fill cap is installed. If
it is, loosen it, then retighten it until
it clicks at least once. The message
should go off after several days of
normal driving once you tighten or
replace the fuel fill cap. To scroll to
another message, press the INFO
button. The ‘‘TIGHTEN FUEL CAP’’
message will appear each time you
restart the engine until the system
turns the message off.
If you do not properly tighten the
cap, you will see a ‘‘TIGHTEN
FUEL CAP’’ message on the multi-
information display.
Push the fuel fill door closed until
it latches.
5.
6.
81
375
On models without navigation system
On models with navigation system
On models with navigation system
Tighten Fuel Cap Message
Service Station Procedures
250
10/04/19 16:11:34 31SJC650_255
2011 Ridgeline
Whenever filling a fuel container,
use an approved fuel container, and
place it on the ground. Do not fill the
fuel container in the vehicle,
including the pickup bed and the
In-Bed Trunk. Make sure to put the
fuel pump nozzle in the fuel filler of
the container securely and to handle
it properly.
Gasoline or fuel vapors are
extremely flammable and explosive.
Improperly handling fuel can cause
anexplosioninwhichyoucanbe
seriously injured.
Before placing the fuel container in
the vehicle, wipe up any spill
completely.
Your vehicle has a warning label for
filling a portable fuel container on
the left rear side of the pickup bed.
Filling a Portable Fuel Container
Service Station Procedures
Before Driving
251
Do not fill a portable fuel
container in the pickup bed.
Static electricity can ignite gas
vapors and you can be burned.
10/04/19 16:11:40 31SJC650_256
2011 Ridgeline
Put your fingers under the front
edge of the hood. The hood latch
handle is above the ‘‘H’’ logo. Pull
this handle until it releases the
hood, then lift the hood.
To close the hood, lift it up slightly to
remove the support rod from the
hole. Put the support rod back into
its holding clip. Lower the hood to
about a foot (30 cm) above the
fender, then let it drop. Make sure it
is securely latched.
If the hood latch handle moves
stiffly, or you can open the hood
without lifting the handle, the
mechanism should be cleaned and
lubricated.
Park the vehicle, and set the
parking brake. Pull the hood
release handle under the lower left
corner of the dashboard. The
hood will pop up slightly.
Holding the grip, pull the support
rod out of its clip. Insert the end
into the designated hole in the
hood marked by an arrow.
1. 2. 3.
Opening and Closing the Hood
Service Station Procedures
252
GRIP
HOOD RELEASE HANDLE
LATCH
SUPPORT ROD
10/04/19 16:11:48 31SJC650_257
2011 Ridgeline
Wait a few minutes after turning the
engine off before you check the oil.
Remove the dipstick (orange loop).
Wipe off the dipstick with a clean
cloth or paper towel.
Insert the dipstick all the way back
into its hole.
Remove the dipstick again, and
check the level. It should be
between the upper and lower
marks.
If it is near or below the lower mark,
see on page .
Look at the coolant level in the
radiator reserve tank. Make sure it is
between the MAX and MIN lines. If
it is below the MIN line, see
on page for
information on adding the proper
coolant.
Refer to
on page for information
about checking other items on your
vehicle.
1.
2.
3.
4.
326
329
323
Adding Engine Oil
Engine Coolant CheckOil Check
Adding
Engine Coolant
Owner’s Maintenance
Checks
Service Station Procedures
Before Driving
253
UPPER MARK
LOWER MARK
DIPSTICK
MIN
MAXRESERVE TANK
10/04/19 16:11:58 31SJC650_258
2011 Ridgeline
−
−
−
−
Fuel economy is not a fixed number.
It varies based on driving conditions,
driving habits, and vehicle condition.
Therefore, it is not possible for one
set of estimates to predict fuel
economy precisely for all drivers in
all environments.
Provides an estimated annual fuel
cost, based on 15,000 miles (20,000
km) per year multiplied by the cost
pergallon(basedonEPAfuelcost
data) divided by the combined fuel
economy.
For more information on fuel
economy ratings and factors that
affect fuel economy, visit
(Canada:
Visit
)
Represents urban
driving in light traffic. A range of
miles per gallon achieved is also
provided.
The EPA fuel economy estimates
shownintheexampletotheright
are a useful tool for comparison
when buying a vehicle. EPA
estimates include:
Represents a
mixture of rural and interstate
driving, in a warmed-up vehicle,
typical of longer trips in free-flowing
traffic. A range of miles per gallon
achieved is also provided.
Represents a combination of city and
highway driving. The scale
represents the range of combined
fuel economy for other vehicles in
the class.
www.
fueleconomy. gov
www.
vehicles.gc.ca
Actual Mileage and EPA Fuel
Economy Estimates Comparison.
Estimated Annual Fuel Cost
City MPG
Highway MPG
Combined Fuel Economy
Fuel Economy
254
Combined Fuel
Economy
(Sample U.S. EPA label shown)
Estimated Annual
Fuel Cost
City MPG Highway MPG
10/04/19 16:12:06 31SJC650_259
2011 Ridgeline
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
The following factors can lower your
vehicle’s fuel economy:
Aggressive driving (hard
acceleration and braking)
Excessive idling, accelerating and
braking in stop-and-go traffic
Cold engine operation (engines
aremoreefficientwhenwarmed
up)
Driving with a heavy load or the
air conditioner running
Improperly inflated tires
A properly maintained vehicle
maximizes fuel economy. Poor
maintenance can significantly reduce
fuel economy. Always maintain your
vehicle according to the maintenance
messages displayed on the
information display (see
on page ).
For example:
Rapid
acceleration, abrupt cornering,
and hard braking increase fuel
consumption.
If your vehicle has a
manual transmission, you can
boost your fuel economy by up
shifting as early as possible.
Aerodynamic drag has a big effect
on fuel economy at speeds above
45 mph (75 km/h). Reduce your
speed and you reduce the drag.
Trailers, car top carriers, roof
racks and bike racks are also big
contributors to increased drag.
Idling
results in 0 miles per gallon (0 kms
per liter).
An underinflated tire increases
‘‘rolling resistance,’’ which reduces
fuel economy.
It puts a heavier
load on the engine, increasing fuel
consumption.
In
particular, a build-up of snow or
mud on your vehicle’s underside
adds weight and rolling resistance.
Frequent cleaning helps your fuel
economy.
323
CONTINUED
Fuel Economy Factors
Improving Fuel Economy
Owner’s
Maintenance Checks
Use the recommended viscosity
motor oil, displaying the API
Certification Seal (see page
).
Drive moderately
Always drive in the highest gear
possible
Observe the speed limit
Avoid excessive idling
Maintain proper tire inflation
Avoid carrying excess weight in
your vehicle
Keep your vehicle clean
326
Vehicle Maintenance
Drive Efficiently
Fuel Economy
Before Driving
255
10/04/19 16:12:19 31SJC650_260
2011 Ridgeline
−
−
Fill the fuel tank until the nozzle automatically clicks off.
Reset trip counter to zero.
Record the total gallons (liters) needed to refill.
Follow one of the simple calculations above.
The A/C
puts an extra load on the engine
which makes it use more fuel. Use
the fresh-air ventilation when
possible.
Combine several short trips into
one. A warmed-up engine is more
fuel efficient than a cold one.
Direct calculation is the
recommended source of information
about your actual fuel economy.
Using frequency of fill-ups or taking
fuel gauge readings are NOT
accurate measures of fuel economy.
Fuel economy may improve over the
first several thousand miles
(kilometers).
1.
2.
3.
4.
Checking Your Fuel Economy
Measuring Techniques
Fuel Economy
Minimize the use of the air
conditioning system
Plan and combine trips
Calculating Fuel Economy
256
Miles driven
Gallons of
fuel
Miles per
Gallon
100
Kilometers
L per 100 km
Liter
10/04/19 16:12:29 31SJC650_261
2011 Ridgeline
Your dealer has Honda accessories
that allow you to personalize your
vehicle. These accessories have
been designed and approved for your
vehicle, and are covered by warranty.
Modifying your vehicle, or installing
some non-Honda accessories, can
make it unsafe. Before you make any
modifications or add any accessories,
be sure to read the following
information.
Although non-Honda accessories
may fit on your vehicle, they may not
meet factory specifications, and
could adversely affect your vehicle’s
handling, stability, and reliability.
If you install a truck cap, be sure it is
properly installed and does not
exceed your vehicle’s load limits (see
page ).
When properly installed, cellular
phones, alarms, two-way radios, and
low-powered audio systems should
not interfere with your vehicle’s
computer controlled systems, such
as your airbags, anti-lock brakes, and
tire pressure monitoring system.
Be sure electronic accessories do
not overload electrical circuits
(see page ) or interfere with
the proper operation of your
vehicle.
Make sure the accessory does not
obscure any lights, or interfere
with proper vehicle operation or
performance.
Before installing any accessory:
260
378
CONTINUED
Accessories
Your vehicle should not be used to
carry a slide-in camper.
Accessories and Modifications
Before Driving
257
Improper accessories or
modifications can affect your
vehicle’s handling, stability, and
performance, and cause a
crash in which you can be hurt
or killed.
Follow all instructions in this
owner’s manual regarding
accessories and modifications.
10/04/19 16:12:36 31SJC650_262
2011 Ridgeline
Removing parts from your vehicle,
or replacing components with
non-Honda components could
seriously affect your vehicle’s
handling, stability, and reliability.
Some examples are:
Lowering the vehicle with a non-
Honda suspension kit that
significantly reduces ground
clearance can allow the
undercarriage to hit speed bumps
or other raised objects, which
could cause the airbags to deploy.
Raising your vehicle with a
non-Honda suspension kit can
affect the handling, stability, and
reliability.
Before installing any electronic
accessory, have the installer
contact your dealer for assistance.
If possible, have your dealer
inspect the final installation.
Do not install accessories on the
side pillars or across the rear
windows. Accessories installed in
theseareasmayinterferewith
proper operation of the side
curtain airbags.
Non-Honda wheels, because they
are a universal design, can cause
excessive stress on suspension
components and will not be
compatible with the tire pressure
monitoring system (TPMS).
If you plan to modify your vehicle,
consult your dealer.
Modifying your steering wheel or
any other part of your vehicle’s
safety systems could make the
systems ineffective.
Larger or smaller wheels and tires
can interfere with the operation of
your vehicle’s anti-lock brakes and
other systems.
Modifying Your Vehicle
Accessories and Modifications
258
10/04/19 16:12:44 31SJC650_263
2011 Ridgeline
The pickup bed on your vehicle
allows you to carry heavy and large
cargo. You can also store items in
theIn-BedTrunkandonaroof-rack
(if equipped).
Your vehicle also has these
convenient storage areas inside:
Glove box
Front door and seat-back pockets
Fold-up rear seat with under-seat
storage
Console compartment
Pockets on the dashboard
However, carrying too much cargo,
or improperly storing it, can affect
your vehicle’s handling, stability,
stopping distance, and tires, and
make it unsafe. Before carrying any
type of cargo, be sure to read the
following pages.
Carrying Cargo
Before Driving
259
DASHBOARD
POCKETS
PICKUP BED
SEAT-BACK POCKETS
IN-BED TRUNK
GLOVE BOX
DOOR POCKET
CONSOLE COMPARTMENTS
FOLD-UP REAR SEAT WITH UNDER-SEAT STORAGE
10/04/19 16:12:52 31SJC650_264
2011 Ridgeline
The maximum load for your vehicle
is:
Steps for Determining Correct Load
Limit:
Locate the statement ‘‘The
combined weight of occupants and
cargo should never exceed XXX
kg or XXX lbs.’’ on your vehicle’s
placard.
Determine the combined weight
of the driver and passengers that
will be riding in your vehicle.
Subtract the combined weight of
the driver and passengers from
XXX kg or XXX lbs.
These figures include the total
weight of all occupants, cargo, and
accessories, and the tongue load if
you are towing a trailer.
See Tire And Loading Information
label attached to the driver’s
doorjamb.
Label Example
1.
2.
3.
On vehicles without moonroof
On vehicles with moonroof
Load Limits (Payload)
Carrying Cargo
260
1,520 lbs (690 kg)
1,470 lbs (670 kg)
Overloading or improper
loading can affect handling and
stability and cause a crash in
which you can be hurt or killed.
Follow all load limits and other
loading guidelines in this
manual.
10/04/19 16:13:02 31SJC650_265
2011 Ridgeline
−×
In addition, the total weight of the
vehicle, all occupants, accessories,
cargo, and trailer tongue load
must not exceed the Gross Vehicle
Weight Rating (GVWR) or the
Gross Axle Weight Rating
(GAWR). Both are on a label on
the driver’s doorjamb.
The resulting figure equals the
available amount of cargo and
luggage load capacity. For
example, if the ‘‘XXX’’ amount
equals 1,400 lbs. and there will be
five 150 lb. passengers in your
vehicle, the amount of available
cargo and luggage load capacity is
650 lbs.
(1,400 750 (5 150) = 650 lbs.)
Determine the combined weight
of luggage and cargo being loaded
on the vehicle. That weight may
not safely exceed the available
cargo and luggage load capacity
calculated in Step 4.
If your vehicle will be towing a
trailer, load from your trailer will
be transferred to your vehicle.
Consult this manual to determine
how this reduces the available
cargo and luggage load capacity of
your vehicle.
5.
6.
Example 1
Example 2
Example 3
4.
Carrying Cargo
Before Driving
261
Passenger Weight
(150 lbs x 2 = 300 lbs)
Passenger Weight
(150 lbs x 4 = 600 lbs)
Passenger Weight
(150 lbs x 5 = 750 lbs)
Max Load (1,520 lbs)
Max Load (1,520 lbs)
Max Load (1,520 lbs)
Cargo Weight
(1,220 lbs)
Cargo Weight
(920 lbs)
Cargo Weight
(770 lbs)
10/04/19 16:13:14 31SJC650_266
2011 Ridgeline
Store or secure all items that could
be thrown around and hurt
someone during a crash.
Distribute cargo evenly on the
floor in the In-Bed Trunk, placing
the heaviest items on the bottom
and as far forward as possible. Tie
down items that could be thrown
during a crash or sudden stop.
Make sure the In-Bed Trunk lid is
closed securely before driving.
Be sure the total weight of the
items in the In-Bed Trunk does not
exceed 300 lbs (136 kg).
If you use an accessory roof rack,
the roof rack weight limit may be
lower. Refer to the information that
came with your roof rack.
Be sure items placed on the floor
behind the front seats cannot roll
underneath and interfere with the
proper operation of the seats, the
sensors under the seats, or the
driver’s ability to operate the
pedals.
Keep the glove box closed while
driving. If it is open, a passenger
could injure their knees during a
crash or sudden stop.
Ifyoufoldtherearseatsup,tie
down items that could be thrown
about the vehicle during a crash or
sudden stop. Also, keep all cargo
below the bottom of the windows.
If it is higher, it could interfere
with the proper operation of the
side curtain airbags.
Distribute cargo evenly on the
floor of the cargo area with the
rear seats folded up, placing the
heaviest items on the bottom and
as far forward as possible. Tie
down items that could be thrown
about the vehicle during a crash or
sudden stop. If you carry any items on a roof
rack,besurethetotalweightof
the rack and the items does not
exceed 110 lbs (50 kg).
Carrying Items in the Passenger
Compartment
Carrying Cargo in the In-Bed
Trunk or on a Roof Rack
Carrying Cargo
262
10/04/19 16:13:22 31SJC650_267
2011 Ridgeline
Your vehicle can carry a large
amount of cargo in the pickup bed.
However, the pickup bed is not
intended for carrying passengers.
Peoplewhorideinthepickupbed
can be very seriously injured or
killed in a crash (see page ).
Make sure your cargo is properly
loaded and all items are secured so
they will not shift or fall out while
driving.
When loading and unloading cargo,
make sure all passengers or any
objects are clear of the tailgate
before opening or closing it. The
tailgate should be closed securely
before driving when it is not used
as the extended pickup bed.
The maximum allowable loading
weight on the pickup bed is 1,100
lbs (500 kg). Do not exceed the
load limit (see page ).
Distribute cargo evenly on the
pickup bed. Place the heaviest
items on the bottom and as far
forward as possible of the rear
axle. Tie down and secure all
items that could be thrown out of
the vehicle during a crash or
sudden stop.
If you stack items higher than the
bed sides, tailgate, or back window,
secure them with a net or cover.
This will reduce the risk of items
beingthrownoutofthepickup
bed during a crash or sudden stop.
When the tailgate is dropped open,
itcanbeusedasanextended
pickup bed. The maximum
allowable weight on the tailgate
while driving is 300 lbs (136 kg).
Exceeding this limit could damage
the tailgate.
Carrying heavy cargo in the
pickup bed will raise your vehicle’s
center of gravity. This can affect
handling and performance. Drive
more slowly and cautiously, and
allow extra time and distance for
braking.
8
260
CONTINUED
Carrying Cargo in the Pickup Bed
Carrying Cargo
Before Driving
263
Allowing passengers to ride in
the pickup bed or on the tailgate
can result in death or serious
injury in a crash.
Make sure all passengers ride
in a seat and wear a seat belt
properly.
10/04/19 16:13:31 31SJC650_268
2011 Ridgeline
You can also support motorcycles on
the pickup bed floor with the cleats.
The floor panel of the pickup bed is
designed to hold motorcycle tires. Be
sure to tighten motorcycles securely,
with an approved tie-down or
motorcycle strap, according to the
motorcycle maker’s instructions.
They are used to secure cargo on the
pickup bed and to install a cargo net
for securing items. Do not use any
other parts of the pickup bed to
secure cargo or nets.
When carrying motorcycles or any
other cargo, do not spill any oil or
fluid on the pickup bed. A spilled
liquid may damage the pickup bed.
Your vehicle has eight tie down
cleats on the pickup bed.
Tie Down Cleats
Carrying Cargo
264
TIE DOWN CLEAT
Exceeding load limits or
improperly loading cargo on the
vehicle can cause a crash in
which you can be seriously
injured or killed.
Load the cargo carefully before
starting to drive.
Never let passengers ride in the
pickup bed, in the In-Bed Trunk
space, or on the bed rails. This
could cause very serious
injuries or death. No one should
ride in any position on your
vehicle that is not equipped with
seats and seat belts.
10/04/19 16:13:38 31SJC650_269
2011 Ridgeline
The cargo net can be used to hold
lightweight items in the pickup bed.
Secure all items properly. The net
may not prevent heavy items from
beingthrownoutwardinacrashora
sudden stop.
The cargo cover can be used to
cover the cargo area on the pickup
bed.
Your vehicle’s pickup bed has a rust
resistant surface. To repair small
chips and scratches in the bed, a
repair kit is available from your
dealer. More extensive damage
should be repaired by your dealer.
To avoid problems with the bed
surface and the In-Bed Trunk lid, do
not use spray-in bed liner products.
Optional Cargo Net Optional Cargo Cover
Pickup Bed Repair
Carrying Cargo
Before Driving
265
10/04/19 16:13:43 31SJC650_270
2011 Ridgeline
266
10/04/19 16:13:45 31SJC650_271
2011 Ridgeline
This section gives you tips on
starting the engine under various
conditions, and how to operate the
automatic transmission. It also
includes important information on
parking your vehicle, the braking
system, the Variable Torque
Management
4-wheel drive
(VTM-4
) system, the vehicle
stability assist (VSA
), aka
Electronic Stability Control (ESC),
system, the tire pressure monitoring
system (TPMS), and facts you need
if you are planning to tow a trailer or
drive off-highway.
........................Driving Guidelines . 268
........................Preparing to Drive . 269
.......................Starting the Engine . 270
..............Automatic Transmission . 271
Variable Torque Management
...........4WD (VTM-4 ) System . 276
Tire Pressure Monitoring System
......................................(TPMS) . 278
...........................................Parking . 286
.............................Braking System . 288
...............Anti-lock Brakes (ABS) . 289
Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA
),
aka Electronic Stability Control
(ESC), System........................ 290
.................Towing Weight Limits . 293
..........Towing Weight Guidelines . 295
...........................Towing a Trailer . 296
Off-Highway Driving
..................................Guidelines . 306
Driving
Driving
267
10/04/19 16:13:48 31SJC650_272
2011 Ridgeline
Your vehicle has higher ground
clearance that allows you to travel
over bumps, obstacles, and rough
terrain. It also provides good
visibility so you can anticipate
problems earlier.
With heavy cargo on the pickup bed,
your vehicle has a higher center of
gravity. Drive slowly and cautiously,
and allow more time and distance for
braking. Loading heavy cargo could
affect your vehicle’s handling and
performance.
To prevent rollovers or loss of
control:
Take corners at slower speeds
than you would with a passenger
vehicle.
Avoid sharp turns and abrupt
maneuvers whenever possible.
Make sure the cargo is properly
loaded and all items are secured so
they will not shift while driving.
Do not modify your vehicle in any
way that would raise the center of
gravity.
Do not carry heavy cargo on the
roof.
Your vehicle allows you to carry
more cargo than a typical passenger
vehicle.
Because your vehicle rides higher
off the ground, it has a high center
of gravity that can cause it to roll
over if you make abrupt turns. Utility
vehicles have a significantly higher
roll over rate than other types of
vehicles.
See page for off-highway driving
guidelines.
306
Driving Guidelines
268
10/04/19 16:13:56 31SJC650_273
2011 Ridgeline
Youshoulddothefollowingchecks
and adjustments before you drive
your vehicle.
Make sure all windows, mirrors,
and outside lights are clean and
unobstructed. Remove frost, snow,
or ice.
Check that the hood is fully closed.
Check that the tailgate is fully
closed when it is not used as an
extended pickup bed.
Visually check the tires. If a tire
looks low, use a gauge to check its
pressure.
Check that any items you may be
carrying are stored properly or
fastened down securely.
Check the adjustment of the
inside and outside mirrors (see
page ).
Check the steering wheel
adjustment (see page ).
Make sure the doors and In-Bed
Trunk are securely closed and
locked.
Fasten your seat belt. Check that
your passengers have fastened
their seat belts (see page ).
Check the seat adjustment (see
pages and ).
When you start the engine, check
the gauges and indicators in the
instrument panel, and the
messages on the information
display or multi-information
display (depending on models)
(seepages,,,and
).
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
8.
7.
9.
10.
11.
121
133
99
16
61 76 77
90
119
Preparing to Drive
Driving
269
10/04/19 16:14:07 31SJC650_274
2011 Ridgeline
Apply the parking brake.
In cold weather, turn off all
electrical accessories to reduce
the drain on the battery.
Make sure the shift lever is in
Park. Press on the brake pedal.
Without touching the accelerator
pedal, turn the ignition key to the
START (III) position. Do not hold
the key in the START (III)
position for more than 15 seconds
at a time. If the engine does not
start right away, pause for at least
10 seconds before trying again.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Starting the Engine
270
The immobilizer system protects your
vehicle from theft. If an improperly
coded key (or other device) is used, the
engine’s fuel system is disabled. For
more information, see page .
The engine is harder to start in cold
weather. Also, the thinner air found at
altitudes above 8,000 feet (2,400
meters) adds to this problem.
101
10/04/19 16:14:13 31SJC650_275
2011 Ridgeline
These indicators on the instrument
panel show which position the shift
lever is in.
The ‘‘D’’ indicator comes on for a
few seconds when you turn the
ignition switch to the ON (II)
position. If it flashes while driving (in
any shift position), it indicates a
possible problem in the transmission.
If the malfunction indicator lamp
comes on along with the ‘‘D’’
indicator, there is a problem with the
automatic transmission control
system. Avoid rapid acceleration, and
have the transmission checked by
your dealer as soon as possible.
To shift from Park to any position,
pressfirmlyonthebrakepedal,and
pull the shift lever toward you. You
cannot shift out of Park when the
ignition switch is in the LOCK (0) or
ACCESSORY (I) position.
When the ‘‘D’’ indicator warns of a
possible problem with the
transmission, you will see a ‘‘CHECK
TRANSMISSION’’ message on the
multi-information display (see page
).91
CONTINUED
On models with navigation system
Shift Lever Position Indicators Shifting
Automatic Transmission
Driving
271
SHIFT LEVER
10/04/19 16:14:20 31SJC650_276
2011 Ridgeline
−−This position mechani-
cally locks the transmission. Use
Park whenever you are turning off or
starting the engine. To shift out of
Park, you must press on the brake
pedal and have your foot off the
accelerator pedal. Pull the shift lever
towards you, then move it out of
Park.
If you have done all of the above and
still cannot move the lever out of
Park, see on
page .
You must also pull the shift lever
towards you to shift into Park. To
avoid transmission damage, come to
a complete stop before shifting into
Park. The shift lever must be in Park
for you to remove the key from the
ignition switch.
Press the brake
pedal and pull the shift lever towards
you to shift from Park to reverse. To
shift from reverse to neutral, come
to a complete stop, and then shift.
Pull the shift lever towards you
before shifting into reverse from
neutral.
275
To shift from:
PtoR
RtoP
NtoR
Dto2
2to1
1to2
2toD
DtoN
NtoD
RtoN
Do this:
Press the brake pedal, and
pull the shift lever towards
you.
Pull the shift lever towards
you.
Move the shift lever.
Automatic Transmission
Park (P)
Shift Lock Release
Reverse (R)
272
10/04/19 16:14:26 31SJC650_277
2011 Ridgeline
−−
CONTINUED
Press the D3 switch on the end of
the shift lever to turn this mode on
or off; the D3 indicator comes on
whenever D3 is selected.
TheD3switchcanbeoperatedonly
when the ignition switch is in the ON
(II) position and the shift lever is in
the D position.
Use this position for
your normal driving. The
transmission automatically selects a
suitable gear (1 through 5) for your
speed and acceleration. You may
notice the transmission shifting up at
higher engine speeds when the
engine is cold. This helps the engine
warm up faster.
After you stop in D, 2, 1, N, or R
position with the ignition switch in
the ACCESSORY (I) position for an
extended period, you may not be
able to move the shift lever from
neutral to reverse or Park. In this
case, press the brake pedal, and turn
the ignition switch to the ON (II)
position, then shift out of neutral.
Use neutral if you
need to restart a stalled engine, or if
it is necessary to stop briefly with
the engine idling. Shift to the Park
position if you need to leave your
vehicle for any reason. Press on the
brake pedal when you are moving
the shift lever from neutral to
another gear.
Automatic Transmission
D3
Drive (D)Neutral (N)
Driving
273
D3 SWITCH
10/04/19 16:14:32 31SJC650_278
2011 Ridgeline
− To shift to second,
pull the shift lever towards you, then
shift to the lower gear. This position
locks the transmission in second
gear. It does not downshift to first
gear when you come to a stop.
Use second gear:
For more power when climbing.
To increase engine braking when
going down steep hills.
For starting out on a slippery
surface or in deep snow.
To help reduce wheel spin.
When driving downhill with a
trailer.
This will increase the
automatic transmission fluid
temperature and may cause
overheating.
Shifting out of the D position will
cancel D3, and cause the D3
indicator to go out. Selecting the D
position again will resume D3, and
the indicator will come on.
Turning the ignition switch to the
LOCK (0) position turns D3 off. To
use D3 when you restart the engine,
select the D position, and press the
D3 switch again.
TheD3indicatoralsocomesonfora
few seconds when you turn the
ignition switch to the ON (II)
position.
When D3 is on, the transmission
selects only the first three gears.
Use D3 for engine braking when
going down a steep hill.
Automatic Transmission
Second (2)
When towing a trailer on level roads
under normal driving conditions, do
not use D3.
274
D3 INDICATOR
10/04/19 16:14:42 31SJC650_279
2011 Ridgeline
− To shift from second to
first, pull the shift lever towards you,
then shift to the lower gear. This
position locks the transmission in
first gear. By upshifting and
downshifting through 1, 2, and D,
you can operate the transmission
much like a manual transmission
without a clutch pedal.
If you shift into first position when
the vehicle speed is above 28 mph
(45 km/h), the transmission shifts
into second gear first to avoid
sudden engine braking.
If you exceed the maximum speed
for the gear you are in, the engine
speed will enter into the tachometer’s
red zone. If this occurs, you may feel
the engine cut in and out. This is
caused by a limiter in the engine’s
computer controls. The engine will
run normally when you reduce the
rpm below the red zone.
This allows you to move the shift
lever out of Park if the normal
method of pushing on the brake
pedal and pulling the shift lever does
not work.
Set the parking brake.
Make sure the ignition switch is in
the LOCK (0) position.
Putaclothonthenotchofthe
shift lock release slot cover to
prevent scratches. Using a small
flat-tip screwdriver or a metal
fingernail file, carefully pry on the
notch of the cover to remove it.
1.
2.
3.
CONTINUED
First (1) Engine Speed Limiter Shift Lock Release
Automatic Transmission
Driving
275
10/04/19 16:14:50 31SJC650_280
2011 Ridgeline
Insert the built-in key into the shift
lock release slot.
Push down on the key while you
pull the shift lever towards you,
and move it out of Park to neutral.
Remove the key from the shift
lock release slot, then reinstall the
cover. Make sure the notch on the
cover is on the instrument panel
side. Press the brake pedal, and
restart the engine.
If you need to use the shift lock
release, it means your vehicle is
developing a problem. Have it
checked by your dealer.
Your vehicle is equipped with a
Variable Torque Management
4-wheel-drive system (VTM-4 )that
distributes engine torque to the
appropriate drive axle depending on
the available traction conditions. The
system is completely automatic,
always active, and does not require
any driver interaction.
6.4.
5.
Automatic Transmission, VTM-4 System
VTM-4 System
276
SHIFT LOCK RELEASE SLOT
COVER
VTM-4 LOCK BUTTON
10/04/19 16:14:57 31SJC650_281
2011 Ridgeline
Press the VTM-4 LOCK button.
The indicator in the button comes
on.
To get unstuck, apply light pressure
to the accelerator pedal. Do not spin
the front tires for more than a few
seconds. Because of the amount of
torque applied to the rear tires, they
should not spin. This is normal. If
you are not able to move the vehicle,
stop and reverse direction.
If you become stuck, you can
activatetheVTM-4bypressingthe
VTM-4 LOCK button while in first
(1), second (2), or reverse (R) gear
below18mph(30km/h).Thismode
overrides the auto system to send
maximum torque to the rear axle.
This mode is only intended for
intermittent use at low speed to free
your vehicle if it becomes stuck or
when you encounter a steep grade
with one wheel on a slippery surface.
Generally, you should first allow the
auto mode to operate to adjust for
the available traction conditions.
Turn the ignition switch to the
LOCK (0) position.
Move the shift lever to D.
Press the VTM-4 LOCK button.
do
any of the following:
The VTM-4 Lock will temporarily
disengage when the vehicle speed
exceeds 18 mph (30 km/h). The
indicator in the button will remain on.
The vehicle speed must be below
18 mph (30 km/h).
Move the shift lever to first (1),
second (2), or reverse (R) gear.
1.
2.
3.
VTM-4 System
To Engage the VTM-4 Lock:
To Disengage the VTM-4 Lock,
Driving
277
Do not use the VTM-4 LOCK button on
dry, paved roads. Driving on dry,
paved roads with VTM-4 Lock ON may
damage the rear differential when
making a turn. Strange noise and
vibration can also result.
Do not continuously spin the front tires
of your vehicle. Continuously spinning
the front tires can cause transmission
or rear differential damage.
10/04/19 16:15:07 31SJC650_282
2011 Ridgeline
When the low tire pressure indicator
is on, one or more of your tires is
significantly underinflated. You
should stop and check your tires as
soon as possible, and inflate them to
the proper pressure as indicated on
the vehicle’s tire information placard.
If you think you can safely drive a
short distance to a service station,
proceed slowly, and inflate the tire to
the recommended pressure shown
on the driver’s doorjamb.
If the tire is flat, or if the tire
pressure is too low to continue
driving, replace the tire with the
compact spare tire (see page ).
If you cannot make the low tire
pressure indicator go out after
inflating the tires to the specified
values, have your dealer check the
system as soon as possible.
Driving on a significantly under
inflated tire causes the tire to
overheat and can lead to tire failure.
Underinflation also reduces fuel
efficiency and tire tread life, and may
affect the vehicle’s handling and
stopping ability.
Becausetirepressurevariesby
temperature and other conditions,
the low tire pressure indicator may
come on unexpectedly.
Each tire has its own pressure
sensor (not including the spare tire).
If the air pressure of a tire becomes
significantly low, the sensor in that
tire immediately sends a signal that
causes the low tire pressure
indicator and the appropriate tire on
thetirepressuremonitortocomeon.
Your vehicle is equipped with a tire
pressure monitoring system (TPMS)
that turns on every time you start the
engine and monitors the pressure in
your tires while driving.
360
On models without navigation system
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
Low Tire Pressure
Indicator
278
10/04/19 16:15:14 31SJC650_283
2011 Ridgeline
This indicator comes on and stays on
if there is a problem with the tire
pressure monitoring system.
If this happens, the system will shut
off and no longer monitor tire
pressures. Have the system checked
by your dealer as soon as possible.
If the low tire pressure indicator or
TPMS indicator comes on, the VSA
system automatically turns on even if
the VSA system is turned off by
pressing the VSA OFF switch (see
page ). If this happens, you
cannot turn the VSA system off by
pressing the VSA OFF switch again.
Although your tire pressure is
monitored, you must manually check
thetirepressuresmonthly.
The appropriate tire indicator and
low tire pressure indicator comes on
if a tire becomes significantly
underinflated. See
on page .
For example, if you check and fill
your tires in a warm area, then drive
in extremely cold weather, the tire
pressure will be lower than
measured and could be underinflated
and cause the low tire pressure
indicator to come on. Or, if you
check and adjust your tire pressure
in cooler conditions, and drive into
extremely hot conditions, the tire
maybecomeoverinflated.However,
the low tire pressure indicator will
not come on if the tires are
overinflated.
Refer to page for tire inflation
guidelines.
When you restart the vehicle with
thecompactsparetire,theTPMS
indicator may also come on and stay
on after driving several miles
(kilometers).
Each tire, including the spare, should
be checked monthly when cold, and
set to the recommended inflation
pressure as specified on the tire
information label and in the owner’s
manual (see page ).
349
350
278
292
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
Tire Pressure Monitoring
System (TPMS) Indicator
Tire Pressure Monitor
Low Tire
Pressure Indicator
Driving
279
10/04/19 16:15:24 31SJC650_284
2011 Ridgeline
As required by the FCC:
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) This device
may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
This device complies with Industry
Canada Standard RSS-210.
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) this device may not cause
interference, and (2) this device must
accept any interference that may cause
undesired operation of the device.
If you have a flat tire, the low tire
pressure indicator will come on.
Replace the indicated flat tire with
thecompactsparetire(seepage
).
Each wheel (except the compact
sparetirewheel)isequippedwitha
tire pressure sensor. You must use
TPMS specific wheels. It is
recommended that you always have
your tires serviced by your dealer or
qualified technician.
After you replace the flat tire with
thecompactsparetire,thelowtire
pressure indicator stays on. This is
normal; the system is not monitoring
the spare tire pressure. Manually
check the spare tire pressure to be
sure it is correct. After several miles
(kilometers) driving with the
compact spare tire, the TPMS
indicator comes on and the low tire
pressure indicator goes off.
The low tire pressure indicator or
the TPMS indicator will go off, after
several miles (kilometers) driving,
when you replace the spare tire with
the specified regular tire equipped
with the tire pressure monitor sensor.
Never use a puncture-repairing agent
in a flat tire. If used, you will have to
replace the tire pressure sensor.
Havetheflattirerepairedbyyour
dealer as soon as possible.
361
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
Changing a Tire with TPMS
280
10/04/19 16:15:31 31SJC650_285
2011 Ridgeline
CONTINUED
If you think you can safely drive a
short distance to a service station,
proceed slowly to the station, then
inflate the tire to the recommended
pressure.
If the tire is flat, or if the tire
pressure is too low to continue
driving, replace the tire with the
compact spare tire (see page ).
Driving on a significantly under-
inflated tire causes the tire to
overheat and can lead to tire failure.
Under-inflation also reduces fuel
efficiency and tire tread life, and may
affect the vehicle’s handling and
stopping ability.
Becausetirepressurevariesby
temperature and other conditions,
the low tire pressure/TPMS
indicator may come on unexpectedly.
When the low tire pressure/TPMS
indicator is on, one or more of your
tires is significantly underinflated.
Youshouldstopandcheckyourtires
as soon as possible, and inflate them
to the proper pressure as indicated
on the vehicle’s tire information
placard.
It is possible that the pressures
shown on the multi-information
display and the pressures you
manually measure are slightly
different.
If the difference is significant or you
cannot make the low tire pressure/
TPMS indicator and message on the
multi-information display go out after
inflating the tires to the specified
values, have your dealer check the
system as soon as possible.
Each tire has its own pressure
sensor. If the air pressure of a tire
becomes significantly low, the
sensor in that tire immediately sends
a signal that causes the low tire
pressure/TPMS indicator in the
instrument panel to come on. If this
happens, you will see which tire is
losing pressure on the multi-
information display along with a
‘‘CHECK TIRE PRESSURE’’
message.
Your vehicle is equipped with a tire
pressure monitoring system (TPMS)
that turns on every time you start the
engine and monitors the pressure in
your tires while driving.
361
On models with navigation system
Low Tire Pressure/
TPMS Indicator
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
Driving
281
10/04/19 16:15:40 31SJC650_286
2011 Ridgeline
Although your tire pressure is
monitored, you must manually check
thetirepressuresmonthly.
Each tire, including the spare, should
be checked monthly when the
vehicle is cold, and set to the
recommended inflation pressure as
specified on the vehicle placard and
intheowner’smanual(seepage
).
Toselectthetirepressuremonitor,
press the INFO button several times
with the ignition switch in the ON
(II) position.
You will see the above display on the
multi-information display when all
tire pressures are normal.
For example, if you check and fill
your tires in a warm area, then drive
in extremely cold weather, the tire
pressure will be lower than
measured and could be underinflated
and cause the low tire pressure/
TPMS indicator to come on. Or, if
youcheckandadjustyourtire
pressure in cooler conditions, and
drive into extremely hot conditions,
the tire may become overinflated.
However, the low tire pressure/
TPMS indicator will not come on if
thetiresareoverinflated.
Refer to page for tire inflation
guidelines.
If there is a problem with the TPMS,
this indicator begins to flash. It stops
flashing after approximately 1
minute, then stays on. You will also
see a ‘‘CHECK TPMS SYSTEM’’
message on the multi-information
display (see page ).
350
349
91
Tire Pressure Monitor
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
282
10/04/19 16:15:47 31SJC650_287
2011 Ridgeline
CONTINUED
To see the inflation pressures of all
four tires, press the SEL/RESET
button. The display changes as
shown above.
Each tire pressure is shown in PSI
(U.S. models) or in kPa (Canadian
models).
Each tire has its own pressure
sensor. If the air pressure of a tire
becomes significantly low, the
sensor in that tire immediately sends
a signal that causes the low tire
pressure/TPMS indicator in the
instrument panel to come on. If this
happens, you will see which tire is
losing pressure on the multi-
information display along with a
‘‘CHECK TIRE PRESSURE’’
message.
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
Driving
283
U.S. models
Canadian models
10/04/19 16:15:53 31SJC650_288
2011 Ridgeline
If there is a problem with the TPMS,
thetirepressuremonitorshowsa
‘‘SYSTEM FUNCTION ERROR’’
message and the tire pressure
readings are not displayed. If this
happens, you will first see a system
warning message ‘‘CHECK TPMS
SYSTEM’’ on the multi-information
display.
If there is a problem with the TPMS,
youwillseetheabovemessageon
the multi-information display.
If you see this message, the system
is off and is not monitoring the tire
pressures. Have the system checked
by your dealer as soon as possible.
Also, the low tire pressure/TPMS
indicator begins to flash, then stays
on (see page ).281
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
TPMS System Failure
284
10/04/19 16:16:00 31SJC650_289
2011 Ridgeline
If the low tire pressure/TPMS
indicator comes on, or the multi-
information display shows a
‘‘CHECK TPMS SYSTEM’’ message,
the VSA system automatically turns
on even when the VSA system is
turned off by pressing the VSA OFF
switch (see page ). If this
happens, you cannot turn the VSA
system off by pressing the VSA OFF
switch again.
When you restart the vehicle with
thecompactsparetire,theTPMS
system message will also be
displayed on the multi-information
display after several miles
(kilometers) driving.
This indicator and the warning
message on the multi-information
display will go off, after several miles
(kilometers) driving, when the spare
tire is replaced with the specified
regular tire equipped with the tire
pressure monitor sensor.
Each wheel is equipped with a tire
pressure sensor mounted inside the
tire behind the valve stem. You must
use TPMS specific wheels. It is
recommended that you always have
your tires serviced by your dealer or
a qualified technician.
Never use a puncture-repairing agent
in a flat tire. If used, you will have to
replace the tire pressure sensor.
Havetheflattirerepairedbyyour
dealer as soon as possible.
If you have a flat tire, the low tire
pressure/TPMS and tire monitor
indicators will come on. Replace the
indicated flat tire with the compact
sparetire(seepage ).
After the flat tire is replaced with the
spare tire, the low tire pressure/
TPMS indicator stays on while
driving. After several miles
(kilometers) driving, this indicator
begins to flash, then stays on again.
You will also see a ‘‘CHECK TPMS
SYSTEM’’ message on the multi-
information display. This is normal;
the system cannot monitor the spare
tire pressure. Manually check the
spare tire pressure to be sure it is
correct.
292
361
CONTINUED
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
Changing a Tire with TPMS
Driving
285
10/04/19 16:16:07 31SJC650_290
2011 Ridgeline
As required by the FCC:
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) This device
may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
This device complies with Industry
Canada Standard RSS-210.
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) this device may not cause
interference, and (2) this device must
accept any interference that may cause
undesired operation of the device.
Always use the parking brake when
you park your vehicle. Make sure
the parking brake is set firmly, or
your vehicle may roll if it is parked
on an incline.
Set the parking brake before you put
the transmission in Park. This keeps
the vehicle from moving and putting
pressure on the parking mechanism
in the transmission.
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS), Parking
Parking
286
10/04/19 16:16:13 31SJC650_291
2011 Ridgeline
Make sure the parking brake is
fully released before driving away.
Driving with the parking brake
partially set can overheat or
damage the rear brakes.
Make sure the moonroof (if
equipped) and the windows are
closed.
Turn off the lights.
Place any packages, valuables, etc.
in the cargo area in your vehicle or
the In-Bed Trunk, or take them
with you.
Lock the doors.
Check the indicator on the driver’s
door to verify that the security
system is set.
Never park over dry leaves, tall
grass, or other flammable
materials. The hot three way
catalytic converter could cause
these materials to catch on fire.
If the vehicle is facing uphill, turn
the front wheels away from the
curb.
If the vehicle is facing downhill,
turn the front wheels toward the
curb.
On vehicles with security system
Parking
Parking Tips
Driving
287
10/04/19 16:16:21 31SJC650_292
2011 Ridgeline
Your vehicle is equipped with disc
brakes at all four wheels. A power
assist helps reduce the effort needed
on the brake pedal. The emergency
brake assist system increases the
stopping force when you depress the
brake pedal hard in an emergency
situation. The anti-lock brake system
(ABS) helps you retain steering
control when braking very hard.
Resting your foot on the pedal keeps
the brakes applied lightly, builds up
heat, reduces their effectiveness and
reduces brake pad life. In addition,
fuel economy can be reduced. It also
keeps your brake lights on all the
time, confusing drivers behind you.
Constant application of the brakes
when going down a long hill builds
up heat and reduces their effective-
ness. Use the engine to assist the
brakes by taking your foot off the
accelerator and downshifting to a
lower gear.
Check the brakes after driving
through deep water. Apply the
brakes moderately to see if they feel
normal. If not, apply them gently and
frequently until they do. Be extra
cautious and alert in your driving.
The hydraulic system that operates
the brakes has two separate circuits.
Each circuit works diagonally across
the vehicle (the left-front brake is
connected with the right-rear brake,
etc.). If one circuit should develop a
problem, you will still have braking
at two wheels.
If the brake pads need replacing, you
will hear a distinctive, metallic
screeching sound when you apply
the brake pedal. If you do not have
the brake pads replaced, they will
screech all the time. It is normal for
the brakes to occasionally squeal or
squeak when you apply them.
Braking System Design
Brake Pad Wear Indicators
Braking System
288
10/04/19 16:16:27 31SJC650_293
2011 Ridgeline
The anti-lock brake system (ABS)
helpspreventthewheelsfrom
locking up, and helps you retain
steering control by pumping the
brakes rapidly, much faster than a
person can do it.
The electronic brake distribution
(EBD) system, which is part of the
ABS, also balances the front-to-rear
braking distribution according to
vehicle loading.
If this indicator comes on, the anti-
lock function of the braking system
has shut down. The brakes still work
like a conventional system, but
without anti-lock. You should have
your dealer inspect your vehicle as
soon as possible.
You will feel a pulsation in the brake
pedal when the ABS activates, and
you may hear some noise. This is
normal: it is the ABS rapidly
pumpingthebrakes.Ondry
pavement, you will need to press on
thebrakepedalveryhardbeforethe
ABS activates. However, you may
feel the ABS activate immediately if
you are trying to stop on snow or ice.
Let the ABS work for you by always
keeping firm, steady pressure on the
brake pedal. This is sometimes
referred to as ‘‘stomp and steer.’’
If the indicator comes on while
driving, test the brakes as instructed
on page .
You will also see a ‘‘CHECK ABS
SYSTEM’’ message on the multi-
information display (see page ).
376
91
You should never pump the brake pedal.
On models with navigation system
CONTINUED
ABS Indicator
Anti-lock Brakes (ABS)
Driving
289
10/04/19 16:16:35 31SJC650_294
2011 Ridgeline
Always steer moderately
when you are braking hard. Severe
or sharp steering wheel movement
can still cause your vehicle to veer
into oncoming traffic or off the road.
such as trying to take a
corner too fast or making a sudden
lane change. Always drive at a safe
speed for the road and weather
conditions.
It only helps with the
steering control during braking.
If the ABS indicator and the brake
system indicator come on together,
and the parking brake is fully
released, the EBD system may also
be shut down.
Test your brakes as instructed on
page . If the brakes feel normal,
drive slowly and have your vehicle
repaired by your dealer as soon as
possible. Avoid sudden hard braking
which could cause the rear wheels to
lock up and possibly lead to a loss of
control.
If this happens, you will also see the
‘‘CHECK ABS SYSTEM’’ and
‘‘CHECK BRAKE SYSTEM’’
messages on the multi-information
display.
on loose or
uneven surfaces, such as gravel or
snow, than a vehicle without anti-
lock.
When VSA activates, you may notice
that the engine does not respond to
the accelerator in the same way it
does at other times. There may also
be some noise from the VSA
hydraulic system. You will also see
the VSA system indicator blink.
The vehicle stability assist (VSA)
system helps to stabilize the vehicle
during cornering if the vehicle turns
more or less than desired. It also
assists you in maintaining traction
while accelerating on loose or
slippery road surfaces. It does this
by regulating the engine’s output and
by selectively applying the brakes.
The VSA system cannot enhance the
vehicle’s driving stability in all
situations and does not control your
vehicle’s entire braking system. It is
still your responsibility to drive and
corner at reasonable speeds and to
leave a sufficient margin of safety.
376
On models with navigation system
Important Safety Reminders
ABS cannot prevent a loss of
stability.
ABS will not prevent a skid that
results from changing direction
abruptly,
ABS does not reduce the time or
distance it takes to stop the
vehicle.
A vehicle with ABS may require a
longer distance to stop
Anti-lock Brakes (ABS), Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA ), aka Electronic Stability Control (ESC), System
290
11/07/12 15:07:10 31SJC650_295
2011 Ridgeline
When VSA is off, the VSA OFF
indicator comes on as a reminder.
When VSA activates, you will see the
VSA system indicator blink.
If this indicator comes on while
driving, pull to the side of the road
when it is safe, and turn off the
engine. Reset the system by
restarting the engine. If the VSA
system indicator stays on or comes
back on while driving, have the VSA
system inspected by your dealer.
The main function of the
VSA system is generally known as
Electronic Stability Control (ESC).
The system also includes a traction
control function.
You will also see a ‘‘CHECK VSA
SYSTEM’’ message on the multi-
information display if there is a
problem with the VSA system.
If the low tire pressure indicator or
TPMS indicator comes on, see
page .
If the low tire pressure/TPMS
indicator comes on, see page .
Or, if the multi-information display
shows a ‘‘CHECK TPMS
SYSTEM’’ message with the
indicator flashing, see page .
If the indicator does not come on
when the ignition switch is turned to
the ON (II) position, there may be a
problem with the VSA system. Have
your dealer inspect your vehicle as
soon as possible.
In this case, you cannot turn off the
VSA using the OFF switch again.
Without VSA, your vehicle will have
normal braking and cornering ability,
but it will not have VSA traction and
stability enhancement.
278
281
91
On models with navigation system
On models with navigation system
On models without navigation system
Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA ), aka Electronic Stability Control (ESC), System
VSA OFF Indicator
Vehicle Stability Assist
(VSA) System Indicator
Driving
291
NOTE:
11/07/12 15:07:21 31SJC650_296
2011 Ridgeline
Driving with varying tire or wheel
sizes may cause the VSA to
malfunction. When replacing tires,
make sure they are of the same size
and type as your original tires (see
page ).
If you install winter tires, make sure
they are the same size as those that
were originally supplied with your
vehicle. Exercise the same caution
during winter driving as you would if
your vehicle was not equipped with
VSA.
VSA is turned on every time you
start the engine, even if you turned it
off the last time you drove the
vehicle.
This switch is above the parking
brake release handle. To turn the
VSA system on and off, press and
hold it until you hear a beep.
When VSA is off, the VSA OFF
indicator comes on as a reminder.
Press and hold the switch again. It
turns the system back on.
In certain unusual conditions when
your vehicle gets stuck in shallow
mud or fresh snow, it may be easier
to free it with the VSA temporarily
switched off. When the VSA system
is off, the traction control system is
alsooff.Youshouldonlyattemptto
free your vehicle with the VSA off if
you are not able to free it when the
VSA is on.
Immediately after freeing your
vehicle, be sure to switch the VSA on
again. We do not recommend driving
your vehicle with the VSA and
traction control systems switched off.
353
VSA OFF Switch VSA and Tire Sizes
Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA ), aka Electronic Stability Control (ESC), System
292
11/07/12 15:07:29 31SJC650_297
2011 Ridgeline
Your vehicle has been designed to
tow a trailer, as well as carrying
passengers and their cargo. To
safely tow a trailer, you should
carefully observe the load limits (see
page ), use the proper equipment,
and follow the guidelines in this
section.
The maximum allowable weight of
the trailer and everything in or on it
depends on the number of occupants
in your vehicle and the type of trailer
being towed (see page ).
Towing a trailer that is too heavy can
seriously affect your vehicle’s
handling and performance. It can
also damage the engine and
drivetrain.
Avoid towing a trailer during your
vehicle’s first 600 miles (1,000 km)
(see page ).
Be sure to read the
sectiononpage
if you plan to tow off paved
surfaces.
248
260
306
295
CONTINUED
Towing Weight Limits
Load Limits
Off-Highway
Driving Guidelines
Total Trailer Weight
Break-In Period
Driving
293
Exceeding any load limit or
improperly loading your vehicle
and trailer can cause a crash in
which you can be seriously hurt
or killed.
Check the loading of your
vehicle and trailer carefully
beforestartingtodrive.
10/04/19 16:17:10 31SJC650_298
2011 Ridgeline
−
−
−
Thebestwaytoconfirmthatall
loads are within limits is to check
them at a public scale (see page
).
To help ensure a safe drive to a scale,
or if you cannot get to a public scale,
we recommend that you estimate
your total trailer weight and tongue
load as described.
Add the weight of your trailer (as
quoted by the manufacturer) with
everything in or on the trailer. Then
check the tables on page to
make sure you do not exceed the
limit for your conditions.
The maximum
allowable weight of the vehicle, all
occupants, all accessories, all cargo,
and the tongue load is 6,050 lbs
(2,745 kg).
The maximum
allowable weight on the vehicle axles
is 3,105 lbs (1,410 kg) on the front
axle, and 3,245 lbs (1,475 kg) on the
rear axle.
The maximum
allowable weight of the fully loaded
vehicle and trailer is 10,088 lbs
(4,575 kg) with the proper hitch.
The GCWR must be reduced 2
percent for every 1,000 feet (305
meters) of elevation.
The weight that the tongue of a fully-
loaded trailer puts on the hitch
should follow the recommended load
guidelines (see page ). Too
much tongue load reduces front-tire
traction and steering control. Too
little tongue load can make the
trailer unstable and cause it to sway.
295
293
295
Towing Weight Limits
Estimating LoadsGross Vehicle Weight Rating
(GVWR)
Gross Axle Weight Rating
(GAWR)
Gross Combined Weight Rating
(GCWR)
To Estimate the Total Trailer Weight
Tongue Load
294
10/04/19 16:17:19 31SJC650_299
2011 Ridgeline
＊
＊＊
＊
＊＊
−−
Number of
Occupants
2
3
4
5
Max. Tongue LoadMax. Trailer Weight
Towing Weight Guidelines
Driving
295
Total Trailer Weight and Tongue Load Guidelines:
600 lbs (272 kg)
600 lbs (272 kg)
570 lbs (258 kg)
516 lbs (234 kg)
5,000 lbs (2268 kg)
4,750 lbs (2155 kg)
4,750 lbs (2155 kg)
4,500 lbs (2041 kg)
Recommended tongue load should be 5 15% of the total trailer weight for boat trailers, and 10 15% of the total trailer weight for all other
trailers.
The corresponding weight limits assume occupants fill seats from the front of the vehicle to the back, each occupant weighs 150 lbs (70 kg),
and each has 15 lbs (7 kg) of cargo in the cab, pickup bed, or In-Bed Trunk. Any additional weight, including cargo or accessories, reduces
the maximum trailer weight and maximum tongue load. Never exceed the gross axle weight ratings (see page ).
294
10/04/19 16:17:25 31SJC650_300
2011 Ridgeline
To accurately check your loads at
the public scale, the vehicle and
trailer should be fully loaded, and all
occupants should stay in the vehicle
while the attendant watches the
scale.
Check the front gross axle weight.
Limit: 3,105 lbs (1,410 kg)
Check the gross vehicle weight.
Limit: 6,050 lbs (2,745 kg)
Check the weight of the hitched
trailer. Write this number down.
Check the gross combined weight.
Limit: 10,088 lbs (4,575 kg)
Remember, maximum gross
combined weight should be
decreased 2% for every 1,000 feet
(305 meters) of elevation.
If you cannot weigh the rear axle
directly, you can calculate the rear
gross axle weight by subtracting
the weight in step 1 from the
weight in step 2.
Limit: 2,945 lbs (1,335 kg)
Check the rear gross axle weight.
Limit: 3,252 lbs (1,475 kg)
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Checking Loads
Towing a Trailer
296
10/04/19 16:17:34 31SJC650_301
2011 Ridgeline
Check the weight of the unhitched
trailer. Limit: See page .
Towing generally requires a variety
of supplemental equipment. To
ensure the best quality, we
recommend that you purchase
Honda equipment whenever possible.
Discuss any additional needs with
your trailer sales or rental agency,
and make sure all equipment is
properly installed, maintained, and
also meets state, federal, province,
and local regulations.
Your dealer offers trailer packages
that include a ball mount, hitch plug,
and hitch pin. A wiring harness kit is
also available from your dealer.
Read the trailer manufacturer’s
instructions, and select the
appropriate draw bar for the height
of the trailer you will be towing.
A weight distributing hitch is not
recommended for use with your
vehicle, as an improperly adjusted
weight distributing hitch may reduce
handling, stability, and braking
performance.Calculate the tongue load.
Subtract the weight in step 6 from
the weight in step 7.
Limit: See page .
Recommended: see page .
Range: 5-15% for boat trailers
10-15% for other trailers
7.
8.
293
295
295
CONTINUED
Towing Equipment and
Accessories
Hitch
Weight Distributing Hitch
Towing a Trailer
Driving
297
10/04/19 16:17:44 31SJC650_302
2011 Ridgeline
There are two common types of
trailer brakes: surge and electric.
Surge brakes are common for boat
trailers, since the brakes will get wet.
If you choose electric brakes, be
sure they are electronically actuated.
Do not attempt to tap into your
vehicle’s hydraulic system. No
matter how successful it may seem,
any attempt to attach trailer brakes
to your vehicle’s hydraulic system
will lower braking effectiveness and
create a potential hazard.
A factory installed, 4-pin gray
connector is located under the
instrument panel near the top of the
parking brake pedal. This connector
has all of the circuits required to
install most electric trailer brake
controllers. A jumper harness to
adapt your electric trailer brake
controller to the vehicle is included
with the optional Genuine Honda
trailer hitch kit. To obtain a trailer
hitch kit, see your dealer.
Have a qualified mechanic install
your trailer brake controller
following the trailer brake controller
manufacturer’s instructions. Failure
to properly install the trailer brake
controller may increase the distance
it takes for you to stop your vehicle
when towing a trailer.
Use this illustration to identify each
terminal in the trailer brake
controller connector.
Honda recommends that any trailer
with a total trailer weight of 1,000 lbs
(450 kg) or more has its own brakes.
Seeyourtrailerdealerorrental
agency for more information on
installing electric brakes.
Trailer Brakes
Towing a Trailer
298
BRAKE
(20A)
(BLUE)
ELECTRIC BRAKE
(BROWN/WHITE)
GROUND
(BLACK)
STOP
(SKY BLUE)
10/04/19 16:17:51 31SJC650_303
2011 Ridgeline
Always use safety chains when you
tow a trailer. Make sure the chains
are secured to the trailer and hitch,
and that they cross under the tongue
and can catch the trailer if it
becomes unhitched. Leave enough
slack to allow the trailer to turn
corners easily, but do not let the
chains drag on the ground.
When towing a trailer, we
recommend that you carry a full-size
spare wheel and tire for your vehicle
and trailer. See page for proper
tire size, page for how to store a
full size wheel and tire, and page
for information on changing a
flat tire.
Remember to unhitch the trailer
before changing a flat. Ask your
trailer sales or rental agency where
and how to store the trailer’s spare
tire.
This device is recommended if your
trailer tends to sway. Your trailer
dealer or rental agency can tell you
what kind of sway control you need
and how to install it.
Many states and provinces require
special exterior mirrors when towing
a trailer. Even if they don’t, you
should install special mirrors if you
cannot clearly see behind you, or if
the trailer creates a blind spot.
366
353
361
Safety Chains
Sway Control
Spare Tires
Trailer Mirrors
Towing a Trailer
Driving
299
10/04/19 16:17:59 31SJC650_304
2011 Ridgeline
＋
Trailer lights and equipment must
comply with federal, state, province/
territory, and local regulations.
Check trailer light requirements for
the areas where you plan to tow, and
use only equipment designed for
your vehicle.
Refer to the above illustration for
wiring information.
We recommend that you have your
dealer install a Honda wiring harness
and converter. This harness has
been designed for your vehicle.
Your vehicle is equipped with a
trailer lighting connector.
Your vehicle is equipped with a
connector to install an optional trailer
lighting connector that mates with
your vehicle. You can get this
optional connector from your dealer.
Since lighting and wiring vary with
trailer type and brand, you should
also have a qualified mechanic install
a suitable connector between the
vehicle and the trailer.
Except RT models
On RT models
Trailer Lights
Towing a Trailer
300
TAILLIGHTS
(GREEN/BLACK)
ELECTRIC BRAKE
(BROWN/WHITE)
RIGHT TURN SIGNAL
AND BRAKE LIGHTS
(GREEN/RED)
GROUND
(BLACK)
B CHARGE
(GREEN)
LEFT TURN SIGNAL
AND BRAKE LIGHTS
(GREEN/RED)
BACK-UP LIGHTS
(BLUE)
10/04/19 16:18:06 31SJC650_305
2011 Ridgeline
CONTINUED
Insert the connector securely into
the socket.
Hook the retaining tab on the
inner side of the lid against the
retaining tab of the connector to
prevent disconnection during
operation.
Your vehicle has a class 3 trailer
hitch as standard equipment.
Make sure the connector and the
socketarefreeofdirt,moisture,
or other foreign material.
Open the socket lid by pulling it up.
Also see page for trailer-related
information.
The 7-pin trailer connector is needed
for the trailer lights. To connect the
connector:
1.
2.
3.
4.
299
Except RT models
Towing Equipment
Towing a Trailer
Connecting the Trailer Connectors
Driving
301
TRAILER HITCH
7-PIN TRAILER CONNECTOR
7-PIN TRAILER CONNECTOR
LID
RETAINING
TAB
SOCKET
RETAINING TAB
10/04/19 16:18:16 31SJC650_306
2011 Ridgeline
＋
Refer to the above illustrations for
wiring information.
The trailer jumper harness is used to
install the controller for the electric
trailer brakes. For more information,
see on page .
Insert the trailer brake fuse into the
secondary under-hood fuse box (see
page ).
298
381
Except RT models Except RT models
Trailer Connector Sockets Trailer Jumper Harness
Trailer Brakes
Trailer Brake Fuse
Towing a Trailer
302
7-PIN TRAILER SOCKET
SMALL
LIGHT
(GREEN)
BACK LIGHT
(YELLOW)
GROUND
(WHITE)
GROUND
(BLACK)
ELECTRIC BRAKE
(BROWN/WHITE)
LEFT
TURN/
STOP
(RED)
BRAKE
(20A)
(BLUE)
B
CHARGE
(BLACK)
RIGHT
TURN/
STOP
(BROWN)
ELECTRIC
BRAKE
(BLUE)
BRAKE LIGHTS
(SKY BLUE)
10/04/19 16:18:24 31SJC650_307
2011 Ridgeline
The added weight, length, and
height of a trailer will affect your
vehicle’s handling and performance,
so driving with a trailer requires
some special driving skills and
techniques.
The vehicle has been properly
serviced, and the tires, brakes,
suspension, cooling system, and
lights are in good operating
condition.
The trailer has been properly
serviced and is in good condition.
All weights and loads are within
limits.
Thehitch,safetychains,andany
other attachments are secure.
Allitemsonandinthetrailerare
properly secured and cannot shift
while you drive.
When preparing to tow, and before
driving away, be sure to check the
following:
Towing performance can be
affected by high altitude, high
temperature, or when climbing
steep grades. Therefore, premium
fuel (premium unleaded gasoline
with pump octane number of 91 or
higher) is recommended when
towing more than 3,500 lbs (1,590
kg).
The trailer tires and spare are in
good condition and inflated as
recommended by the trailer
maker.
Your vehicle tires and spare are in
good condition and properly
inflated.
The lights and brakes on your
vehicle and the trailer are working
properly.
Foryoursafetyandthesafetyof
others,taketimetopracticedriving
maneuvers before heading for the
open road, and follow the guidelines
on the following page.
CONTINUED
Driving Safely With a TrailerPre-Tow Checklist
Towing a Trailer
Driving
303
10/04/19 16:18:34 31SJC650_308
2011 Ridgeline
Drive slower than normal in all
driving situations, and obey posted
speed limits for vehicles with trailers.
When towing a fixed-sided trailer
(e.g., camper), do not exceed 55 mph
(88 km/h). At higher speeds, the
trailer may sway or affect vehicle
handling.
When towing a trailer on level roads
under normal driving conditions, do
not use D3. This will increase the
automatic transmission fluid
temperature and may cause
overheating.
With heavy cargo on the pickup bed,
your vehicle has a higher center of
gravity. Drive slowly and cautiously,
and allow more time and distance for
braking. Loading heavy cargo could
affect your vehicle’s handling and
performance.
Maketurnsmoreslowlyandwider
than normal. The trailer tracks a
smaller arc than your vehicle, and it
canhitorrunoversomethingthe
vehicle misses.
Allow more time and distance for
braking. Do not brake or turn
suddenly as this could cause the
trailer to jackknife or turn over.
When driving down hills, reduce
your speed, and use D3. Do not
‘‘ride’’ the brakes.
Ifyoumuststopwhenfacinguphill,
use the foot brake or parking brake.
Do not try to hold the vehicle in
place by pressing on the accelerator,
as this can cause the automatic
transmission to overheat.
When climbing hills, closely watch
your temperature gauge. If it nears
the red (Hot) mark, turn the air
conditioning off, reduce speed and, if
necessary, pull to the side of the
road to let the engine cool.
If the automatic transmission fluid
temperature increases and exceeds
the specified limit, the A/T
temperature indicator comes on (see
page ).
You will also see an ‘‘A/T TEMP
HIGH’’ message on the multi-
information display (see page ).
69
91
On models with navigation system
Towing Speeds and Gears
Making Turns and Braking
Driving on Hills
Towing a Trailer
Remember, it
takes longer to slow down and
stop when towing a trailer.
304
10/04/19 16:18:44 31SJC650_309
2011 Ridgeline
If the vehicle’s tires slip when
retrieving a boat from the water,
shift to first gear, and turn on VTM-4
lock (see page ). Disengage
VTM-4 lock as soon as the boat is
out of the water to prevent damage
to the VTM-4 system.
Your vehicle is not designed to be
towed behind a motor home. If your
vehicle needs to be towed in an
emergency, see page .
Do not park on an incline unless it is
unavoidable. If you must park on an
incline, follow the steps below to
help prevent the vehicle and trailer
from rolling and possibly injuring
someone.
Turn the front wheels toward the
curb on a downhill, and away from
the curb on an uphill.
With the foot brake fully pressed,
have someone place wheel chocks
on the downhill side of the vehicle
and trailer wheels.
Firmly apply the parking brake
before you put the transmission in
Park. This keeps the vehicle from
putting pressure on the parking
mechanism in the transmission. It
also makes it easier to move the
shift lever out of Park when you
want to drive away.
Crosswinds and air turbulence
caused by passing trucks can disrupt
your steering and cause the trailer to
sway. When being passed by a large
vehicle, keep a constant speed, and
steer straight ahead. Do not try to
make quick steering or braking
corrections.
When parking on level ground,
follow all normal precautions (see
page ) including putting the
transmission in Park, and firmly
setting the parking brake.
Always drive slowly and have
someone guide you when backing up.
Grip the of the steering wheel,
then turn the wheel to the left to get
the trailer to move to the left. Turn
the wheel to the right to move the
trailer to the right.
1.
2.
3.
276
383
286
bottom
Retrieving a BoatHandling Crosswinds and Buff eting
Parking
Backing Up
Towing a Trailer
Towing Your Vehicle
Driving
305
10/04/19 16:18:55 31SJC650_310
2011 Ridgeline
Your vehicle has been designed
primarily for use on pavement. But
its higher ground clearance and four-
wheel drive VTM-4
system allow
you to occasionally travel on unpaved
roads and surfaces. Your vehicle is
not designed for trailblazing,
mountain climbing, or other
challenging off-road activities.
If you decide to drive on unpaved
roads, you will find that it requires
somewhat different driving skills.
Your vehicle will also handle
somewhat differently than it does on
pavement. Be sure to pay extra
attention to the precautions and tips
in this section, and get acquainted
with your vehicle before leaving the
pavement.
General Information
Off-Highway Driving Guidelines
306
Improperly operating this
vehicle on or off-pavement can
cause a crash or rollover in
which you and your passengers
could be seriously injured or
killed.
Keep your speed low, and
don’t drive faster than
conditions permit.
Follow all instructions and
guidelines in this owner’s
manual.
10/04/19 16:19:00 31SJC650_311
2011 Ridgeline
Before you leave the pavement, be
sure to do all scheduled maintenance
and service, and inspect your vehicle
for any problems. Pay special
attention to the condition of the tires,
and check the tire pressures.
After you return to the pavement,
carefully inspect your vehicle to
make sure there is no damage that
could make driving it unsafe.
Recheck the condition of the tires
and the tire pressures.
The route presents limits (too steep
or bumpy roads). You have limits
(driving skill and comfort). And your
vehicle has limits (traction, stability,
and power).
Driving off-highway can be
hazardous if you fail to recognize
limits and take the proper
precautions.
To avoid loss of control or rollover,
be sure to follow all precautions and
recommendations.
Be sure to store cargo properly
and do not exceed your cargo load
limits (see page and ).
Be aware that a heavy load can
reduce ground clearance and your
ability to clear obstacles.
Whenever you drive, make sure
you and your passengers always
wear seat belts.
Keep your speed low, and never
go faster than the conditions allow.
It’s up to you to continually assess
the situation and drive within the
limits.
260 293
Check Out Your VehicleRememberImportant Safety Precautions
Off-Highway Driving Guidelines
Driving
307
10/04/19 16:19:09 31SJC650_312
2011 Ridgeline
Forbettertractiononallsurfaces,
accelerate slowly and gradually build
up speed. If you try to start too fast
on wet soil, mud, snow, or ice, you
might not have enough traction to
get underway, and you may dig
yourself a hole. Starting with the
shift lever in second (2) gear will
help you have a smoother start on
snow or ice.
Keep in mind that you will usually
need more time and distance to
brake to a stop on unpaved surfaces.
Avoid hard braking. Do not ‘‘pump’’
the brakes; let the anti-lock braking
system pump them for you.
Your vehicle is not equipped with
undercarriage guards to protect key
components, so take care to avoid
rocks, tree stumps, and other
obstacles in your path.
Because your vehicle has a higher
center of gravity than a conventional
passenger vehicle, driving a wheel
over a tall object, or allowing a wheel
to drop into a deep hole, can cause
your vehicle to tip or roll over.
If you can’t clearly see all conditions
or obstacles on a slope, walk the
slope before you drive on it. If you
have any doubt whether or not you
can safely drive on the slope, don’t
do it. Find another route.
If you are driving up a hill and find
that you cannot continue,
. Your vehicle could roll
over. Slowly back down the hill,
following the same route you took up
the hill.
do not try to
turn around
Accelerating and Braking Avoiding Obstacles Driving on Slopes
Off-Highway Driving Guidelines
308
10/04/19 16:19:16 31SJC650_313
2011 Ridgeline
The banks and surface under the
water provide good traction. The
water may hide hazards such as
rocks, holes, or mud.
Before driving through water, stop,
get out if necessary, and make sure
that:
If you decide it is safe to drive
through water, choose a suitable
speed, and proceed without shifting,
changing speeds, stopping, or
shutting off the engine.
Do not try to cross water at high
speeds, as this may cause severe
damage to the cooling system or
result in loss of control.
After driving through water, test
your brakes. If they got wet, gently
‘‘pump’’ them while driving slowly
until they operate normally.
If the water is deeper than the wheel
hubs, some additional service may
be required. This service is not
covered by your warranties.
The water is not flowing too fast.
Deep rushing water can sweep you
downstream. Even very shallow
rushingwatercanwashthe
ground from under your tires and
cause you to lose traction and
possibly roll over.
The banks are sloped so you can
drive out.
The water is not deep enough to
cover your wheel hubs, axles, or
exhaust pipe. You could stall and
not be able to restart your engine.
The water can also damage
important vehicle components.
If you get stuck, and cannot get
unstuck with the VTM-4 system,
engage the VTM-4
Lock (see page
), and carefully try to go in the
direction (forward or reverse) that
you think will get you unstuck. Do
notspinthetiresathighspeeds.It
will not help you get out and may
cause damage to the transmission or
VTM-4 system.
If you are still unable to free yourself,
your vehicle is equipped with front
and rear tow hooks designed for this
purpose (see page ).383
276
CONTINUED
If You Get StuckCrossing a Stream
Off-Highway Driving Guidelines
Driving
309
10/04/19 16:19:26 31SJC650_314
2011 Ridgeline
Use a nylon strap to attach your
vehicle to the recovery vehicle, and
carefully take out the slack in the
strap. Once the strap is tight, the
recovery vehicle should apply force.
Remember that the recovery vehicle
needs good traction to avoid
becoming stuck, too.
You should never use a jack to try to
get unstuck. Your vehicle could
easily slip off the jack and hurt you
or someone else.
You may safely tow a trailer off-road
if you follow these guidelines:
Do not exceed the trailer weight
or tongue limits (see page ).
Stay on smooth, level dirt roads,
and avoid driving in hilly terrain.
Allow extra room for starting,
stopping, and turning.
Slow down if you encounter bumps
or other obstacles.
295
Towing a Trailer Off-Road
Off-Highway Driving Guidelines
310
10/04/19 16:19:33 31SJC650_315
2011 Ridgeline
This section explains why it is
important to keep your vehicle well
maintained and how to follow basic
maintenance safety precautions.
This section also includes
instructions on how to read the
maintenance minder messages on
the information display or multi-
information display (depending on
models), and instructions for simple
maintenance tasks you may want to
take care of yourself.
U.S. Vehicles:
If you have the skills and tools to
perform more complex maintenance
tasks on your vehicle, you may want
to purchase the service manual. See
page for information on how to
obtain a copy, or see your dealer.
......................Maintenance Safety . 312
.................Maintenance Minder . 313
..............................Fluid Locations . 325
........................Adding Engine Oil . 326
Changing the Engine Oil and
...........................................Filter . 327
..............................Engine Coolant . 329
....................Windshield Washers . 330
....Automatic Transmission Fluid . 331
.................Rear Differential Fluid . 333
.............Transfer Assembly Fluid . 333
....................................Brake Fluid . 334
....................Power Steering Fluid . 335
....................................Timing Belt . 336
.............................................Lights . 336
................Cleaning the Seat Belts . 344
.....................................Floor Mats . 345
..................Dust and Pollen Filter . 345
.................................Wiper Blades . 346
...........................................Wheels . 348
...............................................Tires . 348
...................Checking the Battery . 356
.............................Vehicle Storage . 357
407
Maintenance
Maintenance, replacement, or
repair of emissions control
devices and systems may be done
by any automotive repair
establishment or individual using
parts that are ‘‘certified’’ to EPA
standards.
Maintenance
311
TM
10/04/19 16:19:39 31SJC650_316
2011 Ridgeline
To eliminate potential hazards, read
the instructions before you begin,
and make sure you have the tools
and skills required.
All service items not detailed in this
section should be performed by a
certified technician or other qualified
mechanic.
Make sure your vehicle is parked
on level ground, the parking brake
is set, and the engine is off.
To clean parts, use a commercially
available degreaser or parts
cleaner, not gasoline.
To reduce the possibility of fire or
explosion, keep cigarettes, sparks,
and flames away from the battery
and all fuel-related parts.
Wear eye protection and
protective clothing when working
with the battery or compressed air.
Be sure there is
adequate ventilation whenever you
operate the engine.
Some of the most important safety
precautions are given here. However,
we cannot warn you of every
conceivable hazard that can arise in
performing maintenance. Only you
can decide whether or not you
should perform a given task.
Do
not run the engine unless
instructed to do so.
Let the
engine and exhaust system cool
down before touching any parts.
Maintenance Safety
Important Safety Precautions
Carbon Monoxide poison from
engine exhaust.
Potential Vehicle Hazards
Injury from moving parts.
Burns from hot parts.
312
Improperly maintaining this
vehicle, or failing to correct a
problem before driving can
cause a crash in which you can
be seriously hurt or killed.
Always follow the inspection
and maintenance
recommendations and
schedules in this owner’s
manual.
Failure to properly follow
maintenance instructions and
precautions can cause you to
be seriously hurt or killed.
Always follow the procedures
and precautions in this owner’s
manual.
10/04/19 16:19:48 31SJC650_317
2011 Ridgeline
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
Your vehicle displays engine oil life
and maintenance service items on
the information display or multi-
information display (depending on
models) to show you when you
should have your dealer perform
engine oil replacement and indicated
maintenance services.
Based on the engine operating
conditions and accumulated engine
revolutions, the onboard computer in
your vehicle calculates the remaining
engine oil life and displays it as a
percentage.
The remaining engine oil life is
shownonthedisplayaccordingto
this table:
To see the current engine oil life,
turn the ignition switch to the ON
(II) position, and press the SELECT
button repeatedly until the engine oil
life display appears (see page ).78
CONTINUED
Calculated Engine
Oil Life (%)
100 % 91 %
90 % 81 %
80 % 71 %
70 % 61 %
60 % 51 %
50 % 41 %
40 % 31 %
30 % 21 %
20 % 16 %
15 % 11 %
10 % 6 %
5% 1%
0%
Displayed
Engine Oil Life (%)
100 %
90 %
80 %
70 %
60 %
50 %
40 %
30 %
20 %
15 %
10 %
5%
0%
On models without navigation system
Engine Oil Life Display
Maintenance Minder
Maintenance
313
SELECT BUTTON
ENGINE OIL LIFE DISPLAY
U.S. model is shown.
TM
10/04/19 16:19:56 31SJC650_318
2011 Ridgeline
The 15 and 10 percent oil life
indicator reminds you that the time
is coming soon to take your vehicle
in for the required maintenance.
If the remaining engine oil life is 15
to 6 percent, you will see the engine
oil life indicator every time you turn
the ignition switch to the ON (II)
position. The maintenance minder
indicator will also come on, and the
maintenance item code(s) for other
scheduled maintenance items
needing service will be displayed
near the ‘‘OIL LIFE’’ message.
When the remaining engine oil life is
5 to 1 percent, you will see a
‘‘SERVICE’’ message along with the
same maintenance item code(s),
everytimeyouturntheignition
switch to the ON (II) position.
Maintenance Minder
314
‘‘SERVICE’’ MESSAGE
ENGINE OIL LIFE INDICATOR
U.S. model is shown.
MAINTENANCE ITEM CODE(S)
MAINTENANCE MINDER INDICATOR
TM
10/04/19 16:20:03 31SJC650_319
2011 Ridgeline
The maintenance item code or codes
indicate the main and sub items
required at the time of the oil change
(see page ).
When the remaining engine oil life is
0 percent, the engine oil life indicator
will blink. The display comes on
everytimeyouturntheignition
switch to the ON (II) position. The
maintenance minder indicator
( ) also comes on and remains
on in the instrument panel. When
you see this message, immediately
have the indicated maintenance done
by your dealer.
If you do not perform the indicated
maintenance, negative distance
traveled is displayed and begins to
blink after the vehicle has been
driven 10 miles (10 km) or more.
Negative distance traveled means
your vehicle has passed the
maintenance required point.
Immediately have the indicated
maintenance done by your dealer.
You can switch the information
display from the engine oil life
display to the odometer or the trip
meter. Press and release the
SELECT button on the dashboard.
Whentheengineoillifeis15to1
percent, the maintenance minder
indicator ( ) comes on every
time you turn the ignition switch to
the ON (II) position, then it goes out
if you switch the information display.
When you see this message, have
the indicated maintenance
performed by your dealer as soon as
possible.
316
CONTINUED
Maintenance Minder
Maintenance
315
U.S. model is shown.
TM
10/04/19 16:20:12 31SJC650_320
2011 Ridgeline
Immediately have the service
performed, and make sure to reset
the display as described as follows.
When the engine oil life is 0 percent
or negative distance traveled, the
maintenance minder indicator
( )remainsonevenifyou
change the information display.
All maintenance items displayed on
the information display are in code.
For an explanation of these
maintenance codes, see page .
Your dealer will reset the display
after completing the required
maintenance service. You will see
‘‘OIL LIFE 100%’’ on the information
display the next time you turn the
ignition switch to the ON (II)
position.
If maintenance service is done by
someone other than your dealer,
reset the maintenance minder as
follows:
Turn the ignition switch to the ON
(II) position.
To change the information display
from the engine oil life display to the
odometer or the trip meter, press
and release the SELECT button.
Press the SELECT button
repeatedly until the engine oil life
is displayed.
1.
2.
324
On models without navigation system On models without navigation system
Maintenance Main Items and Sub
Items
Resetting the Engine Oil Life
Display
Maintenance Minder
316
MAINTENANCE MAIN ITEM
MAINTENANCE SUB ITEM(S)
TM
10/04/19 16:20:22 31SJC650_321
2011 Ridgeline
CONTINUED
Press the TRIP/RESET button for
about 10 seconds. The engine oil
life and the maintenance item
code(s) will blink.
Press the TRIP/RESET button for
another 5 seconds. The
maintenance item code(s) will
disappear, and the engine oil life
will reset to ‘‘100.’’
To see the current engine oil life,
turn the ignition switch to the ON
(II) position, and push and release
the SEL/RESET button on the
dashboard repeatedly, until the
engine oil life is displayed (see page
).
3. 4.
83
On models with navigation system
Maintenance Minder
Maintenance
317
U.S. model is shown.
ENGINE OIL LIFE DISPLAY
SEL/RESET BUTTON
TM
10/04/19 16:20:29 31SJC650_322
2011 Ridgeline
▲▼
When the remaining engine oil life is
15 percent or less, the display shows
a ‘‘SERVICE DUE SOON’’ message
along with the maintenance item
code(s) for other scheduled
maintenance items needing service.
The system message indicator on
the instrument panel will also come
on, and a beeper will sound.
To cancel the system message, press
and release the INFO ( / ) button
on the dashboard. At this time, the
system message indicator will also
be turned off. Then the display will
change to the engine oil life display.
Maintenance Minder
318
MAINTENANCE ITEM CODE(S)
SYSTEM MESSAGE INDICATOR
U.S. model is shown.
TM
10/04/19 16:20:35 31SJC650_323
2011 Ridgeline
▲▼
You will also see the system
message every time you turn the
ignition switch to the ON (II)
position until you have the indicated
maintenance performed by your
dealer.
The maintenance item code(s)
indicate the main and sub items
required at the time of the oil change
(see page ).
When the remaining engine oil life is
less than 5 percent, you will see the
above display. The display then
changes to ‘‘SERVICE DUE NOW.’’
Have the indicated maintenance
done as soon as possible.
The system message indicator on
the instrument panel will also come
on, and a beeper will sound.
To cancel the system message, press
and release the INFO ( / ) button
on the dashboard. At this time, the
system message indicator will also
be turned off. Then the display will
change to the engine oil life display.
You will also see the system
message every time you turn the
ignition switch to the ON (II)
position until you have the indicated
maintenance performed by your
dealer.
321
CONTINUED
Maintenance Minder
Maintenance
319
TM
10/04/19 16:20:41 31SJC650_324
2011 Ridgeline
▲▼▲▼
Negative distance traveled means
your vehicle has passed the
maintenance required point.
The system message will appear
again by pressing the INFO ( / )
button after canceling it.
You will also see the system
message every time you turn the
ignition switch to the ON (II)
position until you have the indicated
maintenance performed by your
dealer.
Immediately have the service
performed, and make sure to reset
the display as described on page .
If the indicated required service is
not done and the remaining engine
oil life becomes 0%, the multi-
information display will show a
‘‘SERVICE PAST DUE’’ message,
the total distance traveled after the
remaining oil life became 0%, and the
maintenance item code(s).
To cancel the system message, press
and release the INFO ( / ) button
on the dashboard. At this time, the
system message indicator will be
turned off. Then the display will
change to the engine oil life display.
321
Maintenance Minder
not
320
Canada
U.S.
TM
10/04/19 16:20:47 31SJC650_325
2011 Ridgeline
▲▼
All maintenance items displayed on
the information display are in code.
For an explanation of these
maintenance codes, see page .
Your dealer will reset the display
after completing the required
maintenance service. You will see
‘‘OIL LIFE 100%’’ on the display the
next time you turn the ignition
switch to the ON (II) position.
If maintenance service is done by
someone other than your dealer,
reset the maintenance minder as
follows:
Turn the ignition switch to the ON
(II) position.
Press the SEL/RESET button on
the dashboard until you see the
engine oil life display.
Press and hold the SEL/RESET
button for 10 seconds. The multi-
information display will ask for a
confirmation.
If you are sure you want to reset
the display, press the SEL/
RESET button to select ‘‘OK.’’
If you do not want to reset the
display, press the INFO ( / )
button to select ‘‘Cancel.’’
1.
2.
3.
324
On models with navigation system On models with navigation system
Maintenance Main Items and Sub
Items
Resetting the Engine Oil Life
Display
Maintenance Minder
Maintenance
321
MAINTENANCE
MAIN ITEM
MAINTENANCE SUB ITEM(S)
TM
10/04/19 16:20:57 31SJC650_326
2011 Ridgeline
If you have the required service
done but do not reset the display, or
reset the display without doing the
service, the system will not show the
correct maintenance intervals. This
canleadtoseriousmechanical
problems because you will no longer
have an accurate record of when
maintenance is needed.
We recommend the use of Honda
parts and fluids whenever you have
maintenance done. These are
manufactured to the same high-
quality standards as the original
components, so you can be confident
of their performance and durability.
Your authorized Honda dealer
knows your vehicle best and can
provide competent, efficient service.
However, service at a dealer is not
mandatory to keep your warranties
in effect. Maintenance may be done
by any qualified service facility or
person who is skilled in this type of
automotive service. Make sure to
have the service facility or person
reset the display as previously
described. Keep all receipts as proof
of completion, and have the person
who does the work fill out your
Honda Service History or Canadian
Maintenance Log. Check your
warranty booklet for more
information.
Maintenance Minder
Important Maintenance
Precautions
322
TM
10/04/19 16:21:02 31SJC650_327
2011 Ridgeline
−
−
−
−
−
−
＃
Youshouldcheckthefollowing
items at the specified intervals. If
you are unsure of how to perform
any check, turn to the appropriate
page listed.
Engine oil level Check every
time you fill the fuel tank. See
page .
Engine coolant level Check the
radiator reserve tank every time
you fill the fuel tank. See page .
Automatic transmission Check
the fluid level monthly. See page
.
Brakes Check the fluid level
monthly. See page .
Tires Check the tire pressure
monthly. Examine the tread for
wear and foreign objects. See page
.
Lights Check the operation of
the headlights, parking lights,
taillights, high-mount brake light,
and license plate lights monthly.
See page .
According to state and federal
regulations, failure to perform
maintenance on the items marked
with will not void your emissions
warranties. However, all
maintenance services should be
performed in accordance with the
intervals indicated by the odometer/
trip meter display or the multi-
information display. 253
253
331
334
336
348
CONTINUED
Maintenance Minder
Owner’s Maintenance Checks
Maintenance
323
TM
10/04/19 16:21:11 31SJC650_328
2011 Ridgeline
＊
＊
＃
＃
−−
＊
＃
Maintenance Minder
324
Maintenance Main Items
Replace engine oil
Replace engine oil and oil filter
Inspect front and rear brakes
Check parking brake adjustment
Inspect these items:
Tie rod ends, steering gear box, and boots
Suspension components
Driveshaft boots
Brake hoses and lines (including ABS/VSA)
All fluid levels and condition of fluids
Exhaust system
Fuel lines and connections
Maintenance Sub Items
Rotate tires
Replace air cleaner element
Replace dust and pollen filter
Inspect drive belt
Replace transmission and transfer fluid
Replace spark plugs
Replace timing belt and inspect water pump
Inspect valve clearance
Replace engine coolant
Replace VTM-4 rear differential fluid
Symbol Symbol
A
B
1
2
3
4
5
6
TM
If the message, ‘‘SERVICE DUE NOW’’ or ‘‘SERVICE’’ does not appear more
than 12 months after the display is reset, change the engine oil every year.
Independent of the maintenance messages in the information display,
replace the brake fluid every 3 years.
Inspect idle speed every 160,000 miles (256,000 km).
Adjust the valves during services A, B, 1, 2, or 3 if they are noisy.
See information on maintenance and emissions warranty on page .
NOTE :
:
: 323
If you drive in dusty conditions, replace every 15,000
miles (24,000 km).
If you drive primarily in urban areas that have high
concentrations of soot in the air from industry and from
diesel-powered vehicles, replace every 15,000 miles
(24,000 km).
If you drive regularly in very high temperatures
(over 110°F, 43°C), in very low temperatures
(under 20°F, 29°C), or towing a trailer, replace every
60,000 miles (U.S.)/100,000 km (Canada).
Driving in mountainous terrain at very low speeds,
towing a trailer or driving when fully loaded causes
more mechanical (shear) stress and fluid deterioration.
This requires differential fluid changes more frequently
than recommended by the maintenance minder. If you
regularly drive your vehicle under these conditions,
have the differential fluid changed at 7,500 miles
(12,000 km), then every 15,000 miles (24,000 km).
Maintenance Minder
10/04/19 16:21:19 31SJC650_329
2011 Ridgeline
＊
＊
Fluid Locations
Maintenance
325
RADIATOR CAP
ENGINE OIL FILL CAP
POWER STEERING FLUID
(Red cap)
AUTOMATIC
TRANSMISSION
FLUID DIPSTICK
(Yellow loop)
ENGINE COOLANT
RESERVOIR
ENGINE OIL DIPSTICK
(Orange loop)
WASHER FLUID
(Blue cap)
BRAKE FLUID
(Gray cap)
Under the gray cover
:
10/04/19 16:21:23 31SJC650_330
2011 Ridgeline
Oil is a major contributor to your
engine’s performance and longevity.
Always use a premium-grade 5W-20
detergent oil displaying the API
Certification Seal. This seal indicates
the oil is energy conserving, and that
it meets the American Petroleum
Institute’s latest requirements.
Honda Motor Oil is the preferred
5W-20 lubricant for your vehicle. It is
highly recommended that you use
Honda Motor Oil in your vehicle for
optimum engine protection. Make
sure the API Certification Seal says
‘‘For Gasoline Engines.’’
The oil viscosity or weight is
provided on the container’s label.
5W-20 oil is formulated for year-
round protection of your vehicle to
improve cold weather starting and
fuel economy.Unscrew and remove the engine oil
fill cap on the valve cover. Pour in
the oil slowly and carefully so you do
not spill any. Clean up any spills
immediately. Spilled oil could
damage components in the engine
compartment. Reinstall the engine
oil fill cap, and tighten it securely.
Wait a few minutes, and recheck the
oil level on the engine oil dipstick.
Do not fill above the upper mark; you
could damage the engine.
Recommended Engine Oil
Adding Engine Oil
326
API CERTIFICATION SEAL
Ambient Temperature
ENGINE OIL FILL CAP
10/04/19 16:21:30 31SJC650_331
2011 Ridgeline
Open the hood, and remove the
engine oil fill cap. Remove the oil
drain bolt and washer from the
bottom of the engine. Drain the oil
into an appropriate container.
You may use a synthetic motor oil if
it meets the same requirements
given for a conventional motor oil: it
displays the API Certification Seal,
and it is the proper weight. You must
follow the oil and filter change
intervals shown on the odometer/
trip meter display or on the multi-
information display.
Your vehicle does not require any oil
additives. Additives may adversely
affect the engine or transmission
performance and durability.
Always change the oil and filter
according to the maintenance
messages shown on the information
display or multi-information display
(depending on models). The oil and
filter collect contaminants that can
damage your engine if they are not
removed regularly.
Changing the oil and filter requires
special tools and access from
underneath the vehicle. The vehicle
should be raised on a service station-
type hydraulic lift for this service.
Unless you have the knowledge and
proper equipment, you should have
this maintenance done by a skilled
mechanic.
Run the engine until it reaches
normal operating temperature,
then shut it off.
1.
2.
CONTINUED
Synthetic Oil Changing the Engine Oil and
Filter
Engine Oil Additives
Adding Engine Oil, Changing the Engine Oil and Filter
Maintenance
327
WASHER
DRAIN BOLT
10/04/19 16:21:39 31SJC650_332
2011 Ridgeline
Remove the oil filter, and let the
remaining oil drain. A special
wrench (available from your
dealer) is required.
Make sure the oil filter gasket is
not stuck to the contacting surface
of the engine. If it is, remove it
before installing a new oil filter.
Reinstall the engine oil fill cap.
Start the engine. The oil pressure
indicator should go out within 5
seconds. If it does not, turn off the
engine, and check your work.
Let the engine run for several
minutes, then check the drain bolt
and oil filter for leaks.
Turn off the engine and let it sit
for several minutes, then check
the oil level on the dipstick. If
necessary, add more oil.
Refill the engine with the recom-
mended oil.
Engine oil change capacity
(including filter):
Put a new washer on the drain bolt,
then reinstall the drain bolt.
Tighten the drain bolt to:
Make sure to clean off any dirt
and dust on the contacting surface
of a new oil filter.
Install a new oil filter according to
the instructions that come with it.
9.
8.
7.
6.
4.
5.
3.
Changing the Engine Oil and Filter
328
OIL FILTER
4.5 US qt (4.3 )
29 lbf·ft (39 N·m , 4.0 kgf·m)
Improper disposal of engine oil can be
harmful to the environment. If you
change your own oil, please dispose of
the used oil properly. Put it in a sealed
container, and take it to a recycling
center. Do not discard it in a trash bin
or dump it on the ground.
10/04/19 16:21:48 31SJC650_333
2011 Ridgeline
If the reserve tank is completely
empty, you should also check the
coolant level in the radiator.
If Honda antifreeze/coolant is not
available, you may use another
major-brand non-silicate coolant as a
temporaryreplacement.Makesureit
is a high-quality coolant
recommended for aluminum engines.
Continued use of any non-Honda
coolant can result in corrosion,
causing the cooling system to
malfunction or fail. Have the cooling
system flushed and refilled with
Honda antifreeze/coolant as soon as
possible.
If the coolant level in the reserve
tank is at or below the MIN line, add
coolant to bring it up to the MAX line.
Inspect the cooling system for leaks.
Always use Honda Long-life Anti-
freeze/Coolant Type 2. This coolant
is pre-mixed with 50 percent
antifreeze and 50 percent distilled
water. Never add straight antifreeze
or plain water.
CONTINUED
Adding Engine Coolant
Engine Coolant
Maintenance
329
RESERVE TANKMIN
MAX
Removing the radiator cap
while the engine is hot can
cause the coolant to spray out,
seriously scalding you.
Always let the engine and
radiator cool down before
removing the radiator cap.
10/04/19 16:21:55 31SJC650_334
2011 Ridgeline
Make sure the engine and radiator
are cool.
When the radiator and engine are
cool, relieve any pressure in the
cooling system by turning the
radiator cap counterclockwise,
without pressing down.
Remove the radiator cap by
pushing down and turning
counterclockwise.
The coolant level should be up to
the base of the filler neck. Add
coolant if it is low.
Pourthecoolantslowlyand
carefully so you do not spill any.
Clean up any spill immediately; it
could damage components in the
engine compartment.
Put the radiator cap back on, and
tighten it fully.
Pour coolant into the reserve tank.
Fill it to halfway between the MAX
and MIN marks. Put the cap back
on the reserve tank.
Do not add any rust inhibitors or
other additives to your vehicle’s
cooling system. They may not be
compatible with the coolant or
engine components.
Check the fluid level in the
windshield washer reservoir at least
monthly during normal use.
Fill the reservoir with a good-quality
windshield washer fluid. This
increases the cleaning capability and
prevents freezing in cold weather.
The washer level indicator will come
on when the level is low (see page
).
If the washer fluid is low, a
‘‘WASHER FLUID LOW’’ message
appears on the multi-information
display.
When you refill the reservoir, clean
the edges of the windshield wiper
blades with windshield washer fluid
on a clean cloth. This will help to
condition them.
3.
4.
5.
1.
2.
67
On models without navigation system
On models with navigation system
Windshield Washers
Engine Coolant, Windshield Washers
330
RADIATOR CAP
10/04/19 16:22:06 31SJC650_335
2011 Ridgeline
CONTINUED
Check the fluid level with the engine
at normal operating temperature.
Park the vehicle on level ground.
Start the engine, let it run until the
radiator fan comes on, then shut
off the engine. For accurate
results, wait about 60 seconds (but
no longer than 90 seconds) before
doing step 2.
Remove the dipstick (yellow loop)
from the transmission, and wipe it
with a clean cloth.
The transmission should be drained
and refilled with new fluid when this
service is shown on the information
display or multi-information display
(depending on models).
1.
2.
Windshield Washers, Automatic Transmission Fluid
Automatic Transmission Fluid
Maintenance
331
DIPSTICK
Do not use engine antifreeze or a
vinegar/water solution in the
windshield washer reservoir. Antifreeze
can damage your vehicle’s paint, while
a vinegar/water solution can damage
the windshield washer pump. Use only
commercially-available windshield
washer fluid.
10/04/19 16:22:14 31SJC650_336
2011 Ridgeline
Insert the dipstick all the way back
in the transmission.
If you are not sure how to add fluid,
contact your dealer.
If the level is below the lower
mark, remove the fill plug, then
add the fluid into the fill hole to
bring it to the level between the
upper and lower marks on the
dipstick.
Pour the fluid slowly and carefully so
you do not spill any. Clean up any
spill immediately; it could damage
components in the engine
compartment.
Always use Honda Genuine ATF-Z1
(automatic transmission fluid).
Insert the dipstick all the way into
the transmission securely as
shown in the illustration.
Remove the dipstick and check
the fluid level. It should be
between the upper and lower
marks.
6.
5.
3.
4.
Automatic Transmission Fluid
332
DIPSTICK
UPPER MARK
LOWER MARK
Use only Honda Genuine ATF-Z1
(automatic transmission fluid). Do not
mix with other transmission fluids.
Using transmission fluid other than
Honda Genuine ATF-Z1 may cause
deterioration in transmission operation
and durability, and could result in
damage to the transmission.
Damage resulting from the use of
transmission fluid other than Honda
Genuine ATF-Z1 is not covered by the
Honda new vehicle warranty.
10/04/19 16:22:22 31SJC650_337
2011 Ridgeline
The rear differential should be
drained and refilled with new fluid
when this service is indicated by a
maintenance message on the
information display or multi-
information display. This service
may be needed more often under
certain driving conditions (see page
).
Always use Honda VTM-4
Differential Fluid, and have your
dealer replace the rear differential
fluid.
The transfer assembly should be
drained and refilled with new fluid
when this service is indicated by a
maintenance message on the
information display or multi-
information display.
Always use Hypoid gear oil GL4 or
GL5 with a viscosity of SAE 90 or
80W-90, and have your dealer
replace the transfer assembly fluid.
324
Rear Differential Fluid Transfer Assembly Fluid
Rear Differential Fluid, Transfer Assembly Fluid
Maintenance
333
10/04/19 16:22:28 31SJC650_338
2011 Ridgeline
The fluid level should be between
theMINandMAXmarksontheside
of the reservoir. If the level is at or
below the MIN mark, your brake
system needs attention. Have the
brake system inspected for leaks or
worn brake pads.
Using any non-Honda brake fluid can
cause corrosion and decrease the life
of the system. Have the brake
system flushed and refilled with
Honda Heavy Duty Brake Fluid
DOT 3 as soon as possible.
Brake fluid marked DOT 5 is not
compatible with your vehicle’s
braking system and can cause
extensive damage.
Check the fluid level in the brake
fluid reservoir monthly.
Always use Honda Heavy Duty
Brake Fluid DOT 3. If it is not
available, you should use only DOT 3
or DOT 4 fluid, from a sealed
container, as a temporary
replacement.
Independent of the maintenance
messages in the information display,
replace the brake fluid every 3 years.
Brake Fluid
334
MAX
MIN
10/04/19 16:22:34 31SJC650_339
2011 Ridgeline
Pour the fluid slowly and carefully so
you do not spill any. Clean up any
spill immediately; it could damage
components in the engine
compartment.
A low power steering fluid level can
indicate a leak in the system. Check
the fluid level frequently, and have
the system inspected as soon as
possible.
Always use Honda Power Steering
Fluid. You may use another power
steering fluid as an emergency
replacement, but have the power
steering system flushed and refilled
with Honda PSF as soon as possible.
If you are not sure how to add fluid,
contact your dealer.
Remove the cover, then check the
level on the side of the reservoir
when the engine is cold.
The fluid should be between the
UPPER LEVEL and LOWER LEVEL.
If not, add power steering fluid to the
UPPER LEVEL mark, and put the
cover back in place.
Power Steering Fluid
Maintenance
335
LOWER LEVEL
COVER
UPPER LEVEL
Turning the steering wheel to full left
or right lock and holding it there can
damage the power steering pump.
10/04/19 16:22:41 31SJC650_340
2011 Ridgeline
−−
Theheadlightswereproperlyaimed
when your vehicle was new. If you
regularly carry heavy items on the
pickup bed or pull a trailer,
readjustment may be required.
Adjustmentsshouldbedonebyyour
dealer or other qualified technician.
Your vehicle has halogen headlight
bulbs. When replacing a bulb, handle
it by its base, and protect the glass
from contact with your skin or hard
objects. If you touch the glass, clean
it with denatured alcohol and a clean
cloth.
The timing belt should be replaced
at the intervals shown in the
maintenance minder schedule.
Replace the timing belt every 60,000
miles (U.S.) or every 100,000 km
(Canada) if you regularly drive your
vehicleinanyofthefollowing
conditions:
In very high temperatures
(over 110°F, 43°C).
In very low temperatures
(under 20°F, 29°C).
Frequently towing a trailer.
Headlight Aiming Replacing a Headlight BulbTiming Belt
Timing Belt, Lights
336
Halogen headlight bulbs get very hot
when lit. Oil, perspiration, or a scratch
on the glass can cause the bulb to
overheat and shatter.
10/04/19 16:22:48 31SJC650_341
2011 Ridgeline
Remove the electrical connector
from the bulb by pulling the
connector straight back.
Remove the rubber weather seal
by pulling on the tab.
Unclip the end of the hold-down
wire from its slot. Pivot it out of
the way, and remove the bulb.
Install the new bulb into the hole,
making sure the tabs are in their
slots. Pivot the hold-down wire
back in place, and clip the end into
the slot.
Install the rubber weather seal
over the back of the headlight
assembly. Make sure it is right
side up.
Push the electrical connector onto
the new bulb. Make sure it is
connected securely. Turn on the
headlights to test the new bulb.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Lights
Maintenance
337
WEATHER SEAL
CONNECTOR HOLD-DOWN WIRE
BULB
10/04/19 16:22:55 31SJC650_342
2011 Ridgeline
Remove the socket from the
headlight assembly by turning it
one-quarter turn counterclockwise.
Pull the bulb straight out of its
socket. Push the new bulb straight
into the socket until it bottoms.
Turn on the lights to make sure
the new bulb is working.
Put the inner fender cover in place.
Install and lock each holding clip
bypushingonthecenter.
Insert the socket back into the
headlight assembly. Turn it
clockwise to lock it in place.
To change the passenger’s side
bulb, start the engine, turn the
steering wheel all the way to the
left, and turn off the engine. To
change the driver’s side bulb, turn
the steering wheel to the right.
Use a flat-tip screwdriver to
remove the two holding clips from
the inner fender, and pull the inner
fender cover back.
5.
6.
1.
2.
3.
4.
7.
Lights
Replacing a Front Turn Signal/
Hazard/Parking Light Bulb
338
HOLDING CLIPS
BULB SOCKET
10/04/19 16:23:04 31SJC650_343
2011 Ridgeline
Your vehicle uses halogen light
bulbs. When replacing a bulb, handle
it by its plastic case, and protect the
glass from contact with your skin or
hard objects. If you touch the glass,
clean it with denatured alcohol and a
clean cloth.
Push down the inner fender.
Remove the electrical connector
from the bulb by pushing on the
tab and pulling the connector
down.
Remove the bulb from the fog
light assembly by turning it one-
quarter turn counterclockwise.
Remove the bolts and use the flat-
tip screwdriver to remove the
holding clip located under the
front bumper.
2.
3.
4.
1.
CONTINUED
Lights
Replacing Front Fog/Daytime
Running Light Bulbs
Maintenance
339
BOLTS
INNER FENDER
TAB
HOLDING CLIP
CONNECTOR
Halogen bulbs get very hot when lit. Oil,
perspiration, or a scratch on the glass
can cause the bulb to overheat and
shatter.
10/04/19 16:23:13 31SJC650_344
2011 Ridgeline
Remove the socket by turning it
one-quarter turn counterclockwise.
Remove the burned-out bulb by
pulling it straight out of the socket.
Drop open the tailgate.
Remove the two bolts, and remove
the rear light assembly from the
rear pillar.
Determine which of the three
bulbs is burned out: brake/
taillight, turn signal/hazard light,
or back-up light.
Install the new bulb into the hole
and turn it one-quarter turn
clockwise to lock it in place.
Push the electrical connector back
onto the bulb. Make sure it is on
all the way.
Turn on the lights to test the new
bulb.
Reinstall the inner fender. Make
sure it is installed under the edge
of the front bumper.
Reinstall the holding clip, and push
in its head, then install the bolts
and tighten them securely.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Replacing Rear Bulbs
Lights
340
BULB
SOCKET
10/04/19 16:23:23 31SJC650_345
2011 Ridgeline
Remove the three mounting
screws from the light assembly.
Remove the lens from the light
assembly.
Pull the bulb straight out of its
socket. Push the new bulb straight
into the socket until it bottoms.
Place a cloth on the edge of the
lens segment to prevent scratches.
Remove each lens segment by
carefully prying on its edge with a
small flat-tip screwdriver.
Remove the screw under each lens.
Pull the high-mount brake light
assembly out of the vehicle.
Install the new bulb into the
socket.
Push the socket into the light
assembly, and turn it clockwise
until it locks.
Turn on the lights to make sure
the new bulb is working.
Install the rear light assembly in
the rear pillar. Tighten the two
bolts securely.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
6.
7.
8.
9.
CONTINUED
Replacing a High-mount Brake
Light Bulb
Lights
Maintenance
341
LENS SEGMENT
SCREW
SCREW
BULB
10/04/19 16:23:34 31SJC650_346
2011 Ridgeline
Pull the bulb straight out of its
socket. Push the new bulb straight
into the socket until it bottoms.
Push the socket into the light
assembly, and turn it clockwise
until it locks.
Remove the license plate light
assembly by pulling it towards you,
and then pulling the front edge
upward.
Remove the socket from the light
assembly by turning it one-quarter
turn counterclockwise.
Put the lens back on the light
assembly, and tighten the
mounting bolts securely.
Turn on the lights to make sure
the new bulb is working.
Put the light assembly back into
the vehicle. Install the screws and
tighten them securely.
Reinstall the lens segments.
1.
2.
3.
4.
8.
7.
9.
Lights
Replacing a Rear License Plate
Bulb
342
BULB
SOCKET
10/04/19 16:23:43 31SJC650_347
2011 Ridgeline
Pull the bulb straight out of its
socket. Push the new bulb straight
into the socket until it bottoms.
Push the socket into the light
assembly, and turn it clockwise
until it locks.
Remove the mounting screw from
the bed light assembly.
Pull out the light assembly.
Remove the socket from the light
assembly by turning it one-quarter
turn counterclockwise.
Turn on the lights to make sure
the new bulb is working.
Reinstall the light assembly in the
bumper.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
5.
6.
CONTINUED
Replacing a Bed Light Bulb
Lights
Maintenance
343
SCREW
SCREW
BULB
SOCKET
10/04/19 16:23:51 31SJC650_348
2011 Ridgeline
If your seat belts get dirty, use a soft
brush with a mixture of mild soap
and warm water to clean them. Do
not use bleach, dye, or cleaning
solvents. Let the belts air-dry before
you use the vehicle.
Dirt build-up in the loops of the seat
belt anchors can cause the belts to
retract slowly. Wipe the insides of
the loops with a clean cloth
dampened in mild soap and warm
water or isopropyl alcohol.
Reinstall the light assembly.
Turn on the lights to make sure
the new bulb is working.
Reinstall the mounting screw, and
tighten it securely.
6.
7.
8.
Cleaning the Seat Belts
Lights, Cleaning the Seat Belts
344
LOOP
10/04/19 16:23:58 31SJC650_349
2011 Ridgeline
The floor mats that came with your
vehicle hook over the floor mat
anchors. This keeps the floor mats
from sliding forward, possibly
interfering with the pedals, or
backwards, making the front
passenger’s weight sensors
ineffective.
If you remove a floor mat, make sure
tore-anchoritwhenyouputitback
in your vehicle.
A non-Honda floor mat may not fit
your vehicle properly. This could
prevent the proper operation of the
folding rear seats and the passenger’s
seat weight sensors. We recommend
using genuine Honda floor mats. Do
not put additional floor mats on top
of the anchored mats.
This filter removes the dust and
pollenthatisbroughtinfromthe
outside through the heating and
cooling system/climate control
system.
Have your dealer replace the filter
when this service is indicated by a
maintenance message on the
information display or multi-
information display (depending on
the models). It should be replaced
every 15,000 miles (24,000 km) if you
drive primarily in urban areas that
have high concentrations of soot in
the air, or if the flow from the
heating and cooling system/climate
control system becomes less than
usual.
Floor Mats, Dust and Pollen Filter
Floor Mats Dust and Pollen Filter
Maintenance
345
10/04/19 16:24:05 31SJC650_350
2011 Ridgeline
Raise the wiper arm off the
windshield.
To replace a wiper blade:
To raise the wiper arm, turn the
ignition switch to the ON (II)
position and activate the wipers
(see page ) .When the wipers
are in the upright position, turn
the ignition switch off to stop the
wipers in that position.
Check the condition of the wiper
blades at least every six months.
Replace them if you find signs of
cracking in the rubber, areas that are
getting hard, or if they leave streaks
and unwiped areas when used.
1.
2.
94
Wiper Blades
346
WIPER ARMS
Do not open the hood when the wiper
arms are raised, or you will damage the
hood and the wiper arms.
10/04/19 16:24:11 31SJC650_351
2011 Ridgeline
CONTINUED
Remove the blade from its holder
by grabbing the tabbed end of the
blade. Pull up firmly until the tabs
come out of the holder.
Examine the new wiper blades. If
they have no plastic or metal
reinforcement along the back
edge, remove the metal
reinforcement strips from the old
wiper blade, and install them in
the slots along the edge of the new
blade.
Disconnect the blade assembly
from the wiper arm:
Press and hold the lock tab.
Slide the blade assembly toward
the lock tab until it releases
from the wiper arm.
3. 4. 5.
Wiper Blades
Maintenance
347
LOCK TAB
BLADE
BLADE
REINFORCEMENT
10/04/19 16:24:18 31SJC650_352
2011 Ridgeline
Slide the new wiper blade into the
holder until the tabs lock.
Slide the wiper blade assembly
onto the wiper arm. Make sure it
locks in place.
Lower the wiper arm against the
window.
Turn the ignition switch to the ON
(II) position, and turn the wiper
switch off to return the wiper arms
to the parked position.
Clean the wheels as you would the
rest of the exterior. Wash them with
thesamesolution,andrinsethem
thoroughly.
Aluminum alloy wheels have a
protective clear-coat that keeps
the aluminum from corroding and
tarnishing. Cleaning the wheels
with harsh chemicals (including
some commercial wheel cleaners)
or a stiff brush can damage the
clear-coat. To clean the wheels,
use a mild detergent and a soft
brush or sponge.
To safely operate your vehicle, your
tires must be the proper type and
size, in good condition with adequate
tread, and correctly inflated.
The following pages give more
detailed information on how to take
care of your tires and what to do
when they need to be replaced.
6.
7.
8.
9.
If equipped
Wiper Blades, Wheels, Tires
Wheels Tires
348
Using tires that are excessively
worn or improperly inflated can
cause a crash in which you can
be seriously hurt or killed.
Follow all instructions in this
owner’s manual regarding tire
inflation and maintenance.
10/04/19 16:24:27 31SJC650_353
2011 Ridgeline
CONTINUED
Keeping the tires properly inflated
provides the best combination of
handling, tread life, and riding
comfort.
Underinflated tires wear unevenly,
adversely affect handling and fuel
economy, and are more likely to
fail from being overheated.
Overinflated tires can make your
vehicleridemoreharshly,are
more prone to damage from road
hazards, and wear unevenly.
Even though your vehicle is
equipped with TPMS, we
recommend that you visually check
your tires every day. If you think a
tire might be low, check it
immediately with a tire gauge.
Use a gauge to measure the air
pressure in each tire at least once a
month. Even tires that are in good
condition may lose 1 to 2 psi (10 to
20 kPa, 0.1 to 0.2 kgf/cm ) per
month. Remember to check the
sparetireatthesametime.
Check the air pressures when the
tires are cold. This means the
vehicle has been parked for at least 3
hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6
km). Add or release air, if needed, to
match the recommended cold tire
pressures on page .
If you check air pressures when the
tires are hot (driven for several
miles/kilometers), you will see
readings 4 to 6 psi (30 to 40 kPa, 0.3
to 0.4 kgf/cm ) higher than the cold
readings. This is normal. Do not let
air out to match the recommended
cold air pressure. The tire will be
underinflated.
Youshouldgetyourowntire
pressure gauge and use it whenever
you check your tire pressures. This
will make it easier for you to tell if a
pressure loss is due to a tire problem
and not due to a variation between
gauges.
While tubeless tires have some
ability to self-seal if they are
punctured, you should look closely
for punctures if a tire starts losing
pressure.
The tire pressure monitoring system
(TPMS) warns you when a tire
pressure is low. See page or
for more information.
350
278
281
Tires
Inflation Guidelines
Maintenance
349
10/04/19 16:24:36 31SJC650_354
2011 Ridgeline
Never use a puncture-repairing agent
in a flat tire. If used, you will have to
replace the tire pressure sensor.
Havetheflattirerepairedbyyour
dealer as soon as possible.
The following chart shows the
recommended cold tire pressures for
most normal and high-speed driving
conditions.
Your tires have wear indicators
molded into the tread. When the
tread wears down, you will see a 1/2
inch (12.7 mm) wide band across the
tread. This shows there is less than
1/16 inch (1.6 mm) of tread left on
the tire.
A tire this worn gives very little
traction on wet roads. You should
replace the tire if you can see three
or more tread wear indicators.
Thecompactsparetirepressureis:
Excessive tread wear.
Cuts, splits, or cracks in the side
of the tire. Replace the tire if you
can see fabric or cord.
Bumps or bulges in the tread or
side of the tire. Replace the tire if
youfindeitheroftheseconditions.
Every time you check inflation, you
should also examine the tires for
damage, foreign objects, and wear.
Youshouldlookfor:
For additional information about
your tires, see page .
For convenience, the recommended
tire sizes and cold tire pressures are
on a label on the driver’s doorjamb.
392
Tire Size Cold Tire Pressure
Tire Size Cold Tire Pressure
Front/Rear:
Front/Rear:
RT, RTS models, and Canadian DX, VP
models
RTL models, and Canadian EX-L models
Tires
Recommended Tire Pressures
Tire Inspection
350
INDICATOR LOCATION MARKS
TREAD WEAR INDICATORS
32 psi (220 kPa ,
2.2 kgf/cm
)
P245/65R17 105T
P245/60R18 104T 32 psi (220 kPa ,
2.2 kgf/cm
)
60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )
10/04/19 16:24:55 31SJC650_355
2011 Ridgeline
In addition to proper inflation,
correct wheel alignment helps to
decrease tire wear. If you find a tire
is worn unevenly, have your dealer
check the wheel alignment.
Have your dealer check the tires if
you feel a consistent vibration while
driving. A tire should always be
rebalanced if it is removed from the
wheel. When you have new tires
installed, make sure they are
balanced. This increases riding
comfort and tire life. For best results,
have the installer perform a dynamic
balance.
The service life of your tires is
dependent on many factors,
including, but not limited to, driving
habits, road conditions, vehicle
loading, inflation pressure,
maintenance history, speed, and
environmental conditions (even
when the tires are not in use).
In addition to your regular
inspections and inflation pressure
maintenance, it is recommended that
you have annual inspections
performed once the tires reach five
years old. It is also recommended
that all tires, including the spare, be
removed from service after 10 years
from the date of manufacture,
regardless of their condition or state
of wear.
The last four digits of the TIN (tire
identification number) are found on
the sidewall of the tire and indicate
the date of manufacture (See
on page ).
To help increase tire life and
distribute wear more evenly, rotate
the tires according to the
maintenance messages displayed on
the information display or multi-
information display (depending on
models). Move the tires to the
positions shown in the diagram each
time they are rotated. If you
purchase directional tires, rotate
only front-to-back.
392
Tire RotationTire MaintenanceTire Service Life
Tire
Labeling
Tires
Maintenance
351
Front
(For Non-directional
Tires and Wheels)
(For Directional
Tires and Wheels)
Front
On vehicles with aluminum wheels,
improper wheel weights can damage
your vehicle’s aluminum wheels. Use
only Honda wheel weights for
balancing.
10/04/19 16:25:04 31SJC650_356
2011 Ridgeline
It is best to replace all four tires at
thesametime.Ifthatisnotpossible
or necessary, replace the two front
tires or two rear tires as a pair.
Replacing just one tire can seriously
affect your vehicle’s handling.
If you ever replace a wheel, make
sure that the wheel’s specifications
match those of the original wheels.
Replace your tires with radial tires of
the same size, load range, speed
rating, and maximum cold tire
pressure rating (as shown on the
tire’s sidewall).
Mixing radial and bias-ply tires on
your vehicle can reduce braking
ability, traction, and steering
accuracy. Using tires of a different
size or construction can cause the
ABS and vehicle stability assist
system (VSA) to work inconsistently.
Replacement wheels are available at
your dealer.
The ABS and VSA system work by
comparing the speed of the wheels.
When replacing tires, use the same
size originally supplied with the
vehicle. Tire size and construction
can affect wheel speed and may
cause the ABS or VSA system to
activate.
Also be sure you use only TPMS
specific wheels. If you do not, the
tire pressure monitoring system will
not work.
Replacing Tires and Wheels
Tires
352
Installing improper tires on your
vehicle can affect handling and
stability. This can cause a crash
in which you can be seriously
hurt or killed.
Always use the size and type of
tires recommended in this
owner’s manual.
10/04/19 16:25:11 31SJC650_357
2011 Ridgeline
＋Wheels: If you mount snow tires on your
vehicle, make sure they are radial
tires of the same size and load range
as the original tires. Mount snow
tires on all four wheels. The traction
provided by snow tires on dry roads
maybelowerthanyouroriginaltires.
Check with the tire dealer for
maximum speed recommendations.
Tires marked ‘‘M S’’ or ‘‘All
Season’’ on the sidewall have an all-
weather tread design suitable for
most winter driving conditions.
For the best performance in snowy
or icy conditions, you should install
snow tires or tire chains. They may
be required by local laws under
certain conditions.
Tires:
See page for DOT tire quality
grading information, and page
for tire size information.
390
392
RT, RTS models, and Canadian DX,
VP models
RTL models, and Canadian EX-L
models
RT, RTS models, and Canadian DX,
VP models
RTL models, and Canadian EX-L
models
Tires
Wheel and Tire Specifications Snow TiresWinter Driving
Maintenance
353
P245/65R17 105T
17x71/2J
18x71/2J
P245/60R18 104T
10/04/19 16:25:20 31SJC650_358
2011 Ridgeline
＃
＊
＃
＃
＊
This tire chain is available at many
auto supply stores. To find a local
storethatcarriesthechain,call
Quality Chain Corp at 1-800-843-8824.
To order the tire chain online, go to
, and enter your
vehicle information. When you install
the chains, follow the manufacturer’s
instructions, and mount them as
tightly as you can. Drive slowly with
the chains installed.
Rubber chain adjusters, or
tensioners, must be used to
prevent the chains from
contacting the body or the
chassis.
Mount tire chains on your tires when
required by driving conditions or
local laws. Install them only on the
front tires.
Because your vehicle has limited tire
clearance, Honda strongly
recommends using the chains listed
below.
When installing chains, follow the
manufacturer’s instructions and
mount them as tightly as you can.
Drive slowly with chains installed. If
you hear them contacting the body
or chassis, stop and investigate.
Make sure the chains are installed
tightly, and that they are not
contacting the brake lines or
suspension. Remove the chains as
soonasyoustartdrivingoncleared
roads.
:
Premium Cobra Cable Chain
1046P with accessory adjusters
SCC Super Z-6 SZ-429
www.chainquest.com
On RT, RTS models, and Canadian DX,
VP models
On RT, RTS models, and Canadian DX,
VP models
On RTL models, and Canadian EX-L
models
Tires
Premium Cobra Cable Chain
1046P with accessory
adjusters
Tire Chains
354
10/04/19 16:25:26 31SJC650_359
2011 Ridgeline
If you ever hear the chains
contacting the body or chassis, stop
and investigate. If the chains have
loosened, retighten them. Make sure
they do not contact the brake lines
or suspension.
Removethechainsassoonasyou
begin driving on cleared roads.
Tires
Maintenance
355
Using the wrong chains, or not
properly installing chains, can
damage the brake lines and
cause a crash in which you can
be seriously injured or killed.
Follow all instructions in this
owner’s manual regarding the
selection and use of tire chains.
Traction devices that are the wrong
size or improperly installed can
damage your vehicle’s brake lines,
suspension, body, and wheels. Stop
driving if they are hitting any part of
the vehicle.
10/04/19 16:25:31 31SJC650_360
2011 Ridgeline
−
If you need to connect the battery to
a charger, disconnect both cables to
prevent damaging your vehicle’s
electrical system. Always disconnect
the negative ( ) cable first, and
reconnect it last.
Check the terminals for corrosion (a
white or yellowish powder). To
remove it, cover the terminals with a
solution of baking soda and water. It
will bubble up and turn brown. When
this stops, wash it off with plain
water. Dry off the battery with a
cloth or paper towel. Coat the
terminals with grease to help prevent
future corrosion.
If additional battery maintenance is
needed, see your dealer or a
qualified technician.
Battery posts,
terminals, and related accessories
contain lead and lead compounds.
Check the condition of the battery
monthlybylookingatthetest
indicator window. The label on the
battery explains the test indicator’s
colors.
WARNING:
Wash your hands after handling.
Checking the Battery
356
TEST INDICATOR WINDOW
The battery gives off explosive
hydrogen gas during normal
operation.
A spark or flame can cause the
battery to explode with enough
force to kill or seriously hurt you.
Wear protective clothing and a
face shield, or have a skilled
technician do the battery
maintenance.
10/04/19 16:25:37 31SJC650_361
2011 Ridgeline
Block the rear wheels.
If the vehicle is to be stored for a
longer period, it should be
supported on jackstands so the
tires are off the ground.
Leave one window open slightly (if
the vehicle is being stored
indoors).
Disconnect the battery.
Support the front wiper blade
arms with a folded towel or rag so
they do not touch the windshield.
To minimize sticking, apply a
silicone spray lubricant to all door,
In-Bed Trunk lid, and tailgate seals.
Also, apply a vehicle body wax to
the painted surfaces that mate
with the door, In-Bed Trunk lid
and tailgate seals.
If your vehicle’s battery is
disconnected, or goes dead, the time
setting may be lost. To reset the time,
see page .
If your vehicle’s battery is
disconnected or goes dead, the audio
system may disable itself. The next
timeyouturnontheradioyouwill
see ‘‘CODE’’ in the frequency display.
Use the preset bars to enter the code
(see page ).
The navigation system will also
disableitself.Thenexttimeyouturn
on the ignition switch, the system
will require you to enter a PIN
before it can be used. Refer to the
navigation system manual.
If you need to park your vehicle for
an extended period (more than 1
month), there are several things you
should do to prepare it for storage.
Proper preparation helps prevent
deterioration and makes it easier to
get your vehicle back on the road. If
possible, store your vehicle indoors.
Leave the parking brake off. Put
the transmission in Park.
Cleantheinterior.Makesurethe
carpeting, floor mats, etc., are
completely dry.
Wash and dry the exterior
completely.
Fill the fuel tank.
207
206
CONTINUED
On models without navigation system
On models with navigation system
Vehicle Storage
Checking the Battery, Vehicle Storage
Maintenance
357
10/04/19 16:25:48 31SJC650_362
2011 Ridgeline
Cover the vehicle with a
‘‘breathable’’ cover, one made
from a porous material such as
cotton. Non-porous materials, such
as plastic sheeting, trap moisture,
which can damage the paint.
If possible, periodically run the
engine until it reaches full
operating temperature (the
cooling fans cycle on and off
twice). Preferably, do this once a
month.
Vehicle Storage
358
10/04/19 16:25:52 31SJC650_363
2011 Ridgeline
This section covers the more
common problems that motorists
experience with their vehicles. It
gives you information about how to
safely evaluate the problem and what
to do to correct it. If the problem has
stranded you on the side of the road,
you may be able to get going again.
If not, you will also find instructions
on getting your vehicle towed.
......................Compact Spare Tire . 360
....................Changing a Flat Tire . 361
.............If the Engine Won’t Start . 369
................................Jump Starting . 370
..............If the Engine Overheats . 372
.........Low Oil Pressure Indicator . 374
..........Charging System Indicator . 374
.......Malfunction Indicator Lamp . 375
...............Brake System Indicator . 376
..............................................Fuses . 378
..............................Fuse Locations . 381
......................Emergency Towing . 383
..........If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck . 383
Taking Care of the Unexpected
Taking Care of the Unexpected
359
10/04/19 16:25:56 31SJC650_364
2011 Ridgeline
Use the compact spare tire as a
temporary replacement only. Get
your regular tire repaired or replaced,
and put it back on your vehicle as
soon as you can.
Check the air pressure of the
compact spare tire every time you
check the other tires. It should be
inflated to:
Follow these precautions:
Replace the tire when you can see
the tread wear indicator bars. The
replacement should be the same size
and design tire, mounted on the
same wheel. The spare tire is not
designed to be mounted on a regular
wheel, and the spare wheel is not
designed for mounting a regular tire.
Never exceed 50 mph (80 km/h).
This tire gives a harsher ride and
less traction on some road
surfaces. Use greater caution
while driving.
Do not mount snow chains on a
compact spare.
Do not use your compact spare
tire on another vehicle unless it is
thesamemakeandmodel.
The low tire pressure indicator
comes on and stays on after you
replace the flat tire with the compact
spare tire. After several miles
(kilometers) driving with the
compact spare tire, the TPMS
indicator comes on and the low tire
pressure indicator goes off.
After the flat tire is replaced with the
spare tire, the low tire pressure/
TPMS indicator stays on. After
several miles (kilometers) driving
with the spare, this indicator begins
to flash, then stays on again. You will
also see a ‘‘CHECK TPMS
SYSTEM’’ message on the multi-
information display (see page ).284
On models without navigation system
On models with navigation system
Compact Spare Tire
360
INDICATOR LOCATION MARK
TREAD WEAR INDICATOR BAR
60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )
10/04/19 16:26:05 31SJC650_365
2011 Ridgeline
Turn on the hazard warning lights,
and turn the ignition switch to the
LOCK (0) position. Have all
passengers get out of the vehicle
while you change the tire.
Park the vehicle on firm, level, and
non-slippery ground. Put the
transmission in Park. Apply the
parking brake.
If you are towing a trailer, unhitch
it.
If you have a flat tire while driving,
stop in a safe place to change it.
Drive slowly along the shoulder until
you get to an exit or an area to stop
that is far away from the traffic lanes.
If you tow a trailer frequently, we
recommend that you use a regular
tire as a spare. You can store the
regular size spare tire on the tire tray,
but store the tool kit at the side of
the In-Bed Trunk (see page ),
and secure it.
2.1.
367
CONTINUED
Changing a Flat Tire
Taking Care of the Unexpected
361
TOOL BOX
SPARE TIRE
The vehicle can easily roll off
the jack, seriously injuring
anyone underneath.
Follow the directions for
changing a tire exactly, and
never get under the vehicle
when it is supported only by the
jack.
10/04/19 16:26:11 31SJC650_366
2011 Ridgeline
Open the In-Bed Trunk.
Remove the two tire tray holding
bolts.
Pull out the tire tray with the
handle, and hook the rear of the
tire tray to the guides on the back
edge of the In-Bed Trunk.
Unfasten the strap to remove the
tool box, and unscrew the wing
bolt.
Takeoutthecompactsparetire.
If you are using a cargo net or a
cargo cover in the In-Bed Trunk,
remove it before pulling out the tire
tray.
4.
3. 5. 6.
7.
Changing a Flat Tire
362
WING BOLT
TOOL BOX STRAP
TIRE
TRAYTIRE TRAY HOLDING BOLTS
10/04/19 16:26:19 31SJC650_367
2011 Ridgeline
CONTINUED
Loosen each wheel nut 1/2 turn
with the wheel nut wrench.
Place the jack under the jacking
point nearest the tire you need to
change.
Turn the dial at the bottom of the
jack clockwise until the top of the
jack contacts the jacking point.
Make sure the jacking point tab is
restinginthejacknotch.
8. 9. 10.
Changing a Flat Tire
Taking Care of the Unexpected
363
JACKING POINT
DIAL
10/04/19 16:26:26 31SJC650_368
2011 Ridgeline
Attach the stay to the extension,
then attach the wheel nut wrench
to the end of the extension.
Turn the jack dial (wheel nut
wrench) clockwise as shown to
raise the vehicle until the flat tire
is off the ground.
Make sure the stay, the extension,
and the wheel nut wrench are
securely attached.
Insert the hook at the end of the
stay into the opening on the dial at
the bottom of the jack.
11. 12. 13.
Changing a Flat Tire
364
EXTENSION
DIAL
CONNECTOR BUTTON
HOOK
STAY
WHEEL NUT WRENCH
CONNECTOR BUTTON
10/04/19 16:26:32 31SJC650_369
2011 Ridgeline
CONTINUED
Put on the spare tire. Put the
wheel nuts back on finger-tight,
then tighten them in a crisscross
pattern with the wheel nut wrench
until the wheel is firmly against
the hub. Do not try to tighten the
wheel nuts fully.
Lower the vehicle to the ground,
and remove the jack.
Before mounting the spare tire,
wipeanydirtoffthemounting
surface of the wheel and hub with
a clean cloth. Wipe the hub
carefully;itmaybehotfrom
driving.
The wheel cap cannot be removed
without first removing the wheel
nuts.
Remove the wheel nuts and the
wheel cap (on RT and Canadian
DX models) then remove the flat
tire. Handle the wheel nuts
carefully; they may be hot from
driving. Place the flat tire on the
ground with the outside surface
facing up.
14. 15.
16.
17.
On RT and Canadian DX models
Changing a Flat Tire
Taking Care of the Unexpected
365
BRAKE HUB
WHEEL CAP
RT/DX model is shown.
10/04/19 16:26:39 31SJC650_370
2011 Ridgeline
Tighten the wheel nuts securely in
the same crisscross pattern. Have
the wheel nut torque checked at
the nearest automotive service
facility.
Tighten the wheel nuts to:
Place the flat tire face up on the
tire tray.
Remove the spacer cone from the
wing bolt, turn it over, and put it
back on the bolt.
Securetheflattirebyscrewing
the wing bolt back into its hole.
Release the tire tray and slide it
back in place.
Tighten the tire tray holding bolts
securely.
Remove the center cap from the
flat tire.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
23.
24.
On RTS, RTL, and Canadian VP, EX-L
models
Changing a Flat Tire
366
WING BOLT
SPACER CONE
For normal
tire
For spare
tire
94 lbf·ft (127 N·m , 13 kgf·m)
10/04/19 16:26:47 31SJC650_371
2011 Ridgeline
Store the wheel cap or center cap
in the In-Bed Trunk. Make sure it
does not get scratched or
damaged.
When storing the flat tire, place
the tool box at the right side of the
In-Bed Trunk as shown.
Store the jack and the tools in the
tool box.
Refer to
(see page or ).
25.
26.
27.
28.
280 285
Changing a Flat Tire
Changing a Tire with
TPMS
Taking Care of the Unexpected
367
TOOL BOX
Loose items can be thrown out
of the vehicle in a crash and
could seriously injure the
occupants.
Store the wheel, jack, and tools
securely before driving.
10/04/19 16:26:54 31SJC650_372
2011 Ridgeline
As a temporary mounting location,
you can secure a spare tire on the
pickup bed, if needed.
Placethesparetireonthepickup
bed as shown.
Place the spacer cone in the wheel
hub,andsecurethesparetireto
the pickup bed with the wing bolt.
Ifyouremovethesparetirefromthe
pickup bed, reinstall the clip back
into its hole.
Remove the clip by pushing the
center of its top.
Remove the spare tire from the
tire tray (see page ).
Store or secure the tool box.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
362
Changing a Flat Tire
Securing a Spare Tire on the
Pickup Bed
368
SPACER CONE
WING BOLT
10/04/19 16:27:02 31SJC650_373
2011 Ridgeline
Diagnosing why the engine won’t
start falls into two areas, depending
on what you hear when you turn the
ignition switch to the START (III)
position:
Check the transmission interlock.
The transmission must be in Park
or neutral or the starter will not
operate.
Turn the ignition switch to the ON
(II) position. Turn on the
headlights, and check their
brightness. If the headlights are
very dim or do not come on at all,
the battery is discharged. See
on page .
If the headlights dim noticeably or
go out when you try to start the
engine, either the battery is
discharged or the connections are
corroded. Check the condition of
the battery and terminal connec-
tions (see page ). You can
then try jump starting the vehicle
from a booster battery (see page
).
In this case, the starter motor’s
speed sounds normal, or even faster
than normal, when you turn the
ignition switch to the START (III)
position, but the engine does not run.
Are you using a properly coded
key? An improperly coded key will
cause the immobilizer system
indicator in the instrument panel
to blink rapidly (see page ).
Turn the ignition switch to the
START (III) position. If the
headlights do not dim, check the
condition of the fuses. If the fuses
areOK,thereisprobably
something wrong with the
electrical circuit for the ignition
switch or starter motor. You will
need a qualified technician to
determine the problem. See
on page .
Check these things:
When you turn the ignition switch to
the START (III) position, you do not
hear the normal noise of the engine
trying to start. You may hear a
clicking sound, a series of clicks, or
nothing at all.
You can hear the starter motor
operating normally, or the starter
motor sounds like it is spinning
faster than normal, but the engine
does not start up and run.
You hear nothing, or almost
nothing. The engine’s starter
motor does not operate at all, or
operates very slowly.
370
383
356
370
101
CONTINUED
Jump Starting
The Starter Operates Normally
Emergency Towing
Nothing Happens or the Starter
Motor Operates Very Slowly
IftheEngineWon’tStart
Taking Care of the Unexpected
369
10/04/19 16:27:13 31SJC650_374
2011 Ridgeline
Are you using the proper starting
procedure? Refer to
on page .
There may be an electrical
problem, such as no power to the
fuel pump. Check all the fuses
(see page ).
Ifyoufindnothingwrong,youwill
need a qualified technician to find
the problem. See
on page .
Although this seems like a simple
procedure, you should take several
precautions.
You cannot start your vehicle by
pushing or pulling it.
Do you have fuel? Check the fuel
gauge; the low fuel indicator may
not be working.
Turn off all electrical accessories:
heater, A/C, climate control, audio
system, lights, etc. Put the
transmission in Park, and set the
parking brake.
Open the hood, and check the
physical condition of the battery.
In very cold weather, check the
condition of the electrolyte. If it
seems slushy or frozen, do not try
jump starting until it thaws.
1.
2.
270
378
383
Starting the
Engine
Emergency
Towing
Jump Starting
If the Engine Won’t Start, Jump Starting
To Jump Start Your Vehicle:
370
A battery can explode if you do
not follow the correct procedure,
seriously injuring anyone
nearby.
Keep all sparks, open flames,
and smoking materials away
from the battery.
If a battery sits in extreme cold, the
electrolyte inside can freeze.
Attempting to jump start with a frozen
battery can cause it to rupture.
10/04/19 16:27:22 31SJC650_375
2011 Ridgeline
−
＋
＋
If the booster battery is in another
vehicle, have an assistant start
that vehicle and run it at a fast idle.
Start the vehicle. If the starter
motor still operates slowly, check
that the jumper cables have good
metal-to-metal contact.
Keep the ends of the jumper cables
away from each other and any metal
on the vehicle until everything is
disconnected. Otherwise, you may
cause an electrical short.
Connect the second jumper cable
to the negative ( ) terminal on
the booster battery. Connect the
other end to the grounding strap
as shown. Do not connect this
jumper cable to any other part of
the engine.
Connect one jumper cable to the
positive ( ) terminal on your
vehicle’s battery. Connect the
other end to the positive ( )
terminal on the booster battery.
The numbers in the illustration show
you the order to connect the jumper
cables.
Once your vehicle is running,
disconnect the negative cable from
your vehicle, then from the
booster battery. Disconnect the
positive cable from your vehicle,
then from the booster battery.
4.
6.
7.
5.
3.
Jump Starting
Taking Care of the Unexpected
371
BOOSTER BATTERY
10/04/19 16:27:30 31SJC650_376
2011 Ridgeline
If you see steam and/or spray
coming from under the hood, turn
off the engine. Wait until you see
no more signs of steam or spray,
then open the hood.
If you do not see steam or spray,
leave the engine running and
watch the temperature gauge. If
the high heat is due to overloading,
the engine should start to cool
down almost immediately. If it
does, wait until the temperature
gauge comes down to the midpoint,
then continue driving.
Safely pull to the side of the road.
Put the transmission in Park, and
set the parking brake. Turn off all
the accessories, and turn on the
hazard warning lights.
The pointer of your vehicle’s
temperature gauge should stay in
the midrange under most conditions.
If it climbs to the red mark, you
should determine the reason (hot
day, driving up a steep hill, etc.).
If the vehicle overheats, you should
take immediate action. The only
indication may be the temperature
gauge climbing to or above the red
mark. Or you may see steam or
spray coming from under the hood.
1.
2.
3.
IftheEngineOverheats
372
Steam and spray from an
overheated engine can
seriously scald you.
Do not open the hood if steam
is coming out.
Driving with the temperature gauge
pointer at the red mark can cause
serious damage to the engine.
10/04/19 16:27:37 31SJC650_377
2011 Ridgeline
If the temperature gauge stays at
the red mark, turn off the engine.
Look for any obvious coolant leaks,
such as a split radiator hose.
Everything is still extremely hot,
so use caution. If you find a leak, it
must be repaired before you
continue driving (see
on page ).
Put the radiator cap back on
tightly. Run the engine, and check
the temperature gauge. If it goes
back to the red mark, the engine
needs repair (see
on page ).
If the temperature stays normal,
check the coolant level in the
radiator reserve tank. If it has
gone down, add coolant to the
MAX mark. Put the cap back on
tightly.
If you do not find an obvious leak,
check the coolant level in the
radiator reserve tank. Add coolant
if the level is below the MIN mark.
If there was no coolant in the
reserve tank, you may need to add
coolant to the radiator. Let the
engine cool down until the pointer
reaches the middle of the tempera-
ture gauge, or lower, before check-
ing the radiator.
Using gloves or a large heavy
cloth, turn the radiator cap
counterclockwise, without pushing
down, to the first stop. After the
pressure releases, push down on
the cap, and turn it until it comes
off.
Start the engine, and set the
temperature to maximum heat
(climate control to AUTO at
‘‘ ’’). Add coolant to the
radiator up to the base of the filler
neck. If you do not have the
proper coolant mixture available,
you can add plain water.
Remember to have the cooling
system drained and refilled with
the proper mixture as soon as you
can.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
383
383
Emergency
Towing
Emergency
Towing
IftheEngineOverheats
Taking Care of the Unexpected
373
Removing the radiator cap
while the engine is hot can
cause the coolant to spray out,
seriously scalding you.
Always let the engine and
radiator cool down before
removing the radiator cap.
10/04/19 16:27:46 31SJC650_378
2011 Ridgeline
Safely pull off the road, and shut
off the engine. Turn on the hazard
warning indicators.
Let the vehicle sit for a minute.
Open the hood, and check the oil
level (see page ). An engine
very low on oil can lose pressure
during cornering and other driving
maneuvers.
If necessary, add oil to bring the
level back to the full mark on the
dipstick (see page ).
Start the engine, and watch the oil
pressure indicator. If it does not go
out within 10 seconds, turn off the
engine. There is a mechanical
problem that needs to be repaired
before you can continue driving
(see on page
).
This indicator should never come on
when the engine is running. If it
starts flashing or stays on, the oil
pressure has dropped very low or
lost pressure. Serious engine
damage is possible, and you should
take immediate action.
You will also see a ‘‘CHECK
ENGINE OIL LEVEL’’ message on
the multi-information display when
this indicator comes on.
If the charging system indicator
comes on brightly when the engine
is running, the battery is not being
charged.
You will also see a ‘‘CHECK
CHARGING SYSTEM’’ message on
the multi-information display (see
page ).
Immediately turn off all electrical
accessories. Try not to use other
electrically operated controls such as
the power windows. Keep the engine
running; starting the engine will
discharge the battery rapidly.
Go to a service station or garage
where you can get technical
assistance.
1.
2.
3.
4.
253
326
383
90
On models with navigation system
On models with navigation system
Emergency Towing
Low Oil Pressure
Indicator
Charging System
Indicator
Low Oil Pressure Indicator, Charging System Indicator
374
Running the engine with low oil
pressure can cause serious mechanical
damage almost immediately. Turn off
the engine as soon as you can safely get
the vehicle stopped.
10/04/19 16:27:57 31SJC650_379
2011 Ridgeline
If this indicator comes on
while driving, it means one
of the engine’s emissions control
systems may have a problem. Even
though you may feel no difference in
your vehicle’s performance, it can
reduce your fuel economy and cause
increased emissions. Continued
operation may cause serious damage.
If you have recently refueled your
vehicle, the indicator coming on
could be due to a loose or missing
fuel fill cap. Tighten the cap until it
clicks at least once. Tightening the
cap will not turn the indicator off
immediately; it can take several days
of normal driving.
If the indicator comes on repeatedly,
even though it may turn off as you
continue driving, have your vehicle
checked by the dealer as soon as
possible.
The indicator may also come on with
the ‘‘D’’ indicator.
You will also see a ‘‘CHECK FUEL
CAP’’ message on the information
display.
You will also see a ‘‘TIGHTEN FUEL
CAP’’ message on the multi-
information display.
You will also see a ‘‘CHECK
EMISSION SYSTEM’’ message on
the multi-information display (see
page ).90
On models without navigation system
On models with navigation system
On models with navigation system
Malfunction Indicator Lamp
Taking Care of the Unexpected
375
If you keep driving with the
malfunction indicator lamp on, you can
damage your vehicle’s emissions
controls and engine. Those repairs may
not be covered by your vehicle’s
warranties.
10/04/19 16:28:04 31SJC650_380
2011 Ridgeline
Your vehicle has certain ‘‘readiness
codes’’ that are part of the on-board
diagnostics for the emissions
systems. In some states, part of the
emissions testing is to make sure
these codes are set. If they are not
set, the test cannot be completed.
If the battery in your vehicle has
been disconnected or gone dead,
thesecodesmaybeerased.Itcan
take several days of driving under
various conditions to set the codes
again.
To check if they are set, turn the
ignition switch to the ON (II)
position, without starting the engine.
The malfunction indicator lamp will
come on for 20 seconds. If it then
goes off, the readiness codes are set.
If it blinks five times, the readiness
codes are not set. If possible, do not
take your vehicle for an emissions
test until the readiness codes are set.
Refer to for
more information (see page ).
If the brake system indicator comes
on while driving, the brake fluid level
is probably low. Press lightly on the
brake pedal to see if it feels normal.
If it does, check the brake fluid level
thenexttimeyoustopataservice
station (see page ).
The brake system indicator normally
comesonwhenyouturntheignition
switch to the ON (II) position, and as
a reminder to check the parking
brake. It will stay on if you do not
fully release the parking brake.
400
334
Readiness Codes
Emissions Testing
Brake System
Indicator
Malfunction Indicator Lamp, Brake System Indicator
376
U.S. Canada
10/04/19 16:28:11 31SJC650_381
2011 Ridgeline
However, if the brake pedal does not
feel normal, you should take
immediate action. A problem in one
part of the system’s dual circuit
design will still give you braking at
two wheels. You will feel the brake
pedal go down much farther before
the vehicle begins to slow down, and
you will have to press harder on the
pedal.
You will also see a ‘‘BRAKE FLUID
LOW’’ message on the multi-
information display (see page ).
If the fluid level is low, take your
vehicle to a dealer, and have the
brake system inspected for leaks or
worn brake pads.
Slow down by shifting to a lower
gear, and pull to the side of the road
when it is safe. Because of the long
distance needed to stop, it is
hazardous to drive the vehicle. You
should have it towed, and repaired as
soon as possible (see
on page ).
If you must drive the vehicle a short
distance in this condition, drive
slowly and carefully.
If the ABS indicator and the VSA
system indicator come on with the
brake system indicator, have your
vehicle inspected by your dealer
immediately.
You will also see a ‘‘CHECK BRAKE
SYSTEM’’ message on the multi-
information display (see page ).
90
90
383
On models with navigation system
On models with navigation system
Emergency
Towing
Brake System Indicator
Taking Care of the Unexpected
377
10/04/19 16:28:17 31SJC650_382
2011 Ridgeline
The vehicle’s fuses are contained in
threefuseboxes.
The primary under-hood fuse box is
on the passenger’s side. The
secondary fuse box is next to the
brake fluid reservoir. To open them,
pushthetabsasshown.
The interior fuse box is on the
driver’s lower left side. To remove
the fuse box lid, put your finger in
the notch on the lid, and pull it
outward slightly, then pull it toward
you and take it out of its hinges.
If something electrical in your
vehicle stops working, check for a
blown fuse first. Determine from the
chart on pages and , or the
diagram on the fuse box lid, which
fuse or fuses control that device.
Check those fuses first, but check all
the fuses before deciding that a
blown fuse is the cause. Replace any
blown fuses, and check if the device
works.
381 382
Checking and Replacing Fuses
Fuses
378
UNDER-HOOD (SECONDARY)UNDER-HOOD (PRIMARY)INTERIOR
NOTCH
10/04/19 16:28:25 31SJC650_383
2011 Ridgeline
Check the smaller fuses in the
under-hood fuse boxes and all the
fuses in the interior fuse box by
pulling out each one with the fuse
puller provided in the primary
under-hood fuse box.
Turn the ignition switch to the
LOCK (0) position. Make sure the
headlights and all other
accessories are off.
Check each of the large fuses in
the primary under-hood fuse box
by looking through the side
window at the wire inside.
Removing these fuses requires a
Phillips-head screwdriver.Remove the cover from the fuse
box.
4.3.1.
2.
CONTINUED
Fuses
Taking Care of the Unexpected
379
BLOWN
FUSE PULLER
BLOWN
FUSE
10/04/19 16:28:32 31SJC650_384
2011 Ridgeline
If the driver’s power window fuse is
removed, the AUTO function of the
driver’s window may be disabled. To
reset the AUTO function, see page
.
If you cannot drive the vehicle
without fixing the problem, and you
do not have a spare fuse, take a fuse
of the same rating or a lower rating
from one of the other circuits. Make
sureyoucandowithoutthatcircuit
temporarily (such as the accessory
power socket or radio).
If you replace the blown fuse with a
spare fuse that has a lower rating, it
might blow out again. This does not
indicate anything wrong. Replace the
fuse with one of the correct rating as
soon as you can.
Look for a blown wire inside the
fuse.Ifitisblown,replacethefuse
withoneofthesparefusesofthe
same rating or lower.
If the radio fuse is removed, the
audio system will disable itself. The
nexttimeyouturnontheradioyou
will see ‘‘CODE’’ in the frequency
display. Use the preset bars to enter
thecode(seepage ).
If the replacement fuse of the
same rating blows in a short time,
there is probably a serious
electrical problem in your vehicle.
Leave the blown fuse in that
circuit and have your vehicle
checked by a qualified technician.
5.
6.
128
206
Fuses
380
BLOWN
Replacing a fuse with one that has a
higher rating greatly increases the
chances of damaging the electrical
system. If you do not have a
replacement fuse with the proper
rating for the circuit, install one with
a lower rating.
10/04/19 16:28:38 31SJC650_385
2011 Ridgeline
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
−
−
−
＋
＊
＊ If equipped
If equipped
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
1
2
3
4
5
6
Back Light
VSA FSR
VSA MTR
VTM-4
Front Accessory Sockets
Electric Brake
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
7
8
9
10
11
Left Headlight Low Beam
Not Used
Left Headlight High Beam
Small Lights
Right Headlight High Beam
Right Headlight Low Beam
Back Up
FI ECU (PCM)
DBW
Front Fog Light
Heated Seat
MG Clutch
10 A
10 A
15 A
10 A
10 A
7.5 A
15 A
15 A
20 A
15 A
7.5 A
(7.5 A)
20 A
40 A
20 A
15 A
(20 A)
(20 A)
(7.5 A)
(20 A)
7.5 A
(20 A)
20 A
20 A
40 A
15 A
40 A
20 A
30 A
30 A
40 A
40 A
120 A
60 A
50 A
Horn, Stop
Defroster
Back Up, ACC
Hazard
Option 1
AC Inverter
Cooling Fan
Condenser Fan
Heater Motor
Seat
Battery
BIGIMain
Power Window
Spare Fuses
Small Lights
Stop/Turn Lights
Charge
TPMS
Moonroof
:
:
No.
No. Circuits Protected
No.
No.
Circuits ProtectedAmps.
Amps. Amps.
Amps. Circuits Protected
Circuits Protected
24 28
Fuse Locations
Taking Care of the Unexpected
381
PRIMARY UNDER-HOOD FUSE BOX
SECONDARY UNDER-HOOD FUSE BOX
10/04/19 16:28:50 31SJC650_386
2011 Ridgeline
＊
＊
＊
−
−
−
＊
No.
No. Circuits Protected
No. Amps.
Circuits ProtectedAmps.
Amps.
Circuits Protected
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
If equipped
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
IG, Wiper
Not Used
Driver’s Power Seat Lumbar
Driver’s Power Seat Sliding
Not Used
Driver’s Power Seat Reclining
Not Used
IG ACG
IG Fuel Pump
IG Washer
IG Meter
IG SRS
IGP
Left Rear Window
Right Rear Window
Passenger’s Window
Back Window
Driver’s Window
VBSOL2
IG HAC
IG VSA/ABS
ACC
Not Used
1 7.5 A
Bed Lights
IG Coil
Daytime Running Light
LAF
Radio
Interior Lights
Back Up
Door Lock
Rear Accessory Socket
OPDS
7.5 A
15 A
10 A
15 A
20 A
10 A
7.5 A
20 A
10 A
7.5 A
30 A
(10 A)
(20 A)
(20 A)
15 A
15 A
7.5 A
7.5 A
10 A
7.5 A
20 A
20 A
20 A
20 A
20 A
7.5 A
10 A
7.5 A
7.5 A
(7.5 A)
STS
:
Fuse Locations
382
INTERIOR FUSE BOX UPPER AREAINTERIOR FUSE BOX
Driver’s Side
10/04/19 16:28:59 31SJC650_387
2011 Ridgeline
CONTINUED
If your vehicle needs to be towed,
call a professional towing service or
organization. Never tow your vehicle
with just a rope or chain. It is very
dangerous.
The operator will load
your vehicle on the back of a truck.
Any other method of towing will
damage the drive system. When you
contact the towing agency, inform
them a flat-bed is required.
If your vehicle gets stuck in sand,
mud, or snow, call a towing service
to pull it out (see the previous
column).
For very short distances, such as
freeing the vehicle, you can use the
tie down hooks on the lower of the
front and rear bumpers.
Emergency Towing, If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck
The only way you can safely tow
your vehicle is with flat-bed
equipment.
If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck
Taking Care of the Unexpected
383
FRONT
REAR
TIE DOWN
HOOK
TIE DOWN
HOOK
‘‘Rocking’’ your vehicle between
forward and reverse gear or revving up
the engine and allowing the wheels to
spin freely at high speeds can damage
the automatic transmission. Use a tow
service to prevent transmission damage.
Towing your vehicle with two tires on
the ground will damage parts of the
4WD system. It should be transported
on a flat-bed truck or trailer.
10/04/19 16:29:07 31SJC650_388
2011 Ridgeline
If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck
384
To avoid damage to your vehicle, use
the tie down hooks for straight, flat
ground towing only. Do not tow at an
angle. These hooks should not be used
for open-road towing.
10/04/19 16:29:10 31SJC650_389
2011 Ridgeline
−
Thediagramsinthissectiongive
you the dimensions and capacities of
your vehicle and the locations of the
identification numbers. It also
includes information you should
know about your vehicle’s tires and
emissions control systems.
................Identification Numbers . 386
................................Specifications . 388
DOT Tire Quality Grading
......................(U.S. Vehicles) . 390
Uniform Tire Quality
..................................Grading . 390
.................................Treadwear . 390
......................................Traction . 390
.............................Temperature . 391
.................................Tire Labeling . 392
Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) Required Federal
............................Explanation . 394
.......................Emissions Controls . 397
.....................The Clean Air Act . 397
Crankcase Emissions Control
....................................System . 397
Evaporative Emissions Control
....................................System . 397
Onboard Refueling Vapor
................................Recovery . 397
...Exhaust Emissions Controls . 398
....................PGM-FI System . 398
Ignition Timing Control
................................System . 398
Exhaust Gas Recirculation
...................(EGR) System . 398
Three Way Catalytic
...........................Converter . 398
....................Replacement Parts . 398
..Three Way Catalytic Converter . 399
........................Emissions Testing . 400
Technical Information
Technical Inf ormation
385
10/04/19 16:29:14 31SJC650_390
2011 Ridgeline
Your vehicle has several identifying
numbers in various places.
The vehicle identification number
(VIN) is the 17-digit number your
dealer uses to register your vehicle
for warranty purposes. It is also
necessary for licensing and insuring
your vehicle. The easiest place to
find the VIN is on a plate fastened to
the top of the dashboard. You can
seeitbylookingthroughthe
windshield on the driver’s side. It is
also on the certification label
attached to the driver’s doorjamb,
and is stamped on the engine
compartment bulkhead. The VIN is
also provided in bar code on the
certification label.
Identification Numbers
386
CERTIFICATION LABEL
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (VIN)
10/04/19 16:29:18 31SJC650_391
2011 Ridgeline
The engine number is stamped into
the engine block. It is on the front.
The transmission number is on a
label on top of the transmission.
Identification Numbers
Technical Inf ormation
387
ENGINE NUMBER
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION NUMBER
10/04/19 16:29:22 31SJC650_392
2011 Ridgeline
−−
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
Specifications
388
Air Conditioning
Seating Capacities
Dimensions
Capacities
Weights
206.9 in (5,255 mm)
77.8 in (1,976 mm)
70.3 in (1,786 mm)
Refrigerant type
Charge quantity
Lubricant type
HFC-134a (R-134a)
19.4 21.2 oz (550 600 g)
ND-OIL8
Total
Front
Rear 3
2
5
1,470 lbs (670 kg)
1,520 lbs (690 kg)
10,088 lbs (4,575 kg)
Length
Width
Height
Wheelbase
Track
66.9 in (1,700 mm)
67.1 in (1,705 mm)
122.0 in (3,100 mm)
The GCWR must be reduced 2 percent for every 1,000 feet (305
meters) of elevation.
Fuel tank
Engine
coolant
Engine oil
Automatic
transmission
fluid
Rear
differential
fluid
22.01 US gal (83.3 )
1.64 US gal (6.2 )
2.14 US gal (8.1 )
4.2 US qt (4.0 )
4.5 US qt (4.3 )
5.3 US qt (5.0
)
3.3 US qt (3.1
)
8.5 US qt (8.0 )
2.79 US qt (2.64 )
3.01 US qt (2.85
)
Including the coolant in the reserve tank and that remaining in the
engine
Reserve tank capacity:
0.16 US gal (0.6 )
Excluding the oil remaining in the engine
71.2 in (1,808 mm)
Gross vehicle weight rating
Gross combined weight
rating (GCWR)
Maximum load limit
(Payload)
See the tire information label
attached to the driver’s doorjamb.
Approx.Front
Rear
1:
2:
1:
2:
3:
Change
Total
Change
Including
filter
Without
filter
Total
Change
Total
Change
Total
On vehicles without moonroof
On vehicles with moonroof
1:
2:
On vehicles without moonroof
On vehicles with moonroof
1
2
3
1
2
1
2
10/04/19 16:29:39 31SJC650_393
2011 Ridgeline
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−＊
＊
＊
＊
Specifications
Technical Inf ormation
389
Fuses
Engine
Alignment
Lights
Battery
Tires
Capacities
Interior
Under-hood
Type
BorexStroke
Displacement
Compression ratio
Spark plugs
Toe-in
Camber
Caster
3.50 x 3.66 in (89.0 x 93.0 mm)
211.8 cu-in (3,471 cm )
10.0 : 1
ILZKR7B11
SXU22HCR11
0.00 in (0.0 mm)
0.00 in (0.0 mm)
0°50’
0°50’
1°53’
P245/65R17 105T
Water cooled 4-stroke SOHC VTEC,
V6 gasoline engine
0.45 US qt (0.43 )
0.48 US qt (0.45 )
4.8 US qt (4.5 )
Headlights
Front turn signal/parking/
hazard lights
Daytime running light
Fog light
Rear turn signal/hazard lights
Brake/Taillights
Back-up lights
License plate lights
High-mount brake lights
Individual map lights
Bed lights
Console compartment light
Glove box light
Vanity mirror light
Door courtesy lights
12 V 60/55 W (HB2)
12 V 28/8 W
12 V 21 W
12 V
12 V
12 V
12 V
12 V
12 V
12 V
12 V
12 V
12 V
12 V
21/5 W
18 W
3CP
3CP
8W
5W
3CP
1.4 W
3.4 W
2W
3.8 W
Capacity 12 V
12 V
72 AH/20 HR
60 AH/5 HR
Size
Pressure
60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm
)
32 psi (220 kPa , 2.2 kgf/cm )
T165/90R17 105M
12 V 55 W
12 V 60 W
P245/60R18 104T
See page 382 or the fuse label
attached to the inside of the fuse
box lid under the dashboard.
See page 381 or the fuse box lid.
Transfer
assembly
fluid
Windshield
washer
reservoir
Front
Rear
Front
Rear
Front
Front
Rear
NGK:
DENSO:
High/Low
Change
Total
Front/Rear
Spare
Front/Rear
Spare
1:
2:
U.S. RT, RTS models, and Canadian DX, VP models
U.S. RTL models, and Canadian EX-L models
(HB3)
(H11)
1
2
10/04/19 16:30:06 31SJC650_394
2011 Ridgeline
The tires on your vehicle meet all
U.S. Federal Safety Requirements.
All tires are also graded for
treadwear, traction, and temperature
performance according to
Department of Transportation
(DOT) standards. The following
explains these gradings.
The treadwear grade is a compara-
tive rating based on the wear rate of
the tire when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified government
test course. For example, a tire
graded 150 would wear one and one-
half (1 1/2) times as well on the
government course as a tire graded
100. The relative performance of
tires depends upon the actual condi-
tions of their use, however, and may
depart significantly from the norm
due to variations in driving habits,
service practices and differences in
road characteristics and climate.
The traction grades, from highest to
lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. Those
grades represent the tire’s ability to
stop on wet pavement as measured
under controlled conditions on
specified government test surfaces
of asphalt and concrete. A tire
marked C may have poor traction
performance.
Warning: The traction grade
assignedtothistireisbasedon
straight-ahead braking traction tests,
and does not include acceleration,
cornering, hydroplaning, or peak
traction characteristics.
Quality grades can be found where
applicable on the tire sidewall
between tread shoulder and
maximum section width. For
example:
All passenger car tires must conform
to Federal Safety Requirements in
addition to these grades.
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Treadwear Traction
Treadwear 200
Traction AA
Temperature A
DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles)
390
10/04/19 16:30:14 31SJC650_395
2011 Ridgeline
Warning: The temperature grade for
this tire is established for a tire that
is properly inflated and not
overloaded. Excessive speed,
underinflation, or excessive loading,
either separately or in combination,
can cause heat buildup and possible
tire failure.
The temperature grades are A (the
highest), B, and C, representing the
tire’s resistance to the generation of
heat and its ability to dissipate heat
when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified indoor
laboratory test wheel. Sustained high
temperature can cause the material
of the tire to degenerate and reduce
tire life, and excessive temperature
can lead to sudden tire failure. The
grade C corresponds to a level of
performance which all passenger car
tires must meet under the Federal
Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No.
109. Grades B and A represent
higher levels of performance on the
laboratory test wheel than the
minimum required by law.
DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles)
Temperature
Technical Inf ormation
391
10/04/19 16:30:18 31SJC650_396
2011 Ridgeline
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
The tires that came on your vehicle
have a number of markings. Those
you should be aware of are described
below.
Rim diameter in inches.
Load index (a numerical code
associated with the maximum
load the tire can carry).
Speed symbol (an
alphabetical code indicating
the maximum speed rating).
Whenever tires are replaced, they
should be replaced with tires of the
same size. The following is an
exampleoftiresizewithan
explanation of what each component
means.
Vehicletype(Pindicates
passenger vehicle).
Tire width in millimeters.
Aspect ratio (the tire’s section
height as a percentage of its
width).
Tire construction code (R
indicates radial).
R
65
245
P
17
105
T
Tire Labeling
Tire Size
392
TIRE LABELING EXAMPLE
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(4) (3) (2)
(1)
(1)
Tire Identification Number (TIN)
Tire Size
Maximum Tire Pressure
Maximum Tire Load
P245/65R17 105T
10/04/19 16:30:28 31SJC650_397
2011 Ridgeline
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
The tire identification number (TIN)
is a group of numbers and letters
that look like the following example.
TIN is located on the sidewall of the
tire.
Week
Year
Date of manufacture.
Tire type code.
Manufacturer’s
identification mark.
This indicates that the
tire meets all
requirements of the U.S.
Department of
Transportation.
Cold Tire Pressure The tire air
pressure when the vehicle has been
parked for at least three hours or
driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km).
Load Rating Means the maximum
load that a tire is rated to carry for a
given inflation pressure.
Maximum Inflation Pressure The
maximum tire air pressure that the
tire can hold.
Maximum Load Rating Means the
load rating for a tire at the maximum
permissible inflation pressure for
that tire.
Recommended Inflation Pressure
The cold tire inflation pressure
recommended by the manufacturer.
Treadwear Indicators (TWI)
Means the projections within the
principal grooves designed to give a
visual indication of the degrees of
wear of the tread.
DOT
B97R
FW6X
2202
Tire Identification Number (TIN)
Tire Labeling
Glossary of Tire Terminology
Technical Inf ormation
393
DOT B97R FW6X 2202
10/04/19 16:30:40 31SJC650_398
2011 Ridgeline
−
Accordingly, when the low tire
pressure telltale illuminates, you
should stop and check your tires as
soon as possible, and inflate them to
the proper pressure.
Driving on a significantly under-
inflated tire causes the tire to
overheat and can lead to tire failure.
Under-inflation also reduces fuel
efficiency and tire tread life, and may
affect the vehicle’s handling and
stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a
substitute for proper tire
maintenance, and it is the driver’s
responsibility to maintain correct tire
pressure, even if under-inflation has
not reached the level to trigger
illumination of the TPMS low tire
pressure telltale.
(If your vehicle has tires of a
different size than the size indicated
on the vehicle placard or tire
inflation pressure label, you should
determine the proper tire inflation
pressure for those tires.)
Each tire, including the spare (if
provided), should be checked
monthly when cold and inflated to
the inflation pressure recommended
by the vehicle manufacturer on the
vehicle placard or tire inflation
pressure label.
As an added safety feature, your
vehicle has been equipped with a tire
pressure monitoring system (TPMS)
that illuminates a low tire pressure
telltale
when one or more of your tires is
significantly under-inflated.
All Models
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Required Federal Explanation
394
10/04/19 16:30:47 31SJC650_399
2011 Ridgeline
−
Always check the TPMS malfunction
telltale after replacing one or more
tires or wheels on your vehicle to
ensure that the replacement or
alternate tires and wheels allow the
TPMS to continue to function
properly.
TPMS malfunctions may occur for a
variety of reasons, including the
installation of replacement or
alternate tires or wheels on the
vehicle that prevent the TPMS from
functioning properly.
When the malfunction indicator is
illuminated,
the system may not be able to detect
or signal low tire pressure as
intended.
Your vehicle has also been equipped
with a TPMS malfunction indicator
to indicate when the system is not
operating properly. The TPMS
malfunction indicator is provided by
a separate telltale, which displays the
symbol ‘‘TPMS’’ when illuminated.
On models without navigation system
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Required Federal Explanation
Technical Inf ormation
395
10/04/19 16:30:52 31SJC650_400
2011 Ridgeline
−
TPMS malfunctions may occur for a
variety of reasons, including the
installation of replacement or
alternate tires or wheels on the
vehicle that prevent the TPMS from
functioning properly.
Always check the TPMS malfunction
telltale after replacing one or more
tires or wheels on your vehicle to
ensure that the replacement or
alternate tires and wheels allow the
TPMS to continue to function
properly.
When the malfunction indicator is
illuminated, the system may not be
able to detect or signal low tire
pressure as intended.
Your vehicle has also been equipped
with a TPMS malfunction indicator
to indicate when the system is not
operating properly. The TPMS
malfunction indicator is combined
with the low tire pressure telltale.
When the system detects a
malfunction, the telltale will flash for
approximately one minute and then
remain continuously illuminated.
This sequence will continue upon
subsequent vehicle start-ups as long
as the malfunction exists.
On models with navigation system
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Required Federal Explanation
396
10/04/19 16:30:57 31SJC650_401
2011 Ridgeline
＊
＊
The burning of gasoline in your
vehicle’s engine produces several by-
products. Some of these are carbon
monoxide (CO), oxides of nitrogen
(NOx), and hydrocarbons (HC).
Gasoline evaporating from the tank
also produces hydrocarbons. Con-
trolling the production of NOx, CO,
and HC is important to the environ-
ment. Under certain conditions of
sunlight and climate, NOx and HC
react to form photochemical ‘‘smog.’’
Carbon monoxide does not contri-
bute to smog creation, but it is a
poisonous gas.
The United States Clean Air Act
sets standards for automobile
emissions. It also requires that
automobile manufacturers explain to
owners how their emissions controls
workandwhattodotomaintain
them. This section summarizes how
the emissions controls work.
Scheduled maintenance is on page
.
In Canada, Honda vehicles comply
with the Canadian emission
requirements, as specified in an
agreement with Environment
Canada, at the time they are
manufactured.
Your vehicle has a positive
crankcase ventilation system. This
keeps gasses that build up in the
engine’s crankcase from going into
the atmosphere. The positive
crankcase ventilation valve routes
them from the crankcase back to the
intake manifold. They are then
drawn into the engine and burned.
As gasoline evaporates in the fuel
tank, an evaporative emissions
control canister filled with charcoal
adsorbs the vapor. It is stored in this
canister while the engine is off. After
the engine is started and warmed up,
the vapor is drawn into the engine
and burned during driving.
The onboard refueling vapor
recovery (ORVR) system captures
the fuel vapors during refueling. The
vapors are adsorbed in a canister
filled with activated carbon. While
driving, the fuel vapors are drawn
into the engine and burned off.
324
The Clean Air Act
Crankcase Emissions Control
System
Evaporative Emissions Control
System
Onboard Refueling Vapor
Recovery
Emissions Controls
Technical Inf ormation
397
10/04/19 16:31:05 31SJC650_402
2011 Ridgeline
The exhaust emissions controls
include four systems: PGM-FI,
ignition timing control, exhaust gas
recirculation, and three way catalytic
converter. These four systems work
together to control the engine’s
combustion and minimize the
amount of HC, CO, and NOx that
come out the tailpipe. The exhaust
emissions control systems are
separate from the crankcase and
evaporative emissions control
systems.
The PGM-FI system uses sequential
multiport fuel injection.
It has three subsystems: air intake,
engine control, and fuel control. The
powertrain control module (PCM)
uses various sensors to determine
how much air is going into the
engine. It then controls how much
fuel to inject under all operating
conditions.
This system constantly adjusts the
ignition timing, reducing the amount
of HC, CO, and NOx produced.
The exhaust gas recirculation (EGR)
system takes some of the exhaust
gas and routes it back into the intake
manifold. Adding exhaust gas to the
air/fuel mixture reduces the amount
of NOx produced when the fuel is
burned.
The three way catalytic converter is
in the exhaust system. Through
chemical reactions, it converts HC,
CO, and NOx in the engine’s exhaust
to carbon dioxide (CO ), nitrogen
(N ), and water vapor.
The emissions control systems are
covered by warranties separate
from
the rest of your vehicle.
Read your
warranty manual for
The emissions control systems are
designed and certified to work to-
gether in reducing emissions to
levels that comply with the Clean Air
Act. To make sure the emissions
remain low, you should use only new
Honda replacement parts or their
equivalent for repairs. Using lower
qualitypartsmayincreasethe
emissions from your vehicle.
2
2
Exhaust Emissions Controls Replacement Parts
PGM-FI System
Ignition Timing Control System
Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR)
System
Three Way Catalytic Converter
Emissions Controls
398
10/04/19 16:31:14 31SJC650_403
more information.
2011 Ridgeline
The three way catalytic converter
must operate at a high temperature
for the chemical reactions to take
place. It can set on fire any
combustible materials that come
near it. Park your vehicle away from
high grass, dry leaves, or other
flammables.
A defective three way catalytic
converter contributes to air pollution,
and can impair your engine’s per-
formance. Follow these guidelines to
protect your vehicle’s three way
catalytic converter.
Always use unleaded gasoline.
Even a small amount of leaded
gasoline can contaminate the
catalyst metals, making the three
way catalytic converter ineffective.
Keep the engine well maintained.
Have your vehicle diagnosed and
repaired if it is misfiring, back-
firing, stalling, or otherwise not
running properly.
The three way catalytic converter
contains precious metals that serve
as catalysts, promoting chemical
reactions to convert the exhaust
gasses without affecting the metals.
The catalytic converter is referred to
as a three-way catalyst, since it acts
on HC, CO, and NOx. A replacement
unit must be an original Honda part
or its equivalent.
Three Way Catalytic Converter
Technical Inf ormation
399
THREE WAY CATALYTIC CONVERTER
WARM UP THREE WAY CATALYTIC
CONVERTERS
10/04/19 16:31:21 31SJC650_404
2011 Ridgeline
If you take your vehicle for an
emissions test shortly after the
battery has been disconnected or
gone dead, it may not pass the test.
This is because of certain ‘‘readiness
codes’’ that must be set in the on-
board diagnostics for the emissions
systems. These codes are erased
when the battery is disconnected,
and set again only after several days
of driving under a variety of
conditions.
If the testing facility determines that
the readiness codes are not set, you
will be requested to return at a later
date to complete the test. If you must
get the vehicle retested within the
next two or three days, you can
condition the vehicle for retesting by
doing the following.
Make sure the gas tank is nearly,
but not completely, full (around
3/4).
Without touching the accelerator
pedal, start the engine, and let it
idle for 20 seconds.
Make sure the vehicle has been
parked with the engine off for 6
hours or more.
Make sure the ambient
temperature is between 40° and
95°F (4° and 35°C).
Keep the vehicle in Park. Increase
the engine speed to 2,000 rpm, and
hold it there until the temperature
gauge rises to at least 1/4 of the
scale (about 3 minutes).
Without touching the accelerator
pedal, let the engine idle for 20
seconds.
Select a nearby lightly traveled
major highway where you can
maintain a speed of 50 to 60 mph
(80to97km/h)foratleast20
minutes. Drive on the highway in
D. Do not use the cruise control.
When traffic allows, drive for 90
seconds without moving the
accelerator pedal. (Vehicle speed
may vary slightly; this is okay.) If
you cannot do this for a
continuous 90 seconds because of
traffic conditions, drive for at least
30 seconds, then repeat it two
more times (for a total of 90
seconds).
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.Testing of Readiness Codes
Emissions Testing
400
10/04/19 16:31:30 31SJC650_405
2011 Ridgeline
Then drive in city/suburban
traffic for at least 10 minutes.
When traffic conditions allow, let
the vehicle coast for several
seconds without using the
accelerator pedal or the brake
pedal.
Make sure the vehicle has been
parked with the engine off for 30
minutes.
If the testing facility determines the
readiness codes are still not set, see
your dealer.
8.
9.
Emissions Testing
Technical Inf ormation
401
10/04/19 16:31:34 31SJC650_406
2011 Ridgeline
402
10/04/19 16:31:36 31SJC650_407
2011 Ridgeline
....Customer Service Information . 404
....................Warranty Coverages . 405
Reporting Safety Defects
..........................(U.S. Vehicles) . 406
.....................Authorized Manuals . 407
Warranty and Customer Relations
Warranty and Customer Relations
403
10/04/19 16:31:39 31SJC650_408
2011 Ridgeline
Honda dealership personnel are
trained professionals. They should
be able to answer all your questions.
If you encounter a problem that your
dealership does not solve to your
satisfaction, please discuss it with
the dealership’s management. The
service manager or general manager
can help. Almost all problems are
solved in this way.
If you are dissatisfied with the
decision made by the dealership’s
management, contact Honda
Customer Service.
U.S. Owners:
Canadian Owners: When you call or write, please give
us this information:
Vehicle identification number (see
page )
Name and address of the dealer
who services your vehicle
Date of purchase
Odometer reading on your vehicle
Your name, address, and
telephone number
A detailed description of the
problem
Name of the dealer who sold the
vehicle to you
In Puerto Rico and the U.S. Virgin
Islands:
386
Customer Service Information
404
American Honda Motor Co., Inc.
Automobile Customer Service
Mail Stop 500-2N-7A
1919 Torrance Boulevard
Torrance, California 90501-2746
Tel: (800) 999-1009
Honda Canada Inc.
Visit www.honda.ca for contact
information
Tel: 1-888-9-HONDA-9
Fax: 1-877-939-0909
Vortex Motor Corp.
Bella International
P.O. Box 190816
San Juan, PR 00919-0816
Tel: (787) 620-7546
Customer Relations
10/04/19 16:31:47 31SJC650_409
2011 Ridgeline
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
provides
coverageforaslongasthepur-
chaser of the muffler owns the
vehicle.
Your new vehicle is covered by these
warranties:
provides prorated
coverage for a replacement battery
purchased from your dealer.
a seat
belt that fails to function properly is
covered by a limited warranty.
Please read your warranty booklet
for details.
covers all Honda
replacement parts against defects in
materials and workmanship.
Honda accessories are covered
under this warranty. Time and
mileage limits depend on the type of
accessory and other factors. Please
read your warranty booklet for
details.
all exterior body panels are
covered for rust-through from the
inside for the specified time period
with no mileage limit.
Restrictions and exclusions apply to
all these warranties. Please read the
2011 Honda warranty information
booklet that came with your vehicle
for precise information on warranty
coverages. Your vehicle’s original
tires are covered by their
manufacturer. Tire warranty
information is in a separate booklet.
Please refer to the 2011 warranty
manual that came with your vehicle.
covers your new vehicle, except for
the emissions control systems and
accessories, against defects in
materials and workmanship.
these two
warranties cover your vehicle’s
emissions control systems. Time,
mileage, and coverage are
conditional. Please read your
warranty booklet for exact
information.
Warranty Coverages
U.S. Owners
Canadian Owners
Replacement Muffler Lifetime
Limited Warranty
Replacement Battery Limited
Warranty
Seat Belt Limited Warranty
Replacement Parts Limited
Warranty
Accessory Limited Warranty
Rust Perf oration Limited Warranty
New Vehicle Limited Warranty
Emissions Control Systems Defects
Warranty and Emissions
Performance Warranty
Warranty and Customer Relations
405
10/04/19 16:31:56 31SJC650_410
2011 Ridgeline
If NHTSA receives similar com-
plaints, it may open an investigation,
and if it finds that a safety defect
exists in a group of vehicles, it may
order a recall and remedy campaign.
However, NHTSA cannot become
involved in individual problems
between you, your dealer, or
American Honda Motor Co., Inc.
If you believe that your vehicle has a
defect which could cause a crash or
could cause injury or death, you
should immediately inform the
National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration (NHTSA), in addition
to notifying American Honda Motor
Co., Inc.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the
VehicleSafetyHotlinetoll-freeat
1-888-327-4236
(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to
; or write to:
Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New
Jersey Avenue, SE., Washington, DC
20590.
You can also obtain other
information about motor vehicle
safety from .
Reporting Safety Defects (U.S. Vehicles)
406
http://www.safercar.gov
http://www.safercar.gov
10/04/19 16:32:00 31SJC650_411
2011 Ridgeline
The publications shown below can be purchased from Helm
Incorporated. You can order by phone or online:
Call Helm Inc. at 1-800-782-4356 (credit card orders only)
Go online at
If you are interested in other years or models, contact Helm Inc.
at 1-800-782-4356.
Covers maintenance and recommended procedures for
repair to engine and chassis components. It is written
for the journeyman mechanic, but it is simple enough
for most mechanically inclined owners to understand.
Complements the Service Manual by providing in-depth
troubleshooting information for each electrical circuit
in your vehicle.
Describes the procedures involved in the replacement
of damaged body parts.
Authorized Manuals
Purchasing Factory Authorized Manuals Service Manual:
Electrical Troubleshooting Manual:
Body Repair Manual:
(U.S. only)
Authorized Manuals
407
Publication
Form Number
61SJC05
61SJC05EL
61SJC30
31SJC650
31SJC840
31SJCR40
31SJCM50
HON-R
Form Description
2009-2011 Honda Ridgeline Service Manual
2009-2011 Honda Ridgeline
Electrical Troubleshooting Manual
2006 Model Series Ridgeline
Body Repair Manual
2011 Honda Ridgeline Owner’s Manual
2011 Honda Ridgeline Navigation Manual
2011 Honda Ridgeline Technology Reference Guide
2011 Ridgeline Honda Service History
Order Form for Previous Years-Indicate
Year and Model Desired
www. helminc. com
10/04/19 16:32:09 31SJC650_412
2011 Ridgeline
CONTINUED
...Accessories and Modifications . 257
ACCESSORY (Ignition Key
.....................................Position) . 102
............Accessory Power Sockets . 139
...........................AC Power Outlet . 141
................Active Head Restraints . 124
....................Additives, Engine Oil . 327
........Adjusting the Steering wheel . 99
...........................Advanced Airbags . 27
...............................Airbag (SRS) . 9, 23
..............Air Conditioning System . 146
.................................Usage . 147, 153
Air Outlets
...............(Vents) . 148, 151, 155, 156
.......................Air Pressure, Tires . 350
......................................Antifreeze . 329
Anti-lock Brakes (ABS)
...............................Indicator . 66, 289
...................................Operation . 289
..............Anti-theft, Audio System . 206
Anti-theft Steering Column
............................................Lock . 102
........................................Armrests . 122
................Audio System . 159, 167, 173
...Auto Door Locking/Unlocking . 104
Automatic Heated Wiper
..............................Zone . 95, 150, 156
...Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners . 21
.............Automatic Speed Control . 210
..............Automatic Transmission . 271
..........................Capacity, Fluid . 388
...............Checking Fluid Level . 331
.......................................Shifting . 271
Shift Lever Position
...............................Indicators . 271
................Shift Lever Positions . 272
....................Shift Lock Release . 275
......................Auxiliary Input Jack . 205
Back Window
.......................................Indicator . 75
...........................Operation . 128, 129
Battery
Charging System
...........................Indicator . 63, 374
............................Jump Starting . 370
..............................Maintenance . 356
............................Specifications . 389
Bed Lights
.......................................Indicator . 74
...................................Operation . 144
..............................Before Driving . 247
....................................Belts,Seat .8,20
.........................Beverage Holders . 137
........
HandsFreeLink . 221
..................................Booster Seats . 52
Brakes
...........Anti-lock System (ABS) . 289
.............Break-in, New Linings . 248
...........................................Fluid . 334
............Bulb Replacement . 340, 341
.......................................Parking . 132
.................System Indicator . 65, 376
........................Wear Indicators . 288
.............................Braking System . 288
.................Break-in, New Vehicle . 248
..Brightness Control, Instruments . 98
Bluetooth
Index
A
B
INDEX
I
10/04/19 16:32:15 31SJC650_414
2011 Ridgeline
...................Capacities Chart . 388, 389
.............Carbon Monoxide Hazard . 55
.........................Cargo Hooks . 118, 137
.............................Carrying Cargo . 259
.............CAUTION, Explanation of . iii
.........................................CD Care . 198
..........................CD Changer . 181, 189
CD Player/Changer Error
...................................Messages . 202
.......................................CD Player . 175
........................Certification Label . 386
....................................Chains, tire . 354
Change Oil
........................................How to . 327
......................................When to . 313
....................Changing a Flat Tire . 361
...Charging System Indicator . 63, 374
............Checklist, Before Driving . 269
................Childproof Door Locks . 104
.....................................Child Safety . 34
..............................Booster Seats . 52
...................................Child Seats . 41
.....Important Safety Reminders . 34
..........................................Infants . 39
..........................Larger Children . 51
.........................................LATCH . 43
......................Risks with Airbags . 35
.............................Small Children . 40
....................................Tether . 43, 48
.........Where Should a Child Sit? . 35
.......................................Child Seats . 41
.........................................LATCH . 43
..........Tether Anchorage Points . 48
...............Climate Control System . 152
..............................................Clock . 207
....................................Coat Hooks . 138
.....................Code, Audio System . 206
........................CO in the Exhaust . 397
......................Compact Spare Tire . 360
.........................................Compass . 213
.................Console Compartment . 136
.................Consumer Information . 404
.............Controls, Instruments and . 59
Coolant
........................................Adding . 329
....................................Checking . 253
.........................Proper Solution . 329
...................Temperature Gauge . 76
..............................Courtesy Light . 143
Crankcase Emissions Control
........................................System . 397
Cruise Control
.......................................Indicator . 67
...................................Operation . 210
...................................Cup Holders . 137
.........................Customer Service . 404
Bulb Replacement
..........................Back-up Lights . 340
..............................Brake Lights . 340
.................................Bed Lights . 343
.........Daytime Running Lights . 339
.................................Fog Lights . 339
Front Turn Signal/Parking/
.......................Hazard Lights . 338
.................................Headlights . 336
.........High-mount Brake Light . 341
.................License Plate Lights . 342
Rear Bulbs (Brake/Taillights,
Turn Signal/Hazard Lights,
................Back-up Lights) . 340
............................Specifications . 389
......................Bulbs, Halogen . 336, 339
Index
C
II
10/04/19 16:32:19 31SJC650_415
2011 Ridgeline
＊
＊
CONTINUED
..............................Economy, Fuel . 254
..................................Emergencies . 359
.............Battery, Jump Starting . 370
...........Brake System Indicator . 376
................Changing a Flat Tire . 361
.....Charging System Indicator . 374
..................Checking the Fuses . 378
.........Hazard Warning Flashers . 99
.....Low Oil Pressure Indicator . 374
...Malfunction Indicator Lamp . 375
..................Overheated Engine . 372
............................Stuck Vehicle . 383
.......................................Towing . 383
.........................Emergency Brake . 132
.......................Emissions Controls . 397
........................Emissions Testing . 400
Engine
....Coolant Temperature Gauge . 76
Malfunction Indicator
................................Lamp . 63, 375
.................Oil Life Display . 313, 317
........Oil Pressure Indicator . 63, 374
..............Oil, What Kind to Use . 326
...............................Overheating . 372
............................Specifications . 389
............................Speed Limiter . 275
.......................................Starting . 270
.................Engine, if it won’t start . 369
Evaporative Emissions Control
........................................System . 397
...............................Exhaust Fumes . 55
Exhaust Gas Recirculation
........................................System . 398
Expectant Mothers, Use of Seat
........................................Belts by . 18
..........................Fan, Interior . 147, 154
.........................................Features . 145
...............DANGER, Explanation of . iii
...................................Dashboard . 3, 60
................Daytime Running Lights . 97
.................................Dead Battery . 370
.........Defects, Reporting Safety . 406
......Defrosting the Windows . 150, 155
................Differential Fluid, Rear . 333
....................................Dimensions . 388
...............Dimming the Headlights . 95
Dipstick
..........Automatic Transmission . 331
..................................Engine Oil . 253
..........................Directional Signals . 95
........Disc Brake Wear Indicators . 288
.....................Disposal of Used Oil . 328
.Door and Tailgate Open Monitor . 11
Doors
Locking and
..............Unlocking . 103, 104, 107
..................Lockout Prevention . 103
....................Power Door Locks . 103
........DOT Tire Quality Grading . 390
...........Driver and Passenger Safety . 5
...........................................Driving . 267
....................................Economy . 254
...................................................D3 . 273
Dual-Action Tailgate
...............................Indicator . 11, 115
...................................Operation . 113
..................Dust and Pollen Filter . 345
Index
E
F
D
INDEX
III
10/04/19 16:32:25 31SJC650_416
2011 Ridgeline
...............Gas Mileage, Improving . 254
Gasoline
...............Fuel Reserve Indicator . 68
...........................................Gauge . 76
................Octane Requirement . 248
........................Tank, Filling the . 249
................Gas Station Procedures . 249
Gauges
...Engine Coolant Temperature . 76
...............................................Fuel . 76
...............................Speedometer . 76
.................................Tachometer . 76
GAWR (Gross Axle Weight
.......................................Rating) . 294
GCWR (Gross Combined Weight
.......................................Rating) . 294
............Gearshift Lever Positions . 272
......................................Glove Box . 138
GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight
.......................................Rating) . 294
....................Filling the Fuel Tank . 249
Filters
.........................Dust and Pollen . 345
...............................................Oil . 328
.............Flashers, Hazard Warning . 99
...................Flat Tire, Changing a . 361
.....................................Floor Mats . 345
Fluids
..........Automatic Transmission . 331
..........................................Brake . 334
..........................Power Steering . 335
.......................Rear Differential . 333
...................Transfer Assembly . 333
..................Windshield Washer . 330
FM Stereo Radio
...................................Reception . 165
.................Folding the Rear Seats . 125
........................................Fog Lights . 97
..........................Four-way Flashers . 99
..............................Front Seat . 119, 121
............................Adjusting . 119, 121
.....................................Airbags . 9, 25
.......................................Heaters . 126
.................................................Fuel . 248
......................Fill Door and Cap . 249
...........................................Gauge . 76
................Octane Requirement . 248
...............................Oxygenated . 248
........................Reserve Indicator . 68
........................Tank, Filling the . 249
...............................Fuel Economy . 254
Actual Mileage and EPA Fuel
Economy Estimates
.......................Comparison . 254
......Calculating Fuel Economy . 256
.............Fuel Economy Factors . 255
........Improving Fuel Economy . 255
.....................Fuses, Checking the . 378
....Halogen Headlight Bulbs . 336, 339
...........................HandsFreeLink
. 221
..............................HFL Buttons . 221
..............Hazard Warning Flashers . 99
Index
G
H
IV
10/04/19 16:32:29 31SJC650_417
2011 Ridgeline
CONTINUED
.................................Headlights . 94, 95
........................................Aiming . 336
..............Automatic Lighting Off . 96
.................................Control Dial . 95
............Daytime Running Lights . 97
..................High Beam Indicator . 67
.....High Beams, Turning on . 94, 95
............Low Beams, Turning on . 95
.........................Reminder Chime . 96
Replacing Halogen
..............................Bulbs . 336, 339
..................................Turning On . 95
............................Head Restraints . 122
.............................Heated Mirrors . 134
...............................Heaters, Seats . 126
.............Heating and Cooling . 147, 153
.................High-Low Beam Switch . 94
HomeLink
Universal
................................Transceiver . 217
.......................Hood, Opening the . 252
..............................................Horn .4,93
...Identification Number, Vehicle . 386
Ignition
............................................Keys . 100
.........................................Switch . 102
............Timing Control System . 398
......................Immobilizer System . 101
.........Important Safety Precautions . 6
...............................In-Bed Trunk
. 116
..................Emergency Opener . 117
............................Open Indicator . 75
.........Indicators, Instrument Panel . 61
...............ABS (Anti-lock Brake) . 66
.......................A/T Temperature . 69
....................Back Window Open . 75
.............................Bed Lights On . 74
Brake (Parking and Brake
....................................System) . 65
........................Charging System . 63
.............................Cruise Control . 67
.................................Cruise Main . 67
...................................Door Open . 75
DRL (Daytime Running
......................................Lights) . 67
...................................High Beam . 67
....................In-Bed Trunk Open . 75
........Key (Immobilizer System) . 66
.....................................Lights On . 69
......................................Low Fuel . 68
........................Low Oil Pressure . 63
......................Low Tire Pressure . 72
...............Maintenance Minder . 71
Malfunction Indicator Lamp
.......................................(MIL) . 63
...........................Side Airbag Off . 64
.......................................Seat Belt . 62
..........................Security System . 68
...............................................SRS . 64
..............................Tailgate Open . 75
.......................TPMS System . 72, 73
Turn Signal and Hazard
...................................Warning . 66
VSA
.................................VSA System . 70
..........................................VTM-4 . 70
..............................Washer Level . 67
..................Individual Map Lights . 143
...............................Infant Restraint . 39
......................................Infant Seats . 39
...................Inflation, Proper Tire . 349
Index
INDEX
I
V
TM
10/04/19 16:32:34 31SJC650_418
2011 Ridgeline
......................................OFF . 71
................Jacking Up the Vehicle . 363
.......................................Jack, Tire . 363
................................Jump Starting . 370
................................................Keys . 100
...................Neutral Gear Position . 273
..................New Vehicle Break-in . 248
...................NOTICE, Explanation of . i
...............Numbers, Identification . 386
........................Information Display . 77
.........Engine Oil Life Indicator . 313
...........Maintenance Items . 316, 324
.................................Inside Mirror . 133
.............................Inspection, Tire . 350
........................Instrument Panel . 4, 93
........Instrument Panel Brightness . 98
...............................Interior Lights . 142
........................................Introduction . i
.......................Label, Certification . 386
.................Lane Change, Signaling . 95
..................Lap/Shoulder Belts . 16, 21
...........................Light Control Dial . 95
Lights
....................Bulb Replacement . 336
.......................................Indicator . 69
.......................................Interior . 142
.........................................Parking . 95
..................................Turn Signal . 95
............................Load Limits . 260, 293
....LOCK (Ignition Key Position) . 102
Locks
.....Anti-theft Steering Column . 102
............................Fuel Fill Door . 249
..................................Glove Box . 138
...........................In-Bed Trunk
. 116
..................Lockout Prevention . 103
...............................Power Door . 103
........................Low Coolant Level . 253
.........................Low Fuel Indicator . 68
...Low Oil Pressure Indicator . 63, 374
Lubricant Specifications
..................................Chart . 388, 389
...........Luggage, Storing (Cargo) . 259
..................................Maintenance . 311
................................Minder . 313-324
.........................Minder Indicator . 71
Owner’s Maintenance
...................................Checks . 323
..........................................Safety . 312
.Malfunction Indicator Lamp . 63, 375
............Manual Seat Adjustments . 119
...............................Meters, Gauges . 76
........................Mirrors, Adjusting . 134
...............Modifying Your Vehicle . 258
.......................................Moonroof . 131
.............Multi-Information Display . 82
............Engine Oil Life Display . 317
...........Maintenance Items . 321, 324
Index
J
K
L
M
N
VI
10/04/19 16:32:40 31SJC650_419
2011 Ridgeline
＊
CONTINUED
...Octane Requirement, Gasoline . 248
.........................................Odometer . 76
....................Off-Highway Driving . 306
...................Off-Road Precautions . 307
Oil
........................Change, How to . 327
......................Change, When to . 313
......................Checking Engine . 253
...........................................Filter . 328
..............Pressure Indicator . 63, 374
Selecting Proper Viscosity
......................................Chart . 326
.........ON (Ignition Key Position) . 102
............................Outside Mirrors . 134
....................Overheating, Engine . 372
....Owner’s Maintenance Checks . 323
.........................Oxygenated Fuels . 248
..............Panel Brightness Control . 98
........................Park Gear Position . 272
...........................................Parking . 286
...............................Parking Brake . 132
.................................Parking Lights . 95
..Parking Over Things that Burn . 287
.............................PGM-FI System . 398
Pickup Bed
.........................Carrying Cargo . 259
.........................................Lights . 144
..............Power Seat Adjustments . 121
...............Power Socket Locations . 139
.........Pregnancy, Using Seat Belts . 18
.........Protecting Adults and Teens . 11
...Additional Safety Precautions . 19
.....Advice for Pregnant Women . 18
........................Protecting Children . 34
.....................General Guidelines . 34
.......................Protecting Infants . 39
.......Protecting Larger Children . 51
.........Protecting Small Children . 40
Using Child Seats with
.....................................Tethers . 48
.............................Using LATCH . 43
...................Radiator Overheating . 372
Radio/CD Sound
.......................System . 159, 167, 173
.................Rear Differential Fluid . 333
..Rear Lights, Bulb Replacement . 340
...........................Rearview Mirror . 133
..Rearview Mirror with Compass . 213
....................Rear (Back) Window . 129
.....Reclining the Seat-Backs . 120, 121
................Remote Audio Controls . 203
.....................Remote Transmitter . 110
Replacement Information
................Engine Oil and Filter . 327
..........................................Fuses . 378
................................Light Bulbs . 336
........................................Minder . 324
................................Timing Belt . 336
...........................................Tires . 361
.............................Wiper Blades . 346
Replacing Seat Belts After a
............................................Crash . 22
..........Reporting Safety Defects . 406
...Reserve Tank, Engine Coolant . 253
..................Reverse Gear Position . 272
................................Rotation, Tire . 351
Index
INDEX
P
R
O
VII
10/04/19 16:32:45 31SJC650_420
2011 Ridgeline
＊
＊
..................................Safety Belts . 8, 20
.........Safety Defects, Reporting . 406
.................................Safety Features . 7
...........................................Airbags . 9
..................................Door Locks . 11
..........................Head Restraints . 15
.................................Seat Belts . 8, 20
...........Seats and Seat-Backs . 13, 14
.............Safety Labels, Location of . 56
..............................Safety Messages . iii
.....................................Seat Belts . 8, 20
...............Additional Information . 20
Automatic Seat Belt
...............................Tensioners . 21
.....................................Cleaning . 344
......................Lap/Shoulder Belt . 21
................................Maintenance . 22
Reminder Light and
................................Beeper . 20, 62
...................System Components . 20
...............Use During Pregnancy . 18
...Wearing a Lap/Shoulder Belt . 16
.........................Seating Capacities . 388
...............................................Seats . 119
............Adjusting the Seat . 119, 121
.............Folding the Rear Seats . 125
........................Head Restraints . 122
........................................Heater . 126
............................Security System . 208
...............................Serial Number . 386
...........................Service Intervals . 324
......Service Manual, Purchasing . 407
.........Service Station Procedures . 249
Shifting the Automatic
.............................Transmission . 271
...Shift Lever Position Indicators . 271
........................Shift Lock Release . 275
................................Side Airbags . 9, 28
................Side Curtain Airbags . 10, 30
Side Marker (Parking)
...Lights, Bulb Replacement in . 338
...............................Signaling Turns . 95
.....................................Snow Tires . 353
................Sound System . 159, 167, 173
Spare Tire
..............................Inflating . 350, 360
....................Specifications . 353, 389
....................Specifications Charts . 388
................................Speed Control . 210
...................................Speedometer . 76
..........SRS, Additional Information . 23
...Additional Safety Precautions . 33
......Airbag System Components . 23
.............................Airbag Service . 32
How the Passenger Airbag Off
......................Indicator Works . 31
How the Side Airbag Off
......................Indicator Works . 31
..How the SRS Indicator Works . 30
How Your Front Airbags
.........................................Work . 25
...How Your Side Airbags Work . 28
How Your Side Curtain Airbags
.........................................Work . 30
.............................SRS Indicator . 30, 64
..START (Ignition Key Position) . 102
.......................Starting the Engine . 270
................With a Dead Battery . 370
........Steam Coming from Engine . 372
Steering Wheel
..................................Adjustment . 99
...........Anti-theft Column Lock . 102
...Stereo Sound System . 159, 167, 173
....................Storing Your Vehicle . 357
................................Stuck Vehicle . 383
Index
S
VIII
10/04/19 16:32:49 31SJC650_421
2011 Ridgeline
＊
＊
＊
CONTINUED
........................................Sun Visor . 140
........................Sunglasses Holder . 138
Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS)
......................................Servicing . 32
.........................SRS Indicator . 30, 64
...................System Components . 23
..................................Synthetic Oil . 327
Unexpected, Taking Care
..........................................of the . 359
..Uniform Tire Quality Grading . 390
.....................................Tachometer . 76
Tailgate, Dual-Action
...............................Indicator . 11, 115
...................................Operation . 113
......Taillights, Changing Bulbs in . 340
.Taking Care of the Unexpected . 359
Technical Descriptions
....DOT Tire Quality Grading . 390
.....Emissions Control Systems . 397
Three Way Catalytic
...............................Converter . 399
.......................Temperature Gauge . 76
...................Tensioners, Seat Belts . 21
............................Theft Protection . 206
..Three Way Catalytic Converter . 399
....................................Timing Belt . 336
....................................Tire Chains . 354
.........Tire, How to Change a Flat . 361
.................................Tire Labeling . 392
Tire Pressure Monitoring
....................System (TPMS) . 278
Low Tire Pressure
...........................Indicator . 72, 278
Required Federal
............................Explanation . 394
.............Tire Pressure Monitor . 279
....TPMS Indicator . 72, 73, 279, 281
...............................................Tires . 348
..............................Air Pressure . 350
.........................Checking Wear . 350
..........................Compact Spare . 360
....DOT Tire Quality Grading . 390
......................................Inflation . 349
..................................Inspection . 350
..............................Maintenance . 351
...................................Replacing . 352
......................................Rotating . 351
...........................................Snow . 353
....................Specifications . 353, 389
................................Tire Chains . 354
...................Tools, Tire Changing . 361
Towing
.....................................A Trailer . 296
................Emergency Wrecker . 383
.................................Equipment . 301
....Equipment and Accessories . 297
.............................Weight Limit . 293
.........................Trailer Loading . 295
.................Trailer Towing Tips . 303
.............Transfer Assembly Fluid . 333
Transmission
...............Checking Fluid Level . 331
...........................Fluid Selection . 332
..............Identification Number . 387
.............Shifting the Automatic . 271
.....................................Treadwear . 390
.................................Trip Meter . 79, 84
................................Trunk, In-Bed . 116
....................................Turn Signals . 95
Index
U
T
INDEX
IX
10/04/19 16:32:54 31SJC650_422
2011 Ridgeline
＊＊
........................Unleaded Gasoline . 248
.......Used Oil, How to Dispose of . 328
............WARNING, Explanation of . iii
.........Warning Labels, Location of . 56
..................Warranty Coverages . 405
Washer, Windshield
........Checking the Fluid Level . 330
............................Level Indicator . 67
.....................................Operation . 94
...........................................Wheels . 348
...............Adjusting the Steering . 99
......................................Wrench . 364
Windows
................Operating the Power . 128
Windshield
...........................Defroster . 148, 155
.......................................Washers . 94
...Wiper Zone, Heated . 95, 150, 156
Wipers, Windshield
.......................Changing Blades . 346
.....................................Operation . 94
....................................Worn Tires . 350
.....Wrecker, Emergency Towing . 383
.....................................XM
Radio . 167
................................Vanity Mirror . 140
.........Vehicle Capacity Load . 260, 388
......................Vehicle Dimensions . 388
....Vehicle Identification Number . 386
Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA
),
aka Electronic Stability
....Control (ESC), System . 290
VSA
.........................VSA Off Switch . 292
........VSA System Indicator . 70, 291
.............................Vehicle Storage . 357
.....................................Ventilation . 149
.................................................VIN . 386
..................................Viscosity, Oil . 326
Variable Torque Management
4-wheel drive system
...............................(VTM-4
) . 276
................................VTM-4
Lock . 276
:U.S.only
Index
X
V
W
X
10/04/19 16:33:00 31SJC650_423
2011 Ridgeline
.............OFF Indicator . 71, 291
Service Information Summary
Gasoline: Tire Pressure (measured cold):
Fuel Tank Capacity:
Recommended Engine Oil:
Automatic Transmission Fluid:
Power Steering Fluid:
Brake Fluid:
Rear Differential Fluid:
Transfer Assembly Fluid:
32 psi (220 kPa , 2.2 kgf/cm
)
Front/Rear:
Compact Spare Tire:
60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm
)
22.01 US gal (83.3
)
API Premium grade 5W-20
detergent oil (see page ).
Oil change capacity (including
filter):
4.5 US qt (4.3
)
Honda Genuine ATF-Z1
(automatic transmission fluid)
(see page ).
Honda Power Steering Fluid
preferred, or another brand of
power steering fluid as a
temporary replacement. Do not
use ATF (see page ).
Honda Heavy Duty Brake Fluid
DOT 3 preferred, or a DOT 3 or
DOT 4 brake fluid as a temporary
replacement (see page ).
Honda VTM-4 Differential Fluid
(see page ).
Unleaded gasoline, pump octane
number of 87 or higher.
SAE 90 or SAE 80W-90 viscosity
hypoid gear oil, API service
classified GL4 or GL5 only.
335
333
332
334
326
10/04/19 16:33:20 31SJC650_427
2011 Ridgeline
This owner’s manual should be considered
a permanent part of the vehicle and should
remain with the vehicle when it is sold.
The information and specifications included
in this publication were in effect at the time
of approval for printing. Honda Motor Co.,
Ltd. reserves the right, however, to
discontinue or change specifications or
design at any time without notice and
without incurring any obligation whatsoever.
This owner’s manual covers all models of
the Ridgeline. You may find descriptions of
equipment and features that are not on your
particular model.
Owner’s Identification
POUR CLIENTS CANADIEN
AVIS IMPORTANT: Si vous avez
besoin d’un Manuel du Conducteur
en français, veuillez demander à
votreconcessionnairede
commander le numéro de pièce
33SJCC50
OWNER
ADDRESS
V. I. N.
DELIVERY DATE
DEALER NAME DEALER NO.
ADDRESS
OWNER’S SIGNATURE
DEALER’S SIGNATURE
STREET
CITY STATE/PROVINCE/TERRITORY ZIP CODE/
POSTAL CODE
(Date sold to original retail purchaser)
STREET
CITY STATE/PROVINCE/TERRITORY ZIP CODE/
POSTAL CODE
10/04/19 15:37:44 31SJC650_001
2011 Ridgeline
